Disclosure to Promote the Right To Information

Whereas the Parliament of India has set out to provide a practical regime of right to
information for citizens to secure access to information under the control of public authorities,
in order to promote transparency and accountability in the working of every public authority,
and whereas the attached publication of the Bureau of Indian Standards is of particular interest
to the public, particularly disadvantaged communities and those engaged in the pursuit of
education and knowledge, the attached public safety standard is made available to promote the
timely dissemination of this information in an accurate manner to the public.
1 +, 1 +

01 ' 5

The Right to Information, The Right to Live

Step Out From the Old to the New

Mazdoor Kisan Shakti Sangathan

Jawaharlal Nehru

IS 800 (2007): General Construction In Steel - Code of

Practice [CED 7: Structural Engineering and structural
sections]

! $ ' +-
Satyanarayan Gangaram Pitroda

Invent a New India Using Knowledge

! > 0 B

BharthariNtiatakam

Knowledge is such a treasure which cannot be stolen

IS 800:2007

Indian Standard
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION IN
STEEL CODE OF PRACTICE
( Third Revision)

ICS 77.140.01

0 BIS 2007

BUREAU
MANAK

December 2007

OF
BHAVAN,

INDIAN

STANDARDS

9 BAHADUR
SHAH
NEW DELHI 110002

ZAFAR

MARG

Price Rs. 1130.!?!

Structural Engineering

and Structural

Sections Sectional Committee,

CED 7

FOREWORD
This Indian Standard (Third Revision) was adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards, after the draft finalized
by the Structural Engineering and Structural Sections Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil
Engineering Division Council.
The steel economy programme was initiated by erstwhile Indian Standards Institution in the year 1950 with the
objective of achieving economy in the use of structural steel by establishing rational, efficient and optimum
standards for structural steel products and their use. IS 800: 1956 was the first in the series of Indian Standards
brought out under this programme. The standard was revised in 1962 and subsequently in 1984, incorporating
certain very importmt changes.
IS 800 is the basic Code for general construction in steel structures and is the prime document for any structural
design and has influence on many other codes governing the design of other special steel structures, such as
towers, bridges, silos, chimneys, etc. Realising the necessity to update the standard to the state of the art of the
steel construction technology and economy, the current revision of the standard was undertaken. Consideration
has been given tO the de~elopments taking place in the country and abroad, and necessary modifications and
additions have been incorporated to make the standard more useful.
The revised standard will enhance the confidence of designers, engineers, contractors, technical institutions,
professional bodies and the industry and will open a new era in safe and economic construction in steel.
In this revision the following

major modifications

have been effected:

a)

In view ofthe development and production of new varieties of medium and high tensile structural steels
in the country, the scope of the standard has been modified permitting the use of any variety of structural
steel provided the relevant provisions of the standard are satisfied.

b)

The standard has made reference to the Indian Standards now available for rivets; bolts and other fasteners.

c)

The standard is based on limit state method, reflecting the latest developments

and the state of the art.

The revision of the standard was based on a review carried out and the proposals framed by Indian Institute of
Technology Madras (IIT Madras). The project was supported by Institute of Steel Development and Growth
(INSDAG) Kolkata. There has been considerable contribution from INSDAG and IIT Madras, with assistance
from a number of academic, research, design and contracting institutes/organizations,
in the preparation of the
revised standard.
In the formulation
AS-4 100-1998

of this standard the following publications

have also been considered:

CAN/CSAS16.1-94
ENV [993-1-1:
1992 Part 1-1

Steel structures (second edition), Standards Australia (Standards Association of Australia),

Homebush, NSW 2140,
Structural use of steelwork in buildings:
Code of practice for design in simple and continuous construction: Hot rolled sections, British
Standards Institution, London.
Limit states design of steel structures, Canadian Standards Association, Rexdale (Toronto),
Ontario, Canada M9W 1R3.
Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures:
General rules and rules for buildings

The composition

of the Committee

BS-5950-2000
Part 1

responsible

for the formulation

of this standard is given in Annex J.

For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard, is complied with, the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS 2:1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.

1S 800:2007

Contents

SECTION
1.1
1.2
1.3
1,4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8

1 GENERAL

1
1
1
5
11
11
11
12

scope
References
Terminology
Symbols
Units
Standard Dimensions, Form and Weight
Plans and Drawings
Convention for Member Axes

12

SECTION 2 MATERIALS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2,4
2.5
2.6
2.7

SECTION 3 GENERAL
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10

DESIGN

15

REQUIREMENTS

15
15
16
16
16
17
17
20
20
21

Basis for Design

Loads and Forces
Erection Loads
Temperature Effects
Load Combinations
Geometrical Properties
Classification of Cross-Sections
Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio
Resistance to Horizontal Forces
Expansion Joints

SECTION
4.1
4.2
4,3
4.4
4.5
4.6
SECTION
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5,5
5.6
SECTION
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

12
12
12
15
15
15
15

General
Structural Steel
Rivets
Bolts, Nuts and Washers
SteeI Casting
Welding Consumable
Other Materials

4 METHODS

OF STRUCTURAL

22

ANALYSIS

22
22
23
24
25
26

Methods of Determining Action Effects

Forms of Construction Assumed for Structural Analysis
Assumptions in Analysis
Elastic Analysis
Plastic Analysis
Frame Buckling Analysis
STATE DESIGN

27

Basis for Design

Limit State Design
Actions
Strength
Factors Governing the Ultimate Strength
Limit State of Serviceability

27
28
28
29
30
30

5 LIMIT

6 DESIGN
Tension
Design
Design
Design

OF TENSION

MEMBERS

.,

Members
Strength Due to Yielding of Gross Section
Strength Due to Rupture of Critical Section
Strength Due to Block Shear
i

32
32
32
32
33

IS 800:2007
SECTION
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8

7 DESIGN

OF COMPRESS1ON

34

MEMBERS

Design Strength
Effective Length of Compression Members
Design Details
Column Bases
Angle Struts
Laced Columns
Battened Columns
Compression Members Composed of Two Components

SECTION
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
SECTION
9.1
9.2
9.3
SECTION

8 DESIGN

OF MEMBERS

SUBJECTED

Back-to-Back

TO BENDING

SUBJECTED

TO COMBINED

69

FORCES

69
69
70

General
Combined Shear and Bending
Combined Axial Force and Bending Moment

73

10 CONNECTIONS

73
73
74
76
78
81
82
82
82
82
83
83

10.1 General
10.2 Location Details of Fasteners
10.3 Bearing Type Bolts
10.4 Friction Grip Type Bolting
10.5 Welds and Welding
10.6 Design of Connections
10.7 Minimum Design Action on Connection
10.8 Intersections
10.9 Choice of Fasteners
10.10 Connection Components
10.11 Analysis of a Bolt/Weld Group
10.12 Lug Angles
SECTION
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
SECTION
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7

11 WORKING

STRESS

52
52
52
54
59
60
63
65
69
69
69

General
Design Strength in Bending (Flexure)
Effective Length for Lateral Torsional Buckling
Shear
Stiffened Web Panels
Design of Beams and Plate Girders with Solid Webs
Stiffener Design
Box Girders
Purlins and Sheeting Rails (Girts)
Bending in a Non-Principal Plane
9 MEMBER

34
35
46
46
47
48
50
52

84

DESIGN

84
84
84
85
85
86

General
Tension Members
Compression Members
Members Subjected to Bending
Combined Stresses
Connections
12 DESIGN AND DETAILING

FOR EARTHQUAKE

General
Load and Load Combinations
Response Reduction Factor
Connections, Joints and Fasteners
Columns
Storey Drift
Ordinary Concentrically Braced Frames (OCBF)
ii

LOADS

87
87
87
87
87
87
88
88

IS 8~0 :2007
12.8 Special Concentrically

88

Braced Frames (SCBF)

12.9 Eccentrically Braced Frames (EBF)

1~. 10 Ordinav Moment Frames (OMF)

89

12.11 Special Moment Frames (SMF)

90

12.12 Column Bases

90

SECTION

89

91

13 FATIGUE

13.1 General
13.2 Design

91
91

13.3 Detail Category

92

13.4 Fatigue Strength

93
99

13.5 Fatigue Assessment

100

13.6 Necessity for Fatigue Assessment

SECTION

14 DESIGN ASSISTED

100

BY TESTING

14.1 Need for Testing

100

14.2 Types of Test

101

14.3 Test Conditions

102

14.4 Test Loading

102

14.5 Criteria for Acceptance

103

SECTION

15.1 General
15.2 Requirements
SECTION

103

15 DURABILITY

103
103

for Durability

105

16 FIRE RESISTANCE

16.1 Requirements

105

16.2 Fire Resistance Level

105

16.3 Period of Structural Adequacy (PSA)

106

16.4 Variation of Mechanical

106

Properties of Steel with Temperature

16.5 Limiting Steel Temperature

106

16.6 Temperature

Increase with Time in Protected Members

107

16.7 Temperature

Increase with Time in Unprotected

108

16.8 Determination
16.9 Three-Sided

Members

108

of PSA from a Single Test

108

Fire Exposure Condition

16.10 Special Considerations

108

16.11 Fire Resistance Rating

109

SECTION

17 FABRICATION

110

AND ERECTION

110

17.1 General
17.2 Fabrication

110

Procedures

17.3 Assembly

112

17.4 Riveting

113

17.5 Bolting

113

17.6 Welding

113

17.7 Machining of Butts, Caps and Bases

113

17.8 Painting

113

17.9 Marking

114

17.10 Shop Erection

114

17.11 Packing

114

17.12 Inspection and Testing

114

17.13 Site Erection

114

17.14 Painting After Erection

116

17.16 Steelwork Tenders and Contracts

116
..
111

IS 800:2007
ANNEX A LIST OF REFERRED

INDIAN

117

STANDARDS

METHODS

120

B-1 Advanced Structural Analysis and Design

B-2 Second Order Elastic Analysis and Design
B-3 Frame Instability Analysis

120
120
120

ANNEX B ANALYSIS

ANNEX C DESIGN
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5

AND DESIGN

AGAINST

FLOOR

121

VIBRATION

121
121
121
122
122

General
Annoyance Criteria
Floor Frequency
Damping
Acceleration

ANNEX D DETERMINATION

OF EFFECTIVE

LENGTH

OF COLUMNS

D-1 Method for Determining Effective Length of Columns in Frames

D-2 Method for Determining Effective Length for Stepped Columns (see 7.2.2)
D-3 Effective Length for Double Stepped Columns
ANNEX E ELASTIC

LATERAL

TORSIONAL

128
130

ANNEX F CONNECTIONS
General
Beam Splices
Column Splice
Beam-to-Column
Column Bases

130
130
130
131
134

Connections

ANNEX G GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

AND CONTRACTS
G-1
G-2
G-3
G+4
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-9

FOR STEELWORK

General
Exchange of Information
Information Required by the Steelwork Designer
Information Required by Tenderer (If Not Also Designer)
Detailing
Time Schedule
Procedure on Site
Inspection
Maintenance

ANNEX H PLASTIC

122
124
124
128

BUCKLING

E-1 Elastic Critical Moment

F-1
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5

122

PROPERTIES

TENDERS

135
135
135
135
136
137
137
137
137
137
138

OF BEAMS

iv

AMENDMENT NO. 1 JANUARY 2012

TO
IS 800 : 2007 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION IN STEEL
CODE OF PRACTICE
(Third Revision)
[(Page (iii), Section 17] Insert the following new item, as appropriate:
17.15 Bedding Requirement

116

(Page 6, line 38) Delete the symbols Cmy, Cmz and the corresponding explanation.
(Page 8, line 33) Insert the following symbols and explanations after this line:
Ky, Kz, KLT Moment amplification factors (see 4.4.2, 4.4.3.1, 4.4.3.3 and 9.3.2.2)
(Page 18, Table 2, col 2) Substitute d/t for D/tf for entry against Stem of a T-section, rolled or cut
from a rolled I- or H-section.
(Page 18, Table 2, col 3, 4 and 5) Substitute but 42 for but 42 for entries against Web of an I,
H or box section.
(Page 18, Table 2, Notes, last line) Substitute overall for overll.
(Page 19, Fig. 2, ROLLED CHANNELS) Substitute d for h in the figure.
(Page 24, clause 4.4.2, line 10) Substitute Ky, Kz for Cy, Cz.
(Page 24, clause 4.4.3.1, line 9) Substitute Ky and Kz for Cy and Cz.
(Page 24, clause 4.4.3.3, line 3) Substitute (Ky, Kz) for (Cmy, Cmz).
(Page 25, clause 4.5.2, line 19) Insert less between be and than.
(Page 31, clause 5.6.1, line 6) Substitute using load factors of Table 4. for using a load factor of 1.0.
(Page 31, clause 5.6.1, third sentence) Insert the following at the end:
In Table 6, live load should include all post construction loads including superimposed dead loads.
(Page 33, clause 6.3.3, line 6) Substitute 0.9 fu m0/fy m1 for fu m0/fy m1.
(Page 34, clause 7.1.2, line 1) Substitute the following for the existing:
The factored design compression, P in members shall satisfy the following requirement:
P < P d
(Page 34, clause 7.1.2.1, line 20) Substitute m0 for m0.

Price Group 3

Amend No. 1 to IS 800 : 2007

(Page 35, Fig. 8) Insert as the title of the abscissa (x-axis).
(Page 44, Table 10, col 2, line 3) Substitute 40 mm < tf 100 mm for 40 mm < tf 100 mm.
(Page 45, Table 11, second row, col 1 and 2) Substitute the following for the existing entries:
(1)
Restrained

(2)
Free

(Page 48, clause 7.5.1.2, line 4) Add the following in the end:
, in place of in 7.1.2.1 and using curve c ( = 0.49)
(Page 48, clause 7.5.1.2, line 9, formula) Substitute the following for the existing:

l

rvv and b1 b2 / 2t
vv

E
250

E
250

(Page 49, Fig. 10) Substitute the following figure for the existing as appropriate, and substitute
Members for Numbers in the sub-title of Fig. 10C and substitute the existing title of Fig. 10 with TOP
RESTRAINT CONDITIONS:

(Page 53, clause 8.2.1.1, line 3) Substitute d/tw > 67 for d/tw 67.
(Page 54, clause 8.3.1, second para) Substitute the following for the existing:
In simply supported beams with intermediate lateral restraints against lateral torsional buckling, the effective
length for lateral torsional buckling, LLT to be used in 8.2.2.1 shall be taken as the length of the relevant segment
in between the lateral restraints. In the case of intermediate partial lateral restraints, the effective length, LLT
shall be taken as equal to 1.2 times the length of the relevant segment in between the partial lateral restraints.
(Page 57, Table 14) Substitute LLT/ry and hf/tf for KL/r and h/tf.
(Page 58, clause 8.3.2, line 9) Insert centre between shear and and.
(Page 58, Table 15, col 3, first row) Substitute Both flanges partially restrained for Both flanges fully
restrained.
2

Amend No. 1 to IS 800 : 2007

(Page 59, clause 8.4.2.1) Substitute w for and fyw for fy, wherever appearing.
(Page 60, clause 8.4.2.2, col 1, line 18 from top) Substitute

cr,e

(Page 60, clause 8.4.2.2, col 2, line 52) Substitute nearly = tan-1

for

d
c

1.5

cr,e

d
for = tan-1 c .

(Page 60, clause 8.4.2.2, col 2, line 55) Substitute = d cos (c sc st) sin, for the existing.
(Page 60, clause 8.4.2.2, col 2, lines 59 and 60) Delete the lines.
(Page 60, clause 8.5.1, line 3) Insert out between carried and in.
(Page 61, Table 16, last row, col 1) Substitute the following for the existing figure:

(Page 62, Fig. 12) Substitute the following for the existing figure:

NOTES
1 Panel A is designed utilizing tension field action as given in 8.4.2.2(b).
2 Panel B is designed using simple post critical method as given in 8.4.2.2(a).
3 Bearing stiffener is designed for the compressive force due to bearing plus compressive force due to the
moment Mtf as given in 8.5.3.

FIG. 12 END PANEL DESIGNED NOT USING TENSION FIELD ACTION

(Page 63, Fig. 13, Notes) Delete NOTE 2 and renumber the subsequent Note accordingly.
(Page 63, clause 8.6.1.1) Substitute w for wherever appearing.
(Page 63, clause 8.6.1.1, line 13) Substitute c < 0.74d for c < d.

Amend No. 1 to IS 800 : 2007

(Page 64, clause 8.6.1.2, line 15) Substitute f = yield stress ratio of flange =
stress ratio of web =

250
for f = yield
f yf

250
.
f yf

(Page 65, clause 8.7.1.2, second para, line 1) Insert stiffener between the words web and is.
[Page 70, clause 9.3.1.2(c)] Substitute the following for the existing:
c) For standard I or H sections
Mndz = 1.11 Mdz (1 n) Mdz
for n 0.2,
for n > 0.2,

Mndy = Mdy
Mndy = 1.56 Mdy (1 - n) (n + 0.6)

(Page 72, Table 18) Substitute the following for the existing table:
Bending Moment Diagram
(1)

Mh

Ms

Uniform Loading
(3)

1 1

0 s 1

Mh

Cmy, Cmz, CmLT

Range
(2)

Concentrated Load
(4)

0.6 + 0.4 0.4

1 1

0.2 + 0.8 s 0.4

0.2 + 0.8 s 0.4

01

0.1 0.8 s 0.4

0.8 s 0.4

1 0

0.1(1) 0.8 s 0.4

0.2() 0.8 s 0.4

1 1

0.95 0.05 h

01

0.95 + 0.05 h

0.90 + 0.10 h

1 0

0.95 + 0.05 h (1+2 )

0.90 + 0.1h (1+2 )

1 s 0

s = Ms/ Mh
0 h 1
Mh

Ms

M h
h = Mh/ Ms

1 h 0

0.90 + 0.10 h

For members with sway buckling mode, the equivalent uniform moment factor Cmy = Cmz = 0.9.
Cmy, Cmz, CmLT shall be obtained according to the bending moment diagram between the relevant braced points
Moment factor
Cmy
Cmz
CmLT

Bending axis
zz
yy
zz

Points braced in direction

yy
zz
zz

My

for Cmy

Mz

for CmLT

for Cmz

Amend No. 1 to IS 800 : 2007

(Page 75, clause 10.3.2, line 3) Substitute the following for the existing:
Vsb Vdb
(Page 76, clause 10.4.3, first sentence) Substitute the following for the existing:
Design for friction type bolting, where slip resistance is required at factored design force Vsf, shall satisfy the
following:
(Page 76, clause 10.4.3, line 14) Substitute f 0.55 for f = 0.55.
(Page 76, clause 10.4.3, Note, line 1) Substitute Vnsf for Vns.
(Page 77, clause 10.4.5, col 1, line 6, from top, formula) Substitute 0.9 fub An fyb Asb(m1/m0) for 0.9
fub An fyb Asb(m1/m).
(Page 80, clause 10.5.10.2.2, line 7, formula) Substitute f br2 for f bf2 .
(Page 89, clause 12.8.2.1, first sentence) Substitute the following for the existing:
Bracing members shall be made of E250B steel of IS 2062 or of steel having Charpy V-notch energy, E > 27J.
(Page 90, clause 12.11.1, line 2) Insert or of steel having Charpy V-notch energy, E > 27J between
IS 2062 and and.
(Page 106, clause 16.4.1, line 4, formula) Substitute

fy T

f y 20

905 T
690

1.0 for the existing.

(Page 121, Annex B, clause B-3.2, line 10 from top, formula) Substitute si =

u L
h

ui Li
hi

for s =

(Page 121, Annex B, clause B-3.2, lines 12, 13 and 16 from top) Substitute hi, ui and Li for h, u
and L.
(Page 128, Annex E, clause E-1.2, line 5, formula) Substitute (LLT)2 for (LLT).
(Page 128, Annex E, clause E-1.2, line 30) Substitute (z2 + y2)2 for (z2 y2).
(Page 129, Annex E, clause E-1.2, col 1, line 18 from top) Insert St. Venants before torsion.
(Page 130, Table 42, col 5, row 7) Substitute 1.267 for 1.257.
(Page 129, Table 42, col 6, rows 5 and 10) Substitute 1.730 for 1.780 and 1.890 for 1.390,
respectively.
(CED 7)
5

Reprography Unit, BIS, New Delhi, India

. . . .... .

-=

IS 800:2007

Indian Standard
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION IN
STEEL CODE OF PRACTICE
( Third Revision)
1.3.1 Accidental Loads Loads due to explosion,
impact of vehicles, or other rare loads for which the
structure is considered to be vulnerable as per the user.

SECTION 1
GENERAL
1.1 Scope

1.3.2 Accompanying
Load Live (imposed) load
acting along with leading imposed load but causing
lower actions and/or deflections.

1.1.1 This standard applies to general construction

using hot rolled steel sections joined using riveting,
bolting and welding. Specific provisions for bridges,

1.3.3 Action Effect or Load Effect The internal force,

axial, shear, bending or twisting moment, due to
external actions and temperature loads,

chimneys, cranes, tanks, transmission line towers, bulk

storage structures, tubular structures, cold formed light
gauge steel sections, etc, are covered in separate
standards.

1.3.4 Action The primary cause for stress or

deformations in a structure such as dead, live, wind,
seismic or temperature loads.

1.1.2 This standard gives only general guidance as regards

the various loads to be considered in design. For the actual
loads and load combinations to be used, reference may
be made to IS 875 for dead, live, snow and wind loads
and to IS 1893 (Part 1) for earthquake loads.

1.3.5 Actual Length The length between centre-tocentre of intersection points, with supporting members
or the cantilever length in the case of a free standing
member.

1.1.3 Fabrication and erection requirements covered

in this standard are general and the minimum necessary
quality of material and workmanship consistent with
assumptions
in the design
rules. The actual
requirements may be further developed as per other
standards or the project specification,
the type of
structure and the method of construction.

1.3.6 Beam A member subjected

bending.

predominantly to

1.3.7 Bearing Type Connection A connection made

using bolts in snug-tight condition, or rivets where
the load is transferred by bearing of bolts or rivets
against plate inside the bolt hole.

1.1.4 For seismic design, recommendations

pertaining
to steel frames only are covered in this standard. For
more detailed information on seismic design of other
structural and non-structural
components,
refrence
should be made to IS 1893 (Part 1) and other special
publications on the subject.

1.3.8 Braced Member A member in which the

relative transverse displacement is effectively prevented
by bracing.
1.3.9 Brittle Cladding Claddings, such as asbestos
cement sheets which get damaged before undergoing
considerable deformation.

1.2 References
1.3.10 Buckling Load The load at which an element,
a member or a structure as a whole, either collapses in
service or buckles in a load test and develops excessive
lateral (out of plane) deformation or instability.

The standards listed in Annex A contain provisions

which through reference
in this text, constitute
provisions of this standard. At the time of publication,
the editions indicated were valid. All standards are
subject to revision and parties to agreements based on
this standard are encouraged
to investigate
the
possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards indicated in Annex A.

1.3.11 Buckling Strength or Resistance Force or

moment, which a member can withstand without
buckling.
1.3.12 Bui/t-ap Section A member fabricated by
interconnecting
more than one element to form a
compound section acting as a single member.

1.3 Terminology
For the purpose of this standard,
definitions shall apply.

the following

1.3.13 CamberIntentionally introduced pre-curving

(usually upwards) in a system, member or any portion
1

IS 800:2007
of a member with respect to its chord. Frequently,
camber is introduced to compensate for deflections at
a specific level of loads.

1.3.28 Detail Category Designation

given to a
particular detail to indicate the S-N curve to be used in
fatigue assessment.

1.3.14 Characteristic Load (Action) The value of

specified load (action), above which not more than a
specified percentage (usually 5 percent) of samples of
corresponding load are expected to be encountered.

1.3.29 Discontinuity
A sudden change
section
of a loaded member,
causing
concentration at the location.

1.3.30 Ductility It is the property of the material or

a structure indicating the extent to which it can deform
beyond the limit of yield deformation before failure or
fracture. The ratio of ultimate to yield deformation is
usually termed as ductility.

1.3.15 Characteristic
Yield/Ultimate
Stress The
minimum value of stress, below which not more than
a specified
percentage
(usually
5 percent)
of
corresponding stresses of samples tested are expected
to occur.

1.3.31 Durability It is the ability of a material to

resist deterioration over long periods of time.

1.3.16 Column A member in upright (vertical)

position which supports a roof or floor system and
predominantly subjected to compression.

1.3.32 Earthquake
Loads The inertia forces
produced in a structure due to the ground movement
during an earthquake.

1.3.17 Compact Section A cross-section, which can

develop plastic moment, but has inadequate plastic
rotation capacity needed for formation of a plastic
collapse mechanism of the member or structure.
1.3.18
between

Constant

Range

The amplitude

which the stress ranges

Stress

under cyclic loading

1.3.33 Edge Distance Distance from the centre of a

fastener hole to the nearest edge of an element
measured perpendicular
to the direction
of load
transfer.
1.3.34 Eflective Lateral Restraint Restraint, that
produces sufficient resistance to prevent deformation
in the lateral direction.

is constant during the life of the structure or a structural

element.
1.3.19 Corrosion An electrochemical
the surface of steel, leading to oxidation
1.3.20 Crane Load Horizontal
from cranes.

process over
of the metal.

1.3.35 Effective Length Actual length of a member

between points of effective restraint or effective
restraint and free end, multiplied by a factor to take
account of the end conditions in buckling strength
calculations.

and vertical loads

1.3.21 Cumulative Fatigue Total damage

fatigue loading of varying stress ranges.

due to

1.3.36 Elastic Cladding Claddings,

sheets, that can undergo considerable
without damage.

1.3.22 Cut-o~Limit The stress range, corresponding

to the particular detail, below which cyclic loading need
not be considered
in cumulative
fatigue damage
evaluation (corresponds to 108 numbers of cycles in
most cases).

such as metal
deformation

1.3.37 Elastic Critical Moment The elastic moment,

which initiates lateral-torsional buckling of a laterally
unsupported beam.
1.3.38 Elastic Design Design, which assumes elastic
behaviour of materials throughout the service load
range.

1.3.23 Dead Loads The self-weights

of all
permanent constructions and installations including the
self-weight of all walls, partitions, floors, roofs, and
other permanent fixtures acting on a member.
1.3.24 Dejection
It is the deviation
standard position of a member or structure.

in crossa stress

1.3.39 Elastic Limit It is the stress below which the

material regains its original size and shape when the
load is removed. In steel design, it is taken as the yield
stress.

from the

1.3.25 Design Life Time period for which a structure

or a structural element is required to perform its
function without damage.

1.3.40 End Distance Distance from the centre of a

fastener hole to the edge of an element measured
parallel to the direction of load transfer.

1.3.26 Design Load/Factored Load A load value

ob~~ined by multiplying the characteristic load with a
load factor.

1.3.41 Erection Loads The actions (loads and

deformations) experienced by the structure exclusively
during erection.

1.3.27 Design Spectrum Frequency distribution of

the stress ranges from all the nominal loading events
during the design life (stress spectrum).

1.3.42 Erection Tolerance Amount of deviation

related to the plumbness, alignment, and level of the
2

. ... .

...,

IS 800:2007
1.3.53 Flexural Stiffness Stiffness of a member
against rotation as evaluated by the value of bending
deformation moment required to cause a unit rotation
while all other degrees of freedom of the joints of the
member except the rotated one are assumed to be
restrained.

element as a whole in the erected position. The

deviations are determined by considering the locations
of the ends of the element.
1.3.43 Exposed Surface Area to Mass Ratio The
ratio of the surface area exposed to the fire (in mm2) to
the mass of steel (in kg).

1.3.54 Friction Type Connection

Connection
effected by using pre-tensioned
high strength bolts
where shear force transfer is due to mobilisation of
friction between the connected plates due to clamping
force developed at the interface of connected plates
by the bolt pre-tension.

NOTE In the case of members with tire protection material

applied, the exposed surface area is to be taken as the internal
sur~acearea of the fire protection material.

1.3.44 Fabrication Tolerance Amount of deviation

allowed in the nominal dimensions and geometry in
fabrication activities, such as cutting to length, finishing
of ends, cutting of bevel angles, etc.

1.3.55 Gauge The spacing between adjacent parallel

lines of fasteners, transverse to the direction of load/
stress.

1.3.45 Factor of Safety The factor by which the yield

stress of the material of a member is divided to arrive
at the permissible

stress in the material.

1.3.56 Gravity
Load
gravitational effects.

1.3.46 Fatigue Damage caused by repeated

fluctuations of stress, leading to progressive cmcking
of a structural element.

due

to

1.3.58 High Shear High shear condition is caused

when the actual shear due to factored load is greater
than a certain fraction of design shear resistance
(see 9.2.2).

1.3.48 Fatigue Strength The stress range for a

category of detail, depending upon the number of
cycles it is required to withstand during design life.

1.3.59 Imposed (Live) Load The load assumed to

be produced
by the intended
use or occupancy
including distributed, concentrated, impact, vibration
and snow loads but excluding, wind, earthquake and
temperature loads.

1.3.49 Fire Exposure Condition

Three-sidedfire
exposure condition Steel
member incorporated in or in contact with a
concrete or masonry floor or wall (at least
against one surface).

1.3.60 Instability The phenomenon which disables

an element, member or a structure to carry further load
due to excessive deflection lateral to the direction of
loading and vanishing stiffness.

NOTES
1 Three-sided fire exposure condition is to be considered
separately unless otherwise specified (see 16.10).
2 Members with more than one face in contact with a
concrete or masonry floor or wall may be treated as
three-sided tire exposure.

b)

arising

1,3.57 Gwsset Plate The plate to which the members

intersecting at a joint are connected.

1.3.47 Fatigue Loading Set of nominal loading

events, cyclic in nature, described by the distribution
of the loads, their magnitudes
and the number of
applications in each nominal loading event.

a)

Loads

1.3.61 Lateral Restraint for a Beam

1.3.62 Leading Imposed Load
higher action and/or deflection.

Four-sided jire exposure condition Steel

member, which may be exposed to fire on all
sides.

(see 1.3.34)

Imposed load causing

1.3.63 Limit State Any limiting condition beyond

which the structure ceases to fulfil its intended function
(see also 1.3.86).

1.3.50 Fire Protection System The fire protection

material and its method of attachment to the steel
member.

1.3.64 Live Load (see 1.3.59)

1.3.65 Load An externally
(see also 1.3.4).

1.3.51 Fire Resistance The ability of an element,

component or structure, to fulfil for a stated period of
time, the required stability, integrity, thermal insulation
and/or other expected performance
specified in a
standard fire test.

applied force or action

1.3.66 Main Member A structural member, which

is primarily responsible for carrying and distributing
the applied load or action.
1.3,67 Mill Tolerance Amount of variation allowed
from the nominal dimensions
and geometry, with
respect to cross-sectional
area, non-parallelism
of

1.3.52 Fire Resistance Level The fwe resistance grading

period for a structural element or system, in minutes,
which is required to be attained in the standard fire test.
3

IS 800:2007
flanges, and out of straightness
such as sweep or
camber, in a product, as manufactured in a steel mill.

structures, members or connections that are nominally

identical (full scale) to the units tested.

1.3.68 Normal Stress Stress component

normal to the face, plane or section.

1.3.82 Prying Force Additional

tensile force
developed in a bolt as a result of the flexing of a
connection component such as a beam end plate or leg
of an angle.

acting

1.3,69 Partial Safety Factor The factor normally

greater than unity by which either the loads (actions)
are multiplied or the resistances are divided to obtain
the design values.

1.3.83 Rotatiort The change in angle at a joint

between the original orientation of two linear member
and their final position under Ioadlng.

1.3.70 Period of Structural Adequacy under Fire

The time (t), in minutes, for the member to reach the
limit state of structural inadequacy in a standard fire
test.

1.3.84 Secondary
Member Member which is
provided for overall stability and or for restraining the
main members from buckling or similar modes of
failure.

1.3.71 Permissible S~rcss When a structure is being

designed by the working stress method, the maximum
stress that is permitted to be experienced in elements,
members or structures under the nominal/service load

1.3.85 Semi-compact Section Cross-section, which

can attain the yield moment, but not the plastic moment
before failure by plate buckling.
1.3.86 Serviceability .Lirnit State A limit state of
acceptable service condition exceedence of which
causes serviceability failure.

(action).
1.3.72 Pitch The centre-to-centre distance between
individual fasteners in a line, in the direction of load/
stress.

1.3.87 Shear Force The inplane

transverse cross-section
of a straight
column or beam.

1.3.73 Plastic Collapse The failure stage at which

sufficient number of plastic hinges have formed due
to the loads (actions) in a structure leading to a failure
mechanism.

force at any
member of a

1.3.74 Plastic IMsi,gn Design against the limit state

of plastic collapse.

1.3.88 Shear Lag The in plane shear deformation

effect by which concentrated forces tangential to the
surface of a plate gets distributed over the entire section
perpendicular to the load over a finite length of the
plate along the direction of the load.

zone with
1.3.75 Plastic Hinge A yielding
significant inelastic rotation, which forms in a member,

1.3.89 Shear Stress The stress component

parallel to a face, plane or cross-section.

when the plastic moment is reached at a section.

acting

1.3.90 Slender Section Cross-section in which the

elements buckle locally before reaching yield moment.

1.3.76 Plastic Mo~nent Moment capacity of a crosssection when the entire cross-section has yielded due
to bending moment.

1.3.91 Slenderness Ratio The ratio of the effective

length of a member to the radius of gyration of the
cross-section about the axis under consideration.

which can
1.3.77 Plastic Section Cross-section,
develop a plastic hinge and sustain piastic moment over
sufficient plastic rotation required for formation of
plastic failure mechanism of the member or structure.

1.3.92 Slip Resistance Limit shear that can be

applied in a friction grip connection before slip occurs.

1,3.78 Poissons Ratio It is the absolute value of

the ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain under
uni-axial Ioading.

1.3.93 S-N Curve The curve defining the relationship

between the number of stress cycles to failure (N,c) at
a constant stress range (SC), during fatigue loading of
a structure.

1.3.79 Proof Stress The stress to which high strength

friction grip (HSFG) bolts are pre-tensioned.

1.3.94 Snow Load Load on a structure due to the

accumulation of snow and ice on surfaces such as roof.

1.3,80 Proof Testing The application of test loads

to a structure, sub-structure, member or connection to
ascertain the structural characteristics
of only that
specific unit.

1.3.95 Snug iight The tightness of a bolt achieved

by a few impacts of an impact wrench or by the full
effort of a person using a standard spanner.
1.3.96 Stability
Limit State A limit state
corresponding to the loss of static equilibrium of a
structure by excessive deflection transverse to the
direction of predominant loads.

1.3.81 Prototype Testing Testing of structure, substructure, members or connections

to ascertain the
structural characteristics of that class of structures, sub4

IS 800:2007
1.3.115 Transverse Direction atong the stronger axes
of the cross-section of the member.

1.3.97 Stackability The ability of the fire protection

system to remain in place as the member deflects under
load during a fire test.

1.3.116 Ultimate Limit State The state which, if

exceeded can cause collapse of a part or the whole of
the structure.

1.3.98 St~ffener An element used to retain or prevent

the out-of-plane deformations of plates.
1.3.99 Strain Deformation
angle.

1.3.117 Ultimate Stress (see 1.3.113)

per unit length or unit

1.3.118 Wind Loads Load experienced by member

or structure due to wind pressure acting on the surfaces.

1.3.100 Strain Hardening The phenomenon

of
increase in stress with increase in strain beyond
yielding.
1.3.101 Strength Resistance
or buckling.

1.3.119 Yield Stress The characteristic stress of the

material in tension before the elastic limit of the
material is exceeded, as specified in the appropriate
Indian Stwdard, as listed in Table 1.

to failure by yielding

1.3.102 Strength Limir State A limit state of collapse

or loss of structural integrity.

1.4 Symbols

1.3.103 Stress The internal force per unit area of

the original cross-section,

Symbols used in this standard shall have the following

meanings with respect to the structure or member or
condition. unless otherwise defined elsewhere in this
Code.

1.3.104 Stress Analysis The analysis of the internal

force and stress condition in an element, member or
structure.

A
AC

I.3.105 Stress Cycle Counting Sum of individual

stress cycles from stress history arrived at using any
rational method.

A.
AC,
A,

1.3.106 Stress Range Algebraic difference between

two extremes of stresses in a cycle of loading.

A,

1.3.107 Stress Spectrum Histogram of stress cycles

produced by a nominal loading event design spectrum,
during design life.

A,O

A,,

A,

1.3.108 Structural Adequacy for Fire The ability of

the member to carry the test load exposed to the
standard fire test.

An,
A,,C

1.3.109 Structural Analysis The analysis of stress,

strain, and deflection characteristics of a structure.

An,

1.3.110 Strut A compression

be oriented in any direction.

A,O

member, which may

1.3.111 Sway The lateral deflection

of a frame.
A,,

1.3.112 Sway Member A member in which the

transverse displacement of one end, relative to the other
is not effectively prevented.
1.3.113 Tensile Stress The characteristic
stress
corresponding to rupture in tension, specified for the
grade of steel in the appropriate Indian Standard, as
listed in Table 1.
1.3.114 Test Load The factored load, equivalent to
a specified load combination appropriate for the type
of test being performed.

Area of cross-section
Area at root of threads
Effective cross-sectional

area
Reduced effective flange area
Total flange area
Gross cross-sectional area
Gross cross-sectional area of flange
Gross
cross-sectional
area of
outstanding (not connected) leg of a
member
Net area of the total cross-section
Net tensile cross-sectional area of bolt
Net cross-sectional
area of the
connected leg of a member
Net cross-sectional
area of each
flange
Net
cross-sectional
area
of
outstanding (not connected) leg of a
member
Nominal bearing area of bolt on any
plate

A,

Cross-sectional
area of a bearing
(load carrying) stiffener in contact
with the flange

A,

Tensile stress area

A,,

Gross cross-sectional
at the shank

At,

Gross sectional area in tension from

the centre of the hole to the toe of
the angle section/channel section, etc
(see 6.4) perpendicular to the line of
force

area of a bolt

IS 800:2007
A,n

Av
Av,

A,,

a, b

Net sectional area in tension from the

centre of the hole to the toe of
the angle perpendicular to the line
of force (see 6.4)
Shear area

compression flange angles, plates or

tongue plates to the neutral axis

Gross cross-sectional
area in shear
along the line of transmitted force
(see 6.4)
Net cross-sectional
area in shear
along the line of transmitted force
(se: 6.4 )
Larger and smaller projection of the

al

B
b
b,

b,
b,
b,,
b,
b,
b,
b.
c

dO

Nominal diameter of the pipe column

or the dimensions of the column in
the depth direction of the base plate

dP

Panel zone depth in the beam-column

junction
Modulus of elasticity for steel

E (~
E (20)
E,
F cdw

Peak acceleration
Unsupported
length

Fd

of individual
elements being laced between lacing
points

F.
FO

Length of side of cap or base plate of

a column
Outstand/width of the element
Stiff bearing length, Stiffener bearing

F,,,
F~
F,,,

length
be

Diameter of a bolt/ rivet hole

slab base beyond

the rectangle
circumscribing
the
column,
respectively (see 7.4)
aO

d,

Effective width of flange

pair of bolts
Width of the flange

F lest

between

F,~,,,,
F test,Mm

Width of flange as an internal element

Width of flange outstand
Panel zone width between column
flanges at beam-column junction
Shear lag distance

F tesl,R
F test,s
FW
F,

Width of tension field

Width of outstanding leg
Centre-to-centre
longitudinal

FXd
f

distance of battens
cm

Coefficient

of thermal expansion

Cn,y,Cmz Moment amplification

f,

factor about

respective axes
c
Ch

C,n

torsional
calculation
c,
D
d
d,

f,

Spacing of transverse stiffener

Moment amplification
factor for
braced member
Moment reduction factor for lateral
buckling

Moment amplification
sway frame
Overall depth/diameter

L
k.

strength
J,c
factor

for
&(

of the cross-

section
Depth of web, Nominal diameter
Twice the clear distance from the

.fipb
J,,,

Modulus of elasticity of steel at T C

Modulus of elasticity of steel at 20C
Modulus of elasticity of the panel
material
Buckling strength of un-stiffened
beam web under concentrated load
Factored design load
Normal force
Minimum proof pretension in high
strength friction grip bolts.
Bearing capacity of load carrying
stiffener
Stiffener force
Stiffener buckling resistance
Test load
Load for acceptance test
Minimum test load from the test to
failure
Test load resistance
Strength test load
Design capacity of the web in bearing
External load, force or reaction
Buckling resistance of load carrying
web stiffener
Actual normal stress range for the
detail category
Frequency for a simply supported one
way system
- Frequency of floor supported on steel
girder perpendicular to the joist
Calculated stress due to axial force
at service load
Permissible
bending
stress
in
compression at service load
Permissible
compressive
stress at
service load
Permissible bending stress in tension
at service load
Permissible bearing stress of the bolt
at service load
Permissible stress of the bolt in shear
at service load

IS 800:2007
tensile stress at service

tensile stress of the bolt

it service load

f
.W

Actual stress of weld at service load

Design stress of weld at service load
.
Nominal strength of fillet weld

1permissible
1,oad
1Permissible

fwj

1Permissible
stress of the weld at
service load
Actual bending stress at service load

f w
fx

Actual bending stress in compression

at service load
Design bending compressive stress

&

Actual axial compressive

service load

f,,
f ym

f,,

service load
Permissible bending stress in column
base at service load

f,,
f,,

stress at

Elastic buckling stress of a column,

Euler buckling stress
Design compressive stress

f Yw

Extreme fibre compressive

stress
corresponding elastic lateral buckling
moment
Equivalent stress at service load
Fatigue stress range corresponding to

h
IIb

5 x 10 cycles of loading
Equivalent constant amplitude stress
Design normal fatigue strength

hC

Characteristic
yield
stress
of
connected plate
Characteristic yield stress of stiffener
material
Characteristic yield stress of the web
material
Modulus of rigidity for steel
Gauge length between centre of the
holes perpendicular
to the load
direction, acceleration due to gravity
Depth of the section
Total height from the base to the floor
level concerned
Height of the column

h,
h,

h,
hi

h,

Actual bearing stress at service load

Actual bearing stress in bending at
service load
Bearing strength of the stiffeners

Average yield stress as obtained from

test

Effective thickness
Cenre-to-centre distance of flanges
Thickness of fire protection material
Height of the lip

he

Highest normal stress range

Normal fatigue stress range
.
Normal stress in weld at service load
Proof stress

Maximum longitudinal stress under

combined axial force and bending
Characteristic yield stress
Yield stress of steel at T C
Yield stress of steel at 20C
Characteristic yield stress of bolt
Characteristic yield stress of flange

fy(n
fy(20)

corresponding to lateral buckling

Actual bearing stress due to bending
at service load
Actual bending stress in tension at

Applied shear stress in the panel

designed utilizing tension field action

Storey height
Distance between shear centre of the
two flanges of a cross-section
Moment of inertia of the member
about an axis perpendicular
plane of the frame

Frequency
Actual shear stress in bolt at service
load
Actual tensile stress at service load

I fc

If,

Actual tensile stress of the bolt at

service load
Characteristic ultimate tensile stress
Characteristic ultimate tensile stress
of the bolt
Average
ultimate
stress of the

I,

to the

Moment of inertia of the compression

flange of the beam about the axis
parallel to the web
Moment of inertia of the tension
flange of the beam about minor axis
Moment
of inertia of a pair of
stiffener about the centre of the web,
or a single stiffener about the face of
the web

1,
I,.

material as obtained from test

Characteristic ultimate tensile stress
of the connected plate
7

Second moment of inertia

Second moment of inertia of the
stiffener about the face of the element
perpendicular to the web

IS 800:2007
1

Transformed moment of inertia of the

one way system
(in terms of
equivalent
steel,
assuming
the
concrete flange of width equal to the
spacing of the beam to be effective)
St. Venants torsion constant

[T

1,
IV
I,
K,

KL

Appropriate
effective
ratio of the section
Effective slenderness

KL(r
KLJry

1,

KL

MC,

M,
M,,
Aldy

K,V

Warping restraint factor

Regression

k
sm

Exposed surface area to mass ratio

Actual length, unsupported length,

Length centre-to-centre
distance of
the intersecting members, Cantilever
length

coefficient

Effective
buckling

moment
torsional

Design flexural strength

Moment capacity of the section under
high shear
Design bending strength about the

M&

Design bending strength about the

major axis of the cross-section

M~fi

Reduced effective moment

M,,

Reduced plastic moment capacity of

the flange plate

M,,

Design piastic resistance of the flange

alone

Mn,

Design
bending
strength
under
combined axial force and uniaxial
moment

M,~Y,M~ZDesign bending
strength
under
combined
axial force and the
respective
uniaxial moment acting
alone

Length of end connection in bolted

and welded members, taken as the
distance between outermost fasteners
in the end connection, or the length
of the end weld, measured along the
length of the member

Bending moment
Applied bending moment
Elastic
critical

minor axis of the cross-section

Effective slenderness
ratio of the
laced column accounting for shear
deformation

Shear buckling co-efficient

Length of the joint

Length between points of lateral
support to the compression flange in
a beam
Distance from bolt centre line to the
toe of fillet weld or to half the root
radius for a rolled section
Length of weld

corresponding
to lateral
buckling of the beam

slenderness

K,

L LT

M,

effective
Actual
maximum
slenderness ratio of the laced column

KL

L,

Effective slenderness
ratio of the
section about the major axis of the
section

(1
r<

lw

ratio of the
section about the minor axis of the
section

KLlrz

LO

1,

column
Reduction factor to account for the
high strength friction grip connection
bolts in over sized and slotted holes
Effective length of the member

K,

L.

lg
li

Warping constant
.
Moment of inertia about the minor
axis of the cross-section
Moment of inertia about the major
axis of the cross-section
Effective stiffness of the beam and

Iw

(-)

1,

Centre-to-centre
length
of the
supporting member
Distance between prying force and
bolt centre line
Grip length of bolts in a connection

length for lateral torsional

Maximum distance from the restraint

to the compression
flange at the
plastic hinge to an adjacent restraint
(limiting distance)
Length
between
points of zero
moment (inflection) in the span
8

M,

Plastic
section

moment

capacity

of the

M,,

Moment
in the beam
at the
intersection of the beam and column
centre lines

M.

Moments in the column

below the beam surfaces

above and

M@

Plastic design strength

MP~~

Plastic design strength of flanges only

M~

Applied moment on the stiffener

M,

Moment at service (working) load

M,,

Moment resistance

MY

Factored applied moment about the

minor axis of the cross-section

of tension flange

IS 800:2007
M,,

M,

Factored applied moment about the

major axis of the cross-section
Number of parallel planes of battens

R,,

Design strength in tension

compression
Axial force in the flange
. Numberof stress cycles

N
N,
N,
N,c
n
n,
n,

P<..
P,

P Mm
P,
P,
P,
P

or in

rl

threads intercepting the shear plane

in the bolted connection

ry

Number of shear planes without

threads intercepting the shear plane
in the bolted connection

r,

Factored applied axial force

Elastic buckling load
Design axial compressive strength

s,
s,

Elastic Euler buckling load

Minimum required strength for each
flange splice
Required compressive strength

s,

Actual compression at service load

Yield strength of the cross-section
under axial compression
Pitch length between centres of holes

s,

to the direction

so

s
s,

s,
T

of the
T,

Staggered
pitch length along the
direction of the load between lines of
the bolt holes (see Fig. 5)
Prying force

T,,
T~
T4

Accidental load (Action)

Characteristic loads (Action)

Tdn
Tdb

Q,

Design load (Action)

Permanent loads (Action)

Q,

Q,
Q,
Q,

9
R

R,

Variable loads (Action)

Shear stress at service load
Ratio of the mean compressive

T.

Ultimate strength of the member

room temperature
Appropriate radius of gyration

at

Minimum radius of gyration of the

individual
element
being laced
together
Ratio of the design action on the
member under fire to the design
capacity
Radius of gyration about the minor
axis (v-v) of angle section.
Radius of gyration about the minor
axis
Radius of gyration about the major
axis
Minimum
transverse
distance

Original cross-sectional
test specimen
Spring stiffness

area of the

Ultimate strength
Anchorage length

of tension
along the compression flange

field

Anchorage length of tension

along the tension flange
Actual stiffener spacing

field

Temperature
in degree
Factored tension
Applied tension in bolt

Celsius;

Thickness of compression flange

Design strength under axial tension
Yielding strength of gross section
under axial tension
Rupture strength of net section under
axial tension
Design strength of bolt under axial
tension;
Block shear strength at
end connection
Externally applied tension

T,b
T,d

tension
Design tension capacity

T,

at

Constant stress range

Design strength

Factored tension force of friction type

bolt
Limiting temperature of the steel
Nominal strength of bolt under axial

T,

stress
in the web (equal
to stress at
mid depth) to yield stress of the web;
reaction of the beam at support

Design strength of the member

room temperature

Net shear in bolt group at bolt i

Response reduction factor
Flange shear resistance

between the centroid of the rivet or

bolt group or weld group

Design compression
strength
as
governed by flexural buckling about
the respective axis

parallel
load
P,

RU

r~

P,,, Pdz

P,

R,

Number of bolts in the bolt group/

critical section
Number
of effective
interfaces
offering frictional resistance to slip
Number of shear planes with the

n,

R,

Moment capacity of the stiffener

based on its elastic modulus

IS 800:2007
Tndf

capacity

of friction

T,,,

Nominal tensile strength

type bolt

of friction

T,

Actual tension under service load

Thickness of element/angle, time in
minutes
Thickness of flange

$
$
1pk

tq
t\
t,
t
;
v,
vhf

v,,
Vd
vdb
Vnb
v,,,
Vp

Design tension
type bolt

Thickness
Thickness
Thickness

member with respect

compression fibre

z,.,

Elastic
section
modulus
of the
member with respect to extreme
tension flbre

Zp
z

Plastic section modulus

Y,

Distance between point of application

of the load and shear centre of
the cross-section

Y,

Co-ordinate

of plate
of packing
of stiffener

Thickness of base slab

Effective throat thickness of welds
Thickness of web,
Factored applied shear force

q
force

in

!-34

Critical shear strength corresponding

to web buckling
Design shear strength
Block shear strength
.

Nominal shear strength of bolt

Bearing capacity of bolt for friction
type connection
.
Plastic shear resistance under pure

Xm

Nominal shear strength

Nominal bearing strength of bolt
Nominal shear capacity of a bolt
Nominal shear capacity of bolt as
governed by slip in friction type
connection

Xcr

v,
V,h
v,,,
V,d,

Transverse shear at service load

Factored shear force in the bolt

6P

Wtf
.Xt

z,
z,,

6
a,

Design shear capacity

Design shear strength in friction type
bolt
Factored
design
shear force of
friction bolts
Applied transverse shear

$
Y
x

Shear resistance in tension field

Total load
Uniform pressure from below on the
slab base due to axial compression
under the factored load
Width of tension field

Y.
Y.10
x,,,

inb

Torsional index
Elastic section modulus
Elastic

section

modulus

Coefficient

of thermal expansion

Ratio of smaller to the larger bending

moment
at the ends of a beam
column

for buckling under compression

v,
v npb
vmb
v,,,

v,
v,,
w

Imperfection
factor for buckling
strength in columns and beams

Lfyl ELI, Equivalent uniform moment factor

for flexural buckling for y-y and z-z
axes respectively

Equivalent uniform moment factor

ILL,
for lateral torsional buckling
Strength reduction factor to account
x

shear

v,,

Contribution
to the plastic section
modulus of the total shear area of the
cross-section

of the shear centre in

respect to centroid

ct

Shear in batten plate

Factored frictional
shear
friction type connection

to extreme

X,

Strength reduction factor, X, at~,n

Strength reduction factor to account
for lateral torsional
buckling
of
beams
Storey deflection
Horizontal deflection of the bottom
of storey due to combined gravity
and notional load
Load amplification factor
Horizontal deflection of the top of
storey due to combined gravity and
notional load
Inclination of the tension field stress
in web
Unit weight of steel
. Partial safety factor for load
Partial safety factor for material
Partial safety factor against yield
stress and buckling
Partial safety factor against ultimate
stress
Partial
safety factor for bolted
connection with bearing type bolts
Partial
safety factor for bolted
connection
with High
Friction Grip bolts

of the
10

Strength

IS 800:2007
Yff,

Ymft
Ymv

Partial safety factor for fatigue load

Partial safety factor for fatigue
strength
Partial safety factor against shear

a)

Forces and loads, in kN, kN/m, kN/m2;

b)

Unit mass, in kg/mJ;

c)

Unit weight, in kN/ms;

d)

Stresses and strengths,

MPa); and

e)

Moments (bending,

failure

&

Partial safety factor for strength

weld
Yield stress ratio (250 /~,) n

Non-dimensional

1m.

slenderness

For conversion of one system of units to another

system, IS 786 (Supplement) may be referred.
1.6 Standard

:T

L,,r

P
P,
P,
/4

P
r
Tb
T*b
rCr,e
7,
rf, Max

rfd
rf.
r,
v

Elastic buckling load factor

Equivalent slenderness ratio
Non-dimensional
lateral bending
Elastic buckling

Dimensions,

Form and Weight

The dimensions, form, weight, tolerances of all rolled

shapes, all rivets, bolts, nuts, studs, and welds and other
members used in any steel structure shall conform to
IS 808 and IS 1852, wherever applicable.

A,,

etc), in kNm.

ratio =

@ii7FE.

of

in N/mm* (MN/m2 or

slenderness ratio in

1.7 Plans and Drawings

load factor of each

1.7.1 Plans, drawings and stress sheet shall be prepared

according to IS 8000 (Parts 1 to 4), IS 8976 and IS 962.

storey
Poissons ratio
Correction factor
Coefficient of friction (slip factor)
Capacity reduction factor

1.7.1.1 Plans
The plans (design drawings) shall show the sizes,
sections, and the relative locations of the various
members. Floor levels, column centres, and offsets
shall be dimensioned. Plans shall be drawn to a scale
large enough to convey the information adequately.
Plans shall indicate the type of construction
to be
employed; and shall be supplemented by such data on
the assumed loads, shears, moments and axial forces
to be resisted by all members and their connections, as
may be required for the proper preparation of shop
drawings. Any special precaution to be taken in the
erection of structure, from the design consideration
shall also be indicated in the drawing.

Ratio of the rotation at the hinge point

to the relative elastic rotation of the
far end of the beam segment
containing plastic hinge
Unit mass of steel
Actual shear stress range for the detail
category
Buckling shear stress
Permissible shear stress at the service
load
Elastic critical shear stress

1.7.1.2 Shop drawings

Shop drawings,
giving complete
information
necessary for the fabrication of the component parts
of the structure including the location, type, size,
length and detail of all welds and fasteners shall be
prepared in advance of the actual fabrication. They
shall clearly distinguish between shop and field rivets,
bolts and welds. For additional information
to be
included on drawings for designs based on the use of
welding, reference shall be made to appropriate Indian
Standards.
Shop drawings
shall be made in
conformity with IS 962. A marking diagram allotting
distinct identification marks to each separate part of
steel work shall be prepared. The diagram shall be
sufficient to ensure convenient assembly and erection
at site.

Fatigue shear stress range

Highest shear stress range
Design shear fatigue strength
Fatigue shear stress range at N~Ccycle
for the detail category
Actual shear stress at service load
Ratio of the moments at the ends of
the laterally unsupported length of
a beam
Frame buckling load factor

NOTE The subscripts y, : denote the y-y and Z-Zaxes of the

section, respectively. For symmetrical sections, y-y denotes the
minor principal axis whilst z-z denotes the major principal axis
(see 1.8).

1.7.2 Symbols used for welding on plans and shop

drawings shall be according to IS 813.

1.5 Units
For the purpose of design calculations
units are recommended:

the following

11

IS 800:2007
1.8 Convention

for Member

Unless otherwise
specified
convention
member axes is as follows (see Fig. l):
a)

x-.x along the member.

b)

y-y an axis of the cross-section.

c)

d)

1)

perpendicular

2)

perpendicular
angle section.

Z-Z

2.2.3.1 Steel that is not supported by mill test result

may be used only in unimportant members and details,
where their properties such as ductility and weldability
would not affect the performance requirements of the
members and the structure as a whole.

Axes
used

for

However, such steels may be used in structural system

after confirming
their quality by carrying
out
appropriate
tests in accordance
with the method
specified in IS 1608.

to the flanges, and

to the smaller

leg in an

an axis of the cross-section

2.2.4 Properties

1)

axis parallel to flanges, and

2)

axis parallel
section.

to smaller

The properties of structural steel for use in design, may

be taken as given in 2.2.4.1 and 2.2.4.2.

leg in angle

2.2.4.1
Physical
properties
of structural
irrespective of its grade may be taken as:

u-u major axis (when it does not coincide with

z-z axis).

e)

v-v minor axis (when it does not coincide with

y-y axis).
SECTION 2
MATERIALS

a)

Unit mass of steel, p = 7850 kg/m~

b)

Modulus
(MPa)

c)

Poisson ratio, p = 0.3

d)

Modulus of rigidity, G = 0.769 x 10s N/mm2

(MPa)

e)

Co-efficient
10 /c

2.1 General
The material properties
given in this section are
nominal values, to be accepted as characteristic values
in design calculations.
2.2 Structural

of elasticity, E = 2.0 x 10s N/mm2

of thermal expansion

2.2.4.2 Mechanical properties

of structural

cx.= 12 x

steel

The principaI mechanical properties of the structural

steel important in design are the yield stress, fy; the
tensile or ultimate stress, fu; the maximum percent
elongation on a standard gauge length and notch
toughness.
Except for notch toughness, the other
properties are determined by conducting tensile tests
on samples cut from the plates, sections, etc, in
accordance with IS 1608. Commonly used properties
for the common
steel products
of different
specifications are summarized in Table 1.

Steel

2.2.1 The provisions in this section are applicable to

the steels commonly used in steel construction, namely,
structural mild steel and high tensile structural steel.
2.2.2 All the structural
steel used in general
construction, coming under the purview of this standard
shall before fabrication conform to IS 2062.
2.2.3 Structural steel other than those specified in 2.2.2
may also be used provided that the permissible stresses
and other design provisions are suitably modified and
the steel is also suitable for the type of fabrication
adopted.

2.3 Rivets

i;
I

2.3.1 Rivets

shall

be manufactured

~Y

Ziz
----- ,------

steel

Y!

i
i
i

iY
I

FIG. 1 AXM OF MEMBERS

12

from

steel

IS 800:2007
Table 1 Tensile Properties of Structural Steel Products
(Clauses 1.3.113, 1.3.119 and 2.2.4.2)
sl
No.

Indian
Standard

Properties

Grade/Classification
F

MI%, &tin

Ultimate Tensile Stress

hfPa. .%%

(4)

(5}

Yield Stress

>

Elongation,
Percent,
Min

(1)

i)

(2)

(3)

1S513
{

ii) lS 814

D
DD
EDD

280
250
2Z0

270-410
270-370
270-350

28
32
35

EX40XX
EX4 1xx
EX42XX
EX43XX
EX44XX

330
330
330
330
330

410-540
410-540
410-540
410-540
410-540

16
20
22
24
24

Exwxx
lh5 I xx
EX52XX
EX53XX
lsx54xx
EX55XX
EX36XX

360
360
360
360
360
360
360

510-610
510-610
510-610
510-6!0
510-610
S1O-61O
510-610

16
18
18
20
20
20
20

IS 1367
(Part 3)

1
[

(
V)

1S 1875

9.s
10.9
12.9

640 )
660 )
720 )
940 )
i 100)

1
1A
2
2A
3
3A
4
5
6

200
220
230
250
270
280
320
350
370

8.8 (d> 16 mm)

rvi)

s, 37
S, 42

IS i 990
{

,=
<16

vii) IS 2002

1
2
3

235
265
290

26
25
24
22
21

?
>16 and >40 and >60 and >100 and
S40
<1oo
<350
s60
200
215
255

20
15
13
10

26

360-440
410-500

13

12
12
10
9
8

-1

t
A

215
245
280

20

370
410
430
460
490
540
620
710
740

>20
200
240

520
220
250

25
22
.

330
400
420
500
520
600
800
830
900
1040
1220

dor(
A

225
255
285

25
28
32

240-400
260-390
260-380

3.6
4.6
4.8
5.6
5.8
6.8
8.8 (d< 16 mm)

D
DD
EDD

iv)

(6)

185
200
230

(
Go

>60 and
Sloo

23

\&

>100
and
S350
360-480 360-480 350-480
410-530410-530400-530
460-580 450-570440-570

24
22
21

and
S350
23
21

20

IS 800:2007
Table 1 (Concluded)
SI
No.

(1)

Properties

Grade/Classification

Indian
Standard

Yield Stress
MPa, Min

UltimateTensile Stress
MPa, Min

Elongation,
Pereent, Min

(4)

(5)

(6)

290
410
410
410
440
490
540
570
590

23
23
23
23
22
22
20
20
20

(3)

(2)

dort

viii)

E 165 (Fe 290)

E250(Fe410W)A
E250(Fe 410 W)B
E250(Fe 410 W)C
E 300 (Fe 440)
E 350 (Fe 490)
E 410 (Fe 540)
E 450 (Fe 570) D
E 450 (Fe 590) E

IS 2062

~l
<20

20-40

>40

165
250
250
250
300
350
410
450
450

165
240
240
240
290
330
390
430
430

165
230
230
230
280
320
380
420
420

\
dorr

ix)

1
11
11[

1s 3039

~)

xi)

IS 6240

220
235

400-490
400-490

235

400-490

22
22

350-450

25

Grade 2

245

360-450

34

f Annealed Condition

160

330-410

30

As-Drawn Condition

I90

410-490

20

HFC 210/CDS
2! OIERW21O

210

330

20

HFC 240/CDS
2401ERW240

240

410

18

310

450

15

[
{

HFC 3 10/CDS

[ 3Io/ERw31 o

xiii)

22

240

Is 7557

IS 9295

>25 ands 50

230
235
235

Grade 1

xii)

s 25

1S 10748

170

290

30

210

330

28

240

410

25

275

430

20

310

490

15

NOTES
1 Percent of elongation shall be taken over the gauge length 5.65 &

where So= Original cross-sectional area of the test specimen.

2 Abbreviations: O = Ordinary, D = Drawing, DD = Deep Drawing, EDD = Extra Deep Drawing.

I) Stress at 0.2 percent non-proportional elongation, Min.

14

IS 800:2007
conforming
to IS 7557.
They may also be
manufactured
from steel conforming
to IS 2062
provided that the steel meets the requirements given
in IS 1148.

construction and use and have adequate resistance to

certain expected accidental loads and tire. Structure
should be stable and have alternate load paths to prevent
disproportionate
overall collapse under accidental
loading.

2,3.2 Rivets shall conform to IS 1929 and IS 2155 as

appropriate.

3.1.2 Methods of Design

2.3.3 High Tensile Steel Rivets

High tensile steel rivets, shall be manufactured
steel conforming to IS 1149.
2.4

3.1.2.1 Structure and its elements shall normally, be

designed by the limit state method. Account should be
taken of accepted theories, experimental information
and experience and the need to design for dumbi]ity.
Calculations alone may not produce Safe, serviceable
and durable structures. Suitable materials, quality
control, adequate detailing and good supervision are
equally important.

from

Bolts, Nuts and Washers

Bolts, nuts and washers shall conform as appropriate

to IS 1363 (Parts 1 to 3), IS 1364 (Parts 1 to 5), IS 1367
(Parts 1 to 20), IS 3640, IS 3757, IS 4000, IS 5369,
IS 5370, IS 5372, IS 5374, IS 5624, IS 6610, IS 6623,
IS 6639, and IS 6649. The recommendations in IS 4000
shall be followed.

3.1.2.2 Where the limit states method cannot be

conveniently adopted; the working stress design (sef~
Section 11) may be used.
3.1.3 Design Process

2.5 Steel Casting

Structural design, including design for durability,

construction and use should be considered as a whole.
The realization
of design objectives
requires
compliance
with clearly defined
standards
for
materials,
fabrication,
erection
and in-service
maintenance.

Steel casting shall conform to IS 1030 or IS 2708.

2.6 Welding Consumable
2.6.1 Covered electrodes
IS 1395, as appropriate.

shall conform

2.6.2 Filler rods and wires

conform to IS 1278.

to IS 814 or

for gas welding

shall
3.2 Loads and Forces
3.2.1 For the purpose of designing
any element,
member or a structure, the following loads (actions)
and their effects shall be taken into account, where
applicable, with partial safety factors find combinations
(see 5.3.3):

2.6.3 The supply of solid filler wires for submerged

arc welding of structural
steels shall conform to
IS 1387.
2.6.4 The bare wire electrodes for submerged arc
welding shall conform to IS 7280. The combination
of wire and flux shall satisfy the requirements
of
IS 3613.
2.6.5 Filler rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded
metal arc welding shall conform to IS 6419 and
IS 6560, as appropriate.

a)

Dead loads;

b)

Imposed loads (live load, crane load, snow

load, dust load, wave load, earth pressures,
etc);

c)

Wind loads;

d)

Earthquake

loads;

2.7 Other Materials

e)

Erection loads;

Other materials used in association with structural steel

work shall conform to appropriate Indian Standards.

t]

Accidental loads such as those due to blast,

impact of vehicles, etc; and

g)

Secondary
effects due to contraction
or
expansion
resulting
from temperature
changes,
differential
settlements
of the
structure as a whole or of its components,
eccentric
connections,
rigidity of joints
differing from design assumptions.

GENERAL

SECTION 3
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Basis for Design

3.1.1 Design Objective

3.2.1.1 Dead loads should be assumed

specified in 1S 875 (Part 1).

The objective of design is the achievement

of an
acceptable probability that structures will perform
satisfactorily for the intended purpose duriug the design
life. With an appropriate degree of safety, they should
sustain all the loads and deformations,
during

in design as

3.2.1.2 Imposed loads for different types of occupancy

and function
of structures
shall be taken as
recommended in IS 875 (Part 2). Imposed loads arising
15

IS 800:2007
from equipment, such as cranes and machines should
be assumed in design as per manufacturers/suppliers
data (see 3.5.4).
Snow load shall be taken as per
IS 875 (Part 4).

3,5 Load Combinations

3.5.1 Load combinations for design purposes shall be
those that produce maximum forces and effects and
consequently
maximum stresses and deformations.
The following combination of loads with appropriate
partial safety factors (see Table 4) maybe considered.

3.2.1.3 Wind loads on structures shall be taken as per

the recommendations
of IS 875 (Part 3).
3.2.1.4 Earthquake loads shall be assumed as per the
recommendations
of IS 1893 (Part 1).

a)

Dead load + imposed load,

b)

3.2.1.5 The erection loads and temperature effects shall

be considered as specified in 3.3 and 3.4 respectively.

Dead load + imposed

earthquake load,

c)

Dead load + wind or earthquake

d)

Dead load+

3.3 Erection

Loads

+ wind

or

load, and

erection load.

NOTE In the case of structures supporting crmres, imposed

loads shall include the crane effects as given in 3.5.4.

All loads required to be carried by the structure or any

part of it due to storage or positioning of construction
material and erection equipment, including all loads
due to operation of such equipment shall be considered
as erection loads. Proper provision shall be made,
including temporary bracings, to take care of all stresses
developed during erection. Dead load, wind load and
also such parts of the live load as would be imposed
on the stricture during the period of erection shall be
taken as acting together with the erection loads. The
structure as a whole and all parts of the structure in
conjunction
with the temporary bracings shall be
capable of sustaining these loads during erection.
3.4 Temperature

load

3.5.2 Wind load and earthquake loads shall not be

assumed to act simultaneously. The effect of each shall
be considered separately.
3,5.3 The effect of cranes to be considered under
imposed loads shall include the vertical loads,
eccentricity
effects induced by the vertical loads,
impact factors, lateral (surge) and longitudinal
(horizontal) thrusts, not acting simultaneously, across
and along the crane rail, respectively
[see 1S 875
(Part 2)].
3.5.4 The crane
considered shall
the absence of
combinations
provisions in IS

Effects

3.4.1 Expansion and contraction due to changes in

temperature of the members and elements of a structure
shall be considered and adequate provision made for
such effect.
3.4.2 The temperature
range varies for different
localities and under different diurnal and seasonal
conditions. The absolute maximum and minimum
temperatures,
which may be expected in different
localities of the country, may be obtained from the
Indian Metrological Department and used in assessing
the maximum variations of temperature
for which
provision for expansion and contraction has to be made
in the structure.
3.4.3 The range of variation in temperature of the
building materials may be appreciably greater or lesser
than the variation of air temperature and is influenced
by the condition of exposure and the rate at which the
materials composing the structure absorb or radiate
heat. This difference in temperature variations of the
material and air shall be given due consideration. The
effect of differential temperature within an element or
member, due to part exposure to direct sunlight shall
also be considered.

loads and their combinations to be

be as indicated by the customer. In
any specific indications,
the load
shall be in accordance
with the
875 (Part 2) or as given below:

a)

Vertical loads with full impact from one

loaded crane or two cranes in case of tandem
operation, together with vertical loads without
impact from as many loaded cranes as may
be positioned for maximum effect, along with
maximum horizontal thrust from one crane
only or two in case of tandem operation;

b)

Loads as specified in 3.5.4(a), subject to

cranes in maximum of any two bays of the
building cross-section shaIl be considered for
multi-bay multi-crane gantries;

c)

The longitudinal thrust on a crane track rail

shall be considered for a maximum of two
loaded cranes on the track; and

d)

Lateral thrust (surge) and longitudinal thrust

acting across and along the crane rail
respectively,
shall be assumed not to act
simultaneously. The effect of each force, shall
however be investigated separately.

3.5.5 While investigating

the effect of earthquake
forces, the resulting effect from dead loads of all cranes
parked in each bay, positioned to cause maximum effect
shall be considered.

3.4.4 The co-efficient of thermal expansion for steel is

as given in 2.2.4 .l(e).

16

 -~

IS 800:2007
shall be less than that specified under Class 1
(Plastic), in Table 2.

3.5.6 The crane runway girders supporting bumpers

shall be checked for bumper impact loads also, as
specified by the manufacturers.

b)

3.5.7 Stresses developed due to secondary effects such

as handling; erection, temperature and settlement of
foundations, if any, shall be appropriately added to the
stresses calculated from the combination of loads stated
in 3.5.1, with appropriate partial safety factors.
3.6 Geometrical

Properties

3.6.1 General

c)

The geometrical
properties
of the gross and the
effective cross-sections of a member or part thereof,
shall be calculated on the following basis:
a)

The properties of the gross cross-section shall

be calculated from the specified size of the
member or part thereof
or read from
appr~priate tablet

b)

The properties of the effective cross-section

shall be calculated by deducting from the area
of the gross cross-section, the following:
1)

The sectional area in excess of effective

plate width, in case of slender sections
(see 3.7.2).

2)

The sectional areas of all holes in the section

except for parts in compression. In case of
punched holes, hole size 2 mm in excess
of the actual diameter may be deducted.

3.7 Classification

d)

of Cross-Sections

Cross-sections,

which

Class 3 (Semi-compact)
Cross-sections,
in which the extreme fiber in compression can
reach yield stress, but cannot develop the
plastic moment of resistance, due to local
buckling. The width to thickness ratio of plate
elements shall be less than that specified under
Class 3 (Semi-compact), but greater than that
specified under Class 2 (Compact), in Table 2.
Class 4 (Slender) Cross-sections in which
the elements buckle locally even before
reaching yield stress. The width to thickness
ratio of plate elements shall be greater than
that specified under Class 3 (Semi-compact),
in Table 2. In such cases, the effective sections
for design shall be calculated
either by
following the provisions of IS 801 to account
for the post-local-buckling
strength or by
deducting width of the compression
plate
element in excess of the semi-compact section
limit.

When different elements of a cross-section fall under

different classes, the section shall be classified as
governed by the most critical element.

3.7.1 Plate elements of a cross-section

may buckle
locally due to compressive stresses. The local buckling
can be avoided before the limit state is achieved by
limiting the width to thickness ratio of each element
of a cross-section subjected to compression due to axial
force, moment or shear.

The maximum value of limiting

ratios of elements for different
sections are given in Table 2.

width to thickness
classifications
of

3.7,3 Types of Elements

3.7.1.1 When plastic analysis is used, the members ihall

be capable of forming plastic hinges with sufficient
rotation capacity (ductility) without local buckling, to
enable the redistribution of bending moment required
before formation of the failure mechanism.
3.7.1.2 When elastic analysis is used, the member shall
be capable of developing
the yield stress under
compression without local buckling.

a)

Internal elements These are elements

attached along both longitudinal
edges to
other elements or to longitudinal stiffeners
connected at suitable intervals to transverse
stiffeners, for example, web of I-section and
flanges and web of box section.

b)

Outside elements or outstands These are

elements attached along only one of the
longitudinal edges to an adjacent element, the
other edge being free to displace out of plane,
for example flange overhang of an I-section,
stem of T-section and legs of an angle section.

c)

Tapered elements These maybe treated as

flat elements having average thickness as
defined in SP 6 (Part 1).

3.7.2 On basis of the above, four classes of sections

are defined as follows:
a)

Class 2 (Compact)

can develop plastic moment of resistance, but

have inadequate
plastic hinge rotation
capacity for formation of plastic mechanism,
due to local buckling. The width to thickness
ratio of plate elements shall be less than that
specified under Class 2 (Compact), but greater
than that specified under Class 1 (Plastic), in
Table 2.

Class 1 (Plastic) Cross-sections,

which
can develop plastic hinges and have the
rotation capacity required for failure of the
structure by formation of plastic mechanism.
The width to thickness ratio of plate elements
17

Table 2 Limiting

Width to Thickness

Ratio

(Clauses 3.7.2 and 3.7.4)

.
Compression Element

Ratio

Class of Section
Class 1
Plastic

(1)
)utstandirig element of
compressionflange

Class3
Semi-compact

Class2
Compact

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

b/t~

9.4&

10.5s

15.7E

b/If

8.4&

9.4&

13.6s

b/ tf

29.3s

33.5 &

b/ ff
C2YCw
Ifrl is negative:
Webof an 1,
1 or box
iwtion

84&

If r, is positive :

105s

126z

105.0 &

dkq

Generally

t--

42s

Not applicable

84E

1+<

126.0&

1+~

105$OC

1+1.5~

1+ 2r*

but s 42E

dk+

but <426

but s 42.s
Axial compression
Webof a channel
4ngle, compression due to bending (Both criteria should
)e satisfied)
$ingle angle, or double angles with the components
;eparated, axial compression (All three criteria should be
;atistied)

42c

Not applicable

dtw

L//t.
b/t
d/t

42s

42c

9.4&
9.4 &

lo.5&
10.56

15.7E
15.7&

b/t
(b?;)/t

42E

15.7&
15.7.$
25z

15.7E

Not applicable

lrtstanding leg of an angle in contact back-to-back in a

louble angle member

d/t

outstanding leg of an angle with its back in continuous

:ontact with another component

dlt

9.4&

10.5C

15.7&

$tem of a T-section, rolled or cut from a rolled I-or H;ection

D/t~

8.4&

9.4.?

18.9e

hular hollow tube, including welded tube subjected to:

a) moment
b) axial compression

D/f

D/t

9.4s

42.?

10.5s

52.?

Not applicable

146.#

88/

NOTES
1 Elements which exceed semi-compact limits are to be taken as of slender cross-section.
26= (250 /~) n.
3 Webs shall be checked for shear buckling in accordance with 8,4.2 when d/t> 67E, where, b is the width of the element (may be
taken as clear distance between lateral supports or between lateral support and free edge, as appropriate), t is the thickness of
element, d is the depth of the web, D is the outer diameter of the element (see Fig. 2,3.7.3 and 3.7.4).
4 Different elements of a cross-section can be in different classes. In such cases the section is classified based on the least
favorable classification.
5 The stress ratio r, and r~are defined as:
r, = Actual average axial stress (negative if tensile)
Design compressive stress of web alone
r2= Actual average axial stress (negative if tensile)
Design compressive stress of ovedl section

18

IS 800:2007
The design of slender compression element (Class 4)
considering the strength beyond elastic local buckling
of element is outside the scope of this standard.
Reference may be made to IS 801 for such design
provisions. The design of slender web elements may
be made as given in 8.2.1.1 for flexure and 8.4.2.2 for
shear,
tf

3.7.4 Compound
(see Fig. 2)

Elements

in Built-up

In case of compound elements consisting of two or

more elements bolted or welded together, the limiting
width to thickness ratios as given in Table 2 should be
considered on basis of the following:

tf

l-=---i

CIEiEu m
r

tw

tw

b--

L-d

ROLLEDBEAMS
ANDCOLUMNS

ROLLED
CHANNELS

RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW
SECTIONS

CIRCULAR
HOLLOW
SECTIONS

r%?
r-f
d

~t

SINGLEANGLES

TEES

DOUBLEANGLES
(BACKTO BACK)

t,
1

t,

rbl

l!

l---u

T
tw

BUILT-UP
SECTIONS

be
--ml

b,

f
+

,t

COMPOUNDELEMENTS

bi Internal Element
b, External

Section

Element

Width
Width

FIG. 2 DIMENSIONSOF SECTIONS

19

IS 800:2007
a)

Outstanding width ofcompound

to its own thickness.

b)

The internal width of each added plate

between the lines of welds or fasteners
connecting it to the original section to its own
thickness.

c)

element (b,)

are capable of effectively transmitting all the horizontal

forces directly to the foundations, the structural steel
framework may be designed without considering the
effect of wind or earthquake.
3.9.3 Wind and earthquake forces are reversible and
therefore call for rigidity and strength under force
reversal in both longitudinal and transverse directions.
To resist torsional effects of wind and earthquake
forces, bracings in plan should be provided and
integrally
connected
with the longitudinal
and
transverse bracings, to impart adequate torsional
resistance to the structure.

Any outstand of the added plates beyond the

line of welds or fasteners connecting it to
original section to its own thickness.

3.8 Maximum

Effective

Slenderness

Ratio

The maximum effective slenderness ratio, KZlr values

of a beam, strut or tension member shall not exceed
those given in Table 3. KL is the effective length of
the member and r is appropriate radius of gyration
based on the effective section as defined in 3.6.1.

3.9.3.1 In shed type steel mill buildings, adequate

bracings shall be provided to transfer the wind or
earthquake loads from their points of action to the
appropriate
supporting
members.
Where the
connections
to the interior columns or frames are
designed such that the wind or earthquake loads will
not be transferred
to the interior
columns,
the
exterior columns or frames shall be designed to resist
the total wind or earthquake
loads.
Where the
connections to the interior columns and frames are
designed such that the wind or earthquake effects
are transferred
to the interior columns also, and
where adequate
rigid diaphragm
action can be
mobilized as in the case of the cast-in place RC slab,
both exterior and interior columns and frames may
be designed on the assumption
that the wind or
earthquake load is divided among them in proportion
to their relative stiffness.
Columns also should be
designed to withstand the net uplifting effect caused
by excessive wind or earthquake.
Additional axial
forces arising in adjacent columns due to the vertical
component of bracings or due to frame action shall
also be accounted for.

Table 3 Maximum Values of Effective

Slenderness Ratios
s}
No.

Member

Maximum
Effective
Slenderness
Ratio

(1)

(2)

(3)

A member carrying compressive loads

resulting from dead loads and imposed
loads
A tension member in which a reversal
of direct stress occurs due to loads other
than wind or seismic forces

180

(KU-)

i)
ii)

iii)

A member subjected to compression

180

250

forces resulting only from combination

with wind/earthquake actions, provided
the deformation of such member does
not adversely affect tbe stress in any
part of the structure
iv)

Compression flange of a beam against

lateral torsional buckling

300

v)

A member normally acting m a tie in a

roof truss or a bracing system not
considered effective when subject to
possible reversal of stress into
compression resulting from the action
of wind or earthquake forces]]

350

3.9.3.2 Earthquake
forces are proportional
to the
seismic mass as defined in IS 1893. Earthquake forces
should be applied at the centre of gravity of all such
components of mass and their transfer to the foundation
should be ensured.
Other construction
details,
stipulated in IS 4326 should also be followed.

Members always under tension) (other

400
than pre-tensioned members)
I) Tension members, such as bracings, pre-tensioned to avoid
sag, need not satisfy tbe maximum slenderness ratio limits.
vi)

3.9 Resistance

to Horizontal

3.9.3.3 In buildings where high-speed traveling cranes

are supported or where a building or structure is
otherwise subjected to vibration or sway, triangulated
bracing or rigid portal systems shall be provided to
reduce the vibration
or sway to an acceptable
minimum.

Forces

3.9.1 In designing the steel frame work of a building,

provision
shall be made (by adequate
moment
connections or by a system of bracing) to effectively
transmit to the foundations all the horizontal forces,
giving due allowance for the stiffening effect of the
walls and floors, where applicable.

3.9.4 Foundations
The foundations of a building or other structures shall
be designed to provide the rigidity and strength that
has been assumed in the analysis and design of the
superstructure.

3.9.2 When the walls, or walls and floors and/or roofs

20

IS 800:2007
3.9.5 Eccentrically

at the centre of the building or building section, the

length of the building section may be restricted to
180 m in case of covered buildings and 120 m in case
of open gantries (see Fig. 3).

Placed Loads

Where a wall, or other gravity load, is placed

eccentrically upon the flange of a supporting steel
beam, the beam and its connections shall be designed
for torsion, unless the beam is restrained laterally in
such a way as to prevent the twisting of the beam.
3.10 Expansion
3.10.1 In view of
in deciding the
expansion joints,
expansion joints
designer.

Joints
the large number of factors involved
location,
spacing and nature of
the decision regarding provision of
shall be left to the discretion of the

L--.-,,om~

3.10.2 Structures in which marked changes in plan

dimensions take place abruptly, shall be provided with
expansion joints at the section where such changes
occur. Expansion joints shall be so provided that the
necessary movement occurs with minimum resistance
at the joint. The gap at the expansion joint should be
such that:
a)

It accommodates
the expected expansion
contraction
due to seasonal and durinal
variation of temperature, and

b)

It avoids pounding of adjacent units under

earthquake. The structure adjacent to the joint
should preferably be supported on separate
columns but not necessarily
on separate
foundations.

END OF COVERED BUILDING/SECTION

FIG. 3 MAXIMUMLENGTHOF BUILDINGWITHONE

BAY OF BRACING
3.10.3.2 If more than one bay of longitudinal bracing
is provided near the centre of the buildinglsection, the
maximum centre line distance between the two lines
of bracing may be restricted to 50 m for covered
buildings
(and 30 m for open gantries)
and the
maximum distance between the centre of the bracing
to the nearest expansion jointiend of building or section
may be restricted to 90 m (60 m in case of open
gantries). The maximum length of the building section
thus may be restricted to 230 m for covered buildings
(150 m for open gantries).
Beyond this, suitable
expansion joints shall be provided (see Fig. 4).

3.10.3 The details as to the length of a structure where

expansion
jdints have to be provided
may be
determined after taking into consideration
various
factors such as temperature, exposure to weather and
structural design. The provisions in 3.10.3.1 to 3.10.3.3
are given as general guidance.
3.10.3.1 If one bay of longitudinal

3.10.3.3 The maximum width of the covered building

section should preferably be restricted to 150 m beyond
which suitable provisions for the expansion joint may
be made.
3.10.4 When the provisions of these sections are met
for a building or open structure, the stress analysis due
to temperature is not required.

bracing is provided

EXPANSION
JOINT

i
i

:
90m

50m~

90 m

i
D
i

I
FIG. 4 MAXIMUMLENGTHOF BUILDING/SECTIONWITHTwo BAYSOF BRACINGS

21

IS 800:2007
SECTiON 4
OF STRUCTURAL

METHODS

loading given in 4.3.6 satisfies the following

criteria:

ANALYSIS

1)
4.1 Methods

of Determining

Action Effects

4.1.1 General
For the purpose of complying with the requirements
of the limit states of stability, strength and serviceability
specified in Section 5, effects of design actions on a
structure and its members and connections, shall be
determined by structural analysis using the assumptions
of 4.2 and 4.3 and one of the following methods of
analysis:
a)

Elastic analysis in accordance

with 4.4,

b)

Plastic analysis in accordance

with 4.5,

c)

Advanced
analysis
Annex B, and

d)

Dynamic analysis in accordance

(Part 1).

in accordance

65A
2
2)

credible

earthquake

3)

with

with IS 1893

b)

c)

A frame,
which
when
analyzed
considering
all the lateral supporting
system does not comply with the above
criteria, should be classified as a sway
frame. even if it is braced or otherwise
laterally stiffened.

4.2 Forms of Construction

Analysis

loads shall be assumed

Assumed

for Structural

4.2.1 The effects of design action in the members and

connections of a structure shall be determined by
assuming singly or in combination of the following
forms of construction (see 10.6.1).
4.2.1.1 Rigid construction

and Sway Frames

In rigid construction,
the connections
between
members (beam and column) at their junction shall be
assumed to have sufficient rigidity to hold the original
angles between the members connected at a joint
unchanged under loading.

For the purpose of analysis and design, the structural

frames are classified as non-sway and sway frames as
given below:
a)

For unclad frame or clad frames, when

the stiffening effect of the cladding is
taken into account in the deflection
calculations:

4000

to the load at which significant plastic

to correspond
hinges
are formed
in the structure
and the
corresponding effects shall be obtained by plastic or
advanced analysis. More information on analysis and
design to resist earthquake is given in Section 12 and
IS 1893 (Part 1).
4.1.2 Non-sway

000

65A

The design action effects for design basis earthquake

loads shall be obtained only by an elastic analysis. The
maximum

For clad frames, when the stiffening

effect of the cladding is not taken into
account in the deflection calculations:

Non-sway
frame
One in which the
transverse displacement
of one end of the
member relative to the other end is effectively
prevented. This applies to triangulated frames
and trusses or to frames where in-plane
stiffness is provided by bracings, or by shear
walls, or by floor slabs and roof decks secured
horizontally to walls or to bracing systems
parallel to the plane of loading and bending
of the frame.

4.2S.2 Semi-rigid

construction

In semi-rigid construction, the connections between

members (beam and column) at their junction may not
have sufficient rigidity to hold the original angles
between the members at a joint unchanged, but shall
be assumed to have the capacity to furnish a dependable
and known degree of flexural restraint. The relationship
between the degree of flexural restraint and the level
of the load effects shall be established by any rational
method or based on test results (see Annex F).

Sway frame One in which the transverse

displacement
of one end of the member
relative to the other end is not effectively
prevented. Such members and frames occur
in structures which depend on flexural action
of members to resist lateral loads and sway,
as in moment resisting frames.

4.2.1.3 Simple construction

In simple construction,
the connections
between
members (beam and column) at their junction will not
resist any appreciable moment and shall be assumed
to be hinged.

A rigid jointed multi-storey frame may be

considered as a non-sway frame if in every
individual storey, the deflection 6, over a
storey height h,, due to the notional horizontal

4.2.2 Design of Connections

The design of all connections
22

shall be consistent with

IS 800:2007
the form of construction,

and the behaviour

c)

of the

connections
shall not adversely affect any other part
of the structure beyond what is allowed for in design.

Connections
Section 10.

shall be designed

4.3 Assumptions

in accordance

with

in Analysis

4.3.1 The structure

except as follows:

shall be analyzed

in its entirety

Where the imposed load is variable and

exceeds three-quarters
of the dead load,
arrangements of live load acting on the floor
under consideration
shall include
the
following cases:
1)

Imposed load on alternate spans,

2)

Imposed load on two adjacent spans, and

- 3)

Imposed load on all the spans.

4.3.4 Base Sti@ess

a)

b)

c)

Regular building structures, with orthogonal

frames in plan, may be analyzed as a series
of parallel two-dimensional
sub-structures
(part of a structure), the analysis being carried
out in each of the two directions, at right
angles to each other, except when there is
significant load redistribution
between the
sub-structures
(part of a structure).
For
earthquake loading three dimensional analysis
may be necessary to account for effects of
torsion
and also for multi-component
earthquake forces [see IS 1893 (Part 1)].

In the analysis of all structures the appropriate base

stiffness about the axis under consideration shall be
used. In the absence of the knowledge of the pedestal
and foundation
stiffness,
the following
may be
assumed:

For vertical loading in a multi-storey building

structure, provided with bracing or shear walls
to resist all lateral forces, each level thereof,
together with the columns immediately above
and below, may be considered
as a substructure, the columns being assumed fixed
at the ends remote from the level under
consideration.
Where beams at a floor level in a multi-bay
building structure tu-e considered as a substructure (part of a structure), the bending
moment at the support of the beam due to
gravity loads may be determined based on the
assumption that the beam is fixed at the i%
end support, one span away from the span
under consideration, provided that the floor
beam is continuous beyond that support point.

4.3.2 Spun Length

a)

When the column is rigidly connected to a

suitable foundation,
the stiffness of the
pedestal shall be taken as the stiffness of the
column above base plate. However in case of
very stiff pedestals
and foundations
the
column may be assumed as fixed at base.

b)

When the column is nominally connected

to the foundation,
a pedestal stiffness of
10 percent of the column stiffness may be
assumed.

c)

When an actual pin or rocker is provided in

the connection between the steel column and
pedestal, the column is assumed as hinged at
base and the pedesrdl and foundation maybe
appropriately designed for the reactions from
the column.

d)

In case of (a) and (b), the bottom of the

pedestal
shall be assumed
to have the
following boundary condition in the absence
of any derailed procedure based on theory or
tests:
1)

When the foundation consist of a group

of piles with a pile cap, raft foundation
or an isolated footing resting on rock or
very hard soil, the pedestal shall be
assumed to be fixed at the level of the
bottom of footing or at the top of pile
cap.

2)

When the foundation

consist of an
isolated footing resting on other soils,
pedestal shall be assumed to be hinged
at the level of the bottom of footing.

3)

When the pedestal is supported by a

single pile, which is laterally surrounded
by soil providing passive resistance, the
pile shall be assumed to be fixed at a
depth of 5 times the diameter of the pile

The span length of a flexural member iu a continuous

frame system shall be taken as the dlsiance between
centre-to-centre of the supports.
4.3.3 Arrangements

of Imposed Loads in Bui[ding.s

For building structures, the various arrangements of

imposed loads considered for the analysis, shall include
at least the following:
a)
b)

Where the loading pattern

arrangement concerned.

is fixed,

the

Where the imposed load is variable and not

greater than three-quarters of the dead load,
the live load may be taken to be acting on all
spans.
23

IS 800:2007
4.4.2 First-Order

below the ground level in case of compact

ground or the top level of compact soil
in case of poor soil overlying compact
soil.

Elastic Analysis

Bending members may be assumed to have their ends

connected for shear only and to be free to rotate. In
triangulated structures, axial [orces maybe determined
by assuming that all members are pin connected. The
eccentricity for stanchion and column shall be assumed
in accordance with 7.3.3.

In a first-order elastic analysis, the equilibrium of the

frame in the undeformed geometry is considered, the
changes in the geometry of the frame due to the loading
are not accounted for, and changes in the effective
stiffness of the members
due to axial force are
neglected. The effects of these on the first-order
bending moments shall be allowed for by using one of
the methods of moment amplification
of 4.4.3.2
or 4.4.3.3
as appropriate.
Where the moment
amplification factor CY, CZ, calculated in accordance
with 4.4.3.2 or 4.4.3.3 as appropriate, is greater than
1.4, a second-order elastic analysis in accordance with
Annex B shall be carried out.

4.3.6 Notional Horizontal

4.4.3 Second-Order

4)

When the column is founded into rock,

it may be assumed to be fixed at the
interface of the column and rock.

4.3.5 Simple Construction

Loads

4.4.3.1 The analysis shall allow for the effects of the

design loads acting on the structure and its members
in their displaced and deformed configuration. These
second-order effects shall be taken into account by
using eithe~

To analyze a frame subjected

to gravity loads,
considering the sway stability of the frame, notional
horizontal forces should be applied. These notional
horizontal forces account for practical imperfections
and should be taken at each level as being equal to 0.5
percent of factored dead load plus vertical imposed
loads applied at that level. The notional load should
not be applied along with other lateral loads such as
wind and earthquake loads in the analysis.
4.3.6.1 The notional forces should be applied
whole structure, in both orthogonal directions,
direction at a time, at roof and all floor levels
equivalent,
They should
be taken as
simultaneously with factored gravity loads.
-----. .
..
.
4.3.6 ..4 1he nohonal force should nOt be,
a)

applied when considering

overall instability;

b)

combined
loads;

c)

combined

d)

taken to contribute
foundation.

with other

horizontal

with temperature

on the
in one
or their
acting

overturning

Elastic Analysis

a)

A first-order elastic analysis with moment

amplification
in accordance
with 4.4.2,
provided the moment amplification factors,
C, and C, are not greater than 1.4; or

b)

A second-order elastic analysis in accordance

with Annex B.

4.4.3.2 Moment amplification for members in non-sway

frames
For a member with zero axial compression or a member
subject to axial tension, the design bending moment is
that obtained from the first order analysis for factored
loads, without any amplification.

or

(lateral)

For a braced member with a design axial compressive

force P~ as determined by the first order analysis, the
design bending moment shall be calculated considering
moment amplification as in 9.3.2.2.

effects; and

to the net shear on the

4.4.3.3 Moment
frames

4.3.6.3 The sway effect using notional load under

gantry load case need not be considered if the ratio of
height to lateral width of the building is less than unity.

amplification

for members

in sway

The design bending moment shall be calculated as the

product of moment amplification factor [see 9.3.2.2
(C~Y, Cm,)] and the moment obtained from the first
order analysis of the sway frame, unless analysis
considering
second order effects is carried out
(see 4.4.3).

4,4 Elastic Analysis

4.4.1 Assumptions
Individual members shall be assumed to remain elastic
under the action of the factored design loads for all
limit states.

4.4.3.4 The calculated bending moments from the first

order elastic analysis may be modified by redistribution
upto 15 percent of the peak calculated moment of the
member under factored load, provided that:

The effect of haunching or any variation of the crosssection along the axis of a member shall be considered,
and where significant, shall be taken into account in
the determination of the member stiffness,

a)

24

the internal

forces

and moments

in the

IS 800:2007
members of the frame are in equilibrium
applied loads.
b)

fluctuating
assessment

with

all the members in which the moments are

reduced shall belong to plastic or compact
section classification (see 3.7).

If practicable,
torsional restraint (against lateral
buckling) should be provided at all plastic hinge
locations. Where not feasible, the restraint should be
provided within a distance of D/2 of the plastic hinge
location, where D is the total depth of section.

4.5.1 Application
The effects of design action throughout or on part of a
structure may be determined by a plastic analysis,
provided that the requirements of 4.5.2 are met. The
distribution
of design action effects shall satisfy
equilibrium and the boundary conditions.

The torsional restraint requirement

at a section as
above, need not be met at the last plastic hinge to form,
provided it can be clearly identified.
Within a member containing
a plastic hinge, the
maximum distance L~ from the restraint at the plastic
hinge to an adjacent restraint should be calculated by
any rational method or the conservative method given
below, so as to prevent lateral buckling.

4.5.2 Requirements
When a plastic method of analysis is used, all of the
following conditions shall be satisfied, unless adequate
ductility of the structure and plastic rotation capacity
of its members and connections are established for the
design loading conditions by other means of evaluation:
The yield stress of the grade of the steel used
shall not exceed 450 MPa.

b)

The stress-strain characteristics of the steel

shall not be significantly different from those
obtained for steels complying with IS 2062
or equivalent and shall be such as to ensure
complete plastic moment redistribution. The
stress-strain diagram shall have a plateau at
the yield stress, extending for at least six times
the yield strain. The ratio of the tensile
strength to the yield stress specified for the
grade of the steel shall not be less than 1.2.
The elongation on a gauge length complying
with IS 2062 shall not be than 15 percent, and
the steel shall exhibit strain-hardening
capability. Steels conforming to IS 2062 shall
be deemed to satisfy the above requirements.

c)

The members used shall be hot-rolled or

fabricated using hot-rolled plates and sections.

d)

The cross-section of members not containing

plastic hinges should be at least that of
compact section (see 3.7.2), unless the
members meet the strength requirements from
elastic analysis.

e)

Where plastic hinges occur in a member, the

proportions of its cross-section
should not
exceed the limiting values for plastic section
given in 3.7.2.

f)

The cross-section
should
about its axis perpendicular
plastic hinge rotation.

$4

a fatigue

4.5.2.1 Restraints

4.5 Plastic Analysis

a)

loading,
requiring
(see Section 13).

Conservatively

L~ (ht mm) may be taken as

where
actual compressive
stress on the crosssection due to axial load, in N/mm*;

f=
f,

= yield stress, in N/mm2;

radius of gyration about the minor axis, in

mm;

Xt =

torsional index, x, =1.132 (Alw/IylJ05;

A=

area of cross-section;

and

Iw, Iy, It = warping constant, second moment of the

cross section above the minor axes and
St. Venants torsion constant, respectively.
Where the member has unequal flanges, rY should be
taken as the lesser of the values of the compression
flange only or the whole section.
Where the cross-section of the member varies within
the length L~, the maximum value of rY and the
minimum value of xl should be used.
The spacing of restraints
to member lengths not
containing
a plastic
hinge should
satisfy
the
recommendations
of section on lateral buckling
strength of beams (see 8.2.2). Where the restraints are
placed at the limiting distance L~, no further checks
are required.

be symmetrical
to the axis of the

4.5.2.2 Stiffeners at plastic hinge locations

Web stiffeners should be provided where a concentrated
load, which exceeds 10 percent of the shear capacity

The members shall not be subject to impact

loading, requiring fracture assessment
or

25

IS 800:2007
of the member, is applied within D\2 of a plastic hinge
location (see 8.2.1.2). The stiffener should be provided
within a distance of half the depth of the member on
either side of the hinge location and be designed to
carry the applied load in accordance with 8.7.4. If the
stiffeners are flat plates, the outstand width to the
thickness ratio, b/t, should not exceed the values given
in the plastic section (see 3.7, Table 2). Where other

sections are used the ratio

I
~
[)It

In the case of building structures, it is not normally

necessary to consider the effect of alternating plasticity.
4.5.4 Second-Order

Any second-order effects of the loads acting on the

structure
in its deformed
configuration
may be
neglected, provided the following are satisfied:
a)

m
should not exceed

the values given for plastic section (for simple outstand,

as in 3.7);
where
I so = second moment of area of the stiffener about
the face of the element perpendicular to the
web; and
I,

= St. Venants torsion constant of the stiffener.

b)

4.5.2.3 The frame shall be adequately supported against

sway and out-of-plane buckling, by bracings, moment
resisting frame or an independent system such as shear
wall.

4.5.2.4 Fabrication

restriction

Within a length equal to the member depth, on either

side of a plastic hinge location,
the following
restrictions should be applied to the tension flange and
noted in the design drawings. Holes if required, should
be drilled or else punched 2 mm undersize and reamed.
All sheared or hand flame cut edges should be finished
smooth by grinding, chipping or planning.
4.5.3 Assumptions

b)

c)

Buckling

Analysis

4.6.1 The elastic buckling load factor ().C,) shall be the

ratio of the elastic buckling load set of the frame to the
design load set for the frame, and shall be determined
in accordance with 4.6.2.
NOTE The value of lC, depends on the load set and has to

using a

It shall be permissible to assume full strength or partial

strength connections, provided the capacities of these
are used in the analysis, and provided that
a)

For clad frames, provided the stiffening effects

of masonry infill wall panels or diaphragms of
profiled wall panel is not taken into account,
and where elastic buckling load factor, JC,
(see 4.6) satisfies J,jAP> 10.
[f10>2C{IP24,6 the second-order effects may
be considered by ampli~ing the design load
effects obtained from plastic analysis by a
factor 6,= {0.9 2,, /( 2=,- l)}.
If ACj JP < 4.6, second-order
elasto-plastic
analysis or second-order
elastic analysis
(see 4.4.3) is to be carried out.
For un-clad frames or for clad frames where
the stiffening effects of masonry infill or diaphragms of profiled wall panel is taken into
account, where elastic buckling load factor, 2<,
(see 4.6) satisfies J=j 2,220
If 20> AC]AP
25.75 the second-order effects
may be considered by ampli~ing the design
load effects obtained from plastic analysis by
a factor iSP= {0.9 2,,/( J,,I)}.
If IC{ LP<5.75, second-order elasto-plastic
analysis or second-order
elastic analysis
(see 4.4.3) shall be carried out.

4.6 Frame

in Analysis

The design action effects shall be determined

rigid-plastic analysis.

Elastic Analysis

be evaluated for each possible set of load combination.

4.6.2 In-plane Frame Buckling

The elastic buckling load factor (hC,) of a rigid-jointed
frame shall be determined by using:

in a full strength connection, the moment

capacity of the connection shall be not less
than that of the member being connected;
in a partial strength connection, the moment
capacity of the connection may be less than
that of the member being connected; and
in both cases the behaviour of the connection
shall be such as to allow all plastic hinges
necessary for the collapse mechanism
to
develop, and shall be such that the required
plastic hinge rotation does not exceed the
rotation capacity at any of the plastic hinges
in the collapse mechanism.

a)

One of the approximate

and 4.6.2.2 or

b)

A rational elastic buckling

whole frame.

4.6.2.1 Regular non-sway frames

methods

of 4.6.2.1

analysis

of the

(see 4.1.2)

In a rectangular non-sway frame with regular loading

and negligible axial forces in the beams, the Euler
buckling stressfCC,for each column shall be determined
in accordance with 7.1.2.1. The elastic buckling load
factor (L,,) for the whole frame shall be taken as the
lowest of the ratio of (&/fed) for all the columns, where
26

IS 800:2007
fC~is the axial compressive
the factored load analysis.

disproportionately
under accidental events
like explosions,
vehicle impact or due to
consequences
of human error to an extent
beyond local damage. The potential
for
catastrophic
damage shall be limited or
avoided by appropriate choice of one or more
of the following:

stress in the column from

4.6.2.2 Regular sway frames

In a rectangular sway frame with regular loading and
negligible axial forces in the beams, the buckling load,
PC,,,for each column shall be determined as P,, = A~C
wherefCCis the elastic buckling stress of the column in
the plane of frame, obtained in accordance with 7.1.2.1.
The elastic buckling load factor AC,,for the whole frame
shall be taken as the lowest of all the ratios, k,,,,
calculated for each storey of the building, as given
below:
~

1)

Avoiding,
eliminating
or reducing
exposure to hazards, which the structure
is likely to sustain.

2)

Choosing structural forms, layouts and

details and designing such that:

c -

~(P/L)

where
P=
L=

i)

the structure has low sensitivity

hazardous conditions; and

ii)

the structure survives with only local

damage even after serious damage
to any one individual element by the
hazard.

_ ~(PCC/L)

member axial force from the factored load

analysis, with tension taken as negative; and

3)

column length and the summation includes

all columns in the plane frame within a
storey.
SECTION 5
LIMIT STATE DESIGN

Choosing suitable material, design and

detailing
procedure,
construction
specifications, and control procedures for
shop fabrication and field construction as
relevant to the particular structure.

The following conditions may be satisfied to avoid a

disproportionate collapse:
a)

5.1 Basis for Design

5.1.1 In the limit state design method, the structure
shall be designed to withstand safely all loads likely to
act on it throughout its life. It shall not suffer total
collapse under accidental loads such as from explosions
or impact or due to consequences of human error to an
extent beyond the local damages. The objective of the
design is to achieve a structure that will remain fit for
use during its life with acceptable target reliability. In
other words, the probability of a limit state being
reached during its lifetime should be very low. The
acceptable limit for the safety and serviceability
requirements before failure occurs is called a limit state.
In general, the structure shall be designed on the basis
of the most critical limit state and shall be checked for
other limit states.
5.L2 Steel structures are to be designed and constructed
to satisfy the design requirements
with regard to
stability, strength, serviceability,
brittle fracture,
fatigue, fire, and durability such that they meet the
following:
a)

Remain fit with adequate reliability and be

able to sustain all actions (loads) and other
influences experienced during construction
and use;

b)

Have adequate
maintenance;

c)

Do not suffer overall

durability

to

under

damage

normal

or collapse
27

The building
should be effectively
tied
together at each principal floor level and each
column should be effectively held in position
by means of continuous ties (beams) nearly
orthogonal,
except where the steel work
supports only cladding weighing not more
than 0.7 kN/m~ along with imposed and wind
loads. These ties must be steel members such
as beams, which may be designed for other
purposes, steel bar reinforcement anchoring
the steel frame to concrete floor or steel mesh
reinforcement
in composite slab with steel
profiled sheeting directly connected to beam
with shear connectors. These steel ties and
their end connections should be capable of
resisting factored tensile force not less than
the factored dead and imposed loads acting
on the floor area tributary to the tie nor less
than 75 kN. Such connection of ties to edge
column should also be capable of resisting
1 percent of the maximum axial compression
in the column at the level due to factored dead
and imposed loads. All column splices should
be capable of resisting a tensile force equal
to the largest of a factored dead and live load
reaction from a single floor level located
between that column splice and the next
column splice below that splice. Lateral load
system to resist notional horizontal loads
prescribed
in 4.3.6 should be distributed

IS 800:2007
no longer satisfies the performance
requirements
specified. The limit states are classified as:

throughout the building in nearly orthogonal

directions so that no substantial portions is
connected at only one point to such a system.
Precast concrete or other heavy floor or roof
units should be effectively anchored in the
direction of their span either to each other over
the support or directly to the support.
b)

c)

a)

Limit state of strength; and

b)

Limit state of serviceability.

a)

Loss of equilibrium of the structure as a whole

or any of its parts or components.

b)

Loss of stability of the structure (including

the effect of sway where appropriate
and
overturning)
or any of its parts including
supports and foundations.

c)

Failure by excessive deformation, rupture of

the structure or any of its parts or components,

d)

Fracture due to fatigue,

e)

Brittle fracture.

t
5.2.2.1 The limit states of strength are those associated
with failures (or imminent failure), under the action of
probable and most unfavorable
combination of loads
on the structure using the appropriate partial safety
factors, which may endanger the safety of life and
property. The limit state of strength includes:

Where the above conditions to tie the columns

to the floor adequately are not satisfied each
storey of the building should be checked to
ensure that disproportionate
collapse would
not precipitate by the notional removal, one
at a time, of each column.
Where each floor is not laterally supported
by more than one system, check should be
made at each storey by removing one such
lateral support system at a time to ensure that
disproportionate
collapse would not occur.
The collapse is considered disproportionate,
if more than 15 percent of the floor or roof
area of 70 mz collapse at that level and at one
adjoining level either above or below it, under
a load equal to 1.05 or 0.9 times the dead load,
0.33 times temporary or full imposed load of
permanent nature (as in storage buildings) and
0.33 times wind load acting together.

5.2.2.2 The limit state of serviceability

5.1.3 Structures
designed for unusual or special
functions
shall comply with any other relevant
additional limit state considered appropriate to that
structure.

a)

Deformation
and deflections,
which may
adversely affect the appearance or effective
use of the structure or may cause improper
functioning of equipment or services or may
cause damages to finishes and non-structural
members.

b)

Vibrations
in the structure
or any of its
components causing discomfort to people,
damages to the structure, its contents or which
may limit its functional effectiveness. Special
consideration
shall be given to systems
susceptible to vibration, such as large open
floor areas free of partitions to ensure that
such vibrations are acceptable for the intended
use and occupancy (see Annex C).

c)

Repairable

damage or crack due to fatigue.

d)

Corrosion,

durability.

e)

Fire.

5.1.4 Generally
structures
and elements shall be
designed by limit state method. Where limit state
method cannot be conveniently adopted, working stress
design (see Section 11) may be used.
5.2 Limit State Design
5.2.1 For achieving the design objectives, the design
shall be based on characteristic
values for material
strengths and applied loads (actions), which take into
account the probability of variations in the material
strengths and in the loads to be supported.
The
characteristic values shall be based on statistical data,
if available. Where such data is not available, these
shall be based on experience. The design values are
derived from the characteristic values through the use
of partial safety factors, both for material strengths and
for loads. In the absence of special considerations, these
factors shall have the values given in this section
according to the material, the type of load and the limit
state being considered. The reliability of design is
ensured by satisfying the requirement:

include:

5.3 Actions
The actions (loads) to be considered in design include
direct actions (loads) experienced by the structure due
to self weight, external actions etc., and imposed
deformations
such as that due to temperature and
settlements.
5.3.1 Classification

ofActions

Actions are classified

given below:

by their variation

with time as

Design action S Design strength

a)
5.2.2 Limit states are the states beyond which the structure
28

Permanent actions (Q ): Actions due to selfweight of structura ! and non-structural

. ._,. ___

LS 800:2007
components, fittings,
equipment, etc.
b)

c)

ancillaries,

is generally not required in building unless it is required

by client or approving
authority
in which case,
generally recommendation
in 5.1.2 c) or specialist
literature shall be followed.

and fixed

Variable
actions
(Qv): Actions
due to
construction and service stage loads such as
imposed (live) loads (crane loads, snow loads,
etc.), wind loads, and earthquake loads, etc.

5.3.3 Design Actions

The Design Actions, Q~,is expressed as Qd = ~?.

Accidental actions (Q,): Actions expected due

to explosions, and impact of vehicles, etc.

5.3.2 Characteristic

where

Actions (Loads)

yk

5.3.2.1 The Characteristic Actions, QC,are the values

of the different actions that are not expected to be
exceeded with more than 5 percent probability, during
the life of the structure and they are taken as:
a)

= partial safety factor for different

given in Table 4 to account for:

the variable loads, values of which are

specified in relevant standard [see IS 875 (all
Parts) and IS 1893 (Part l)].

c)

the upper limit with a specified probability

(usually 5 percent) not exceeding during some
reference period (design life).

Possibility of unfavorable
deviation of
the load from the characteristic value,

b)

Possibility
the load,

c)

Uncertainty in the assessment of effects

of the load, and

d)

Uncertainty in the assessment

limit states being considered.

of the

The loads or load effects shall be multiplied

by the

assessment

of

5.4 Strength
The ultimate
strength
calculation
consideration of the following:

5.3.2.2 The characteristic values of accidental loads

generally correspond to the value specified by relevant
code, standard or client. The design for accidental load
Safety Factors

of inaccurate

relevant ~f factors, given in Table 4, to get the design

loads or design load effects.

specified
by client,
or by designer
in
consultation with client, provided they satisfy
the minimum provisions
of the relevant
loading standard.

Table 4 Partial

loads k,

a)

the self-weight, in most cases calculated on

the basis of nominal dimensions
and unit
weights [see 1S 875 (Part 1)].

b)

d)

Q,k

may require

a)

Loss of equilibrium
part of it, considered

of the structure or any

as a rigid body; and

b)

Failure by excessive deformation,

rupture or

for Loads, y~,for Limit States

(Clauses 3.5.1 and 5.3.3)

Limit State of Strength

Combination

Limit State of Serviceability

(1)
DL+LL+CL
DL+LL+CL+
WLJEL
DL+WLfEL
DL+ER
DL+LL+AL

(2)
1.5
1.2
1.2
1.5(0.9)2
~~;)z)
1.0

~
Leading

7
&

Accompanying

Accompanying

(3)

(4)

(5)

1.5
1.2
1.2

1.2

1.05
1.05
0.53

0.6
1.2
1.5

0.35

0.35

(7)

(8)

(9)

(lo)

1.0
1.0

1.0
0.8

1.0
0.8

0.8

1.0

1.0

1.0

(6)

)When action of different live loads is simultaneously considered, the leading live load shall be considered to be the one causing the
higher load effects in the member/section.
)This value is to be considered when the dead load contributes to stability against overturning is critical or the dead load causes
reduction in stress due to other loads.

Abbreviations:
DL = Dead load, LL = Imposed load (Live loads), WL = Wind load, CL = Crane load (VerticaVHorizontal), AL = Accidental load, ER =
Erection load, EL= Earthquake load.
NOTE The effects of actions (loads) in terms of stresses or stress resultants may be obtained from an appropriate method of analysis
m in 4.

29

IS 800:2007
loss of stability of the structure or any part of
it including support and foundation.

c)

The permanent actions (loads) and effects

contributing to resistance shall be multiplied
with a partial safety factor 0.9 and added
together
with design
resistance
(after
multiplying with appropriate partial safety
factor). Variable actions and their effects
contributing to resistance shall be disregarded.

d)

The resistance effect shall be greater than or

equal to the destabilizing effect. Combination
of imposed and dead loads should be such as
to cause most severe effect on overall stability.

5.4.1 Design Strength

The Design Strength, S~, is obtained as given below
from ultimate strength, SUand partial safety factors for
materials, y~ given in Table 5.

Sd=s,lym
where partial safety factor for materials, y~ account
for:
of unfavorable
deviation of
a) Possibility
material strength from the characteristic value,
b)

Possibility
of unfavorable
member sizes,

c)

Possibility
of unfavorable
reduction
in
member strength due to fabrication
and
tolerances, and

d)

Uncertainty in the calculation

the members.

5.5 Factors

Governing

the Ultimate

variation

5.5.1.2 Sway stability

The whole structure, including portions between
expansion joints, shall be adequately stiff against sway.
To ensure this, in addition to designing for applied
horizontal loads, a separate check should be carried
out for notional horizontal loads such as given in 4.3.6
to evaluate the sway under gravity loads.

of

of strength of

5.5.2 Fatigue
Generally fatigue need not be considered unless a
structure
or element
is subjected
to numerous
significant fluctuations of stress. Stress changes due
to fluctuations in wind loading normally need not be
considered. Fatigue design shall be in accordance with
Section 13. When designing for fatigue, the partial
safety factor for load, yf, equal to unity shall be used
for the load causing stress fluctuation and stress range.

Strength

Stability

5.5.1

Stability shall be ensured for the structure as a whole

and for each of its elements. This should include,
overall frame stability against overturning and sway,
as given in 5.5.1.1 and 5.5.1.2.
5.5.1.1 Stability against overturning

5.5.3 Plastic Collapse

The structure as a whole or any part of it shall be

designed to prevent instability due to overturning, uplift
or sliding under factored load as given below:
a)

b)

Plastic analysis and design may be used, if the

requirement
specified under the plastic method of
analysis (see 4.5) are satisfied.

The Actions shall be divided into components

aiding instability and components resisting
instability.

5.6 Limit State of Serviceability

Serviceability
limit state is related to the criteria
governing normal use. Serviceability limit state is limit
state beyond which the service criteria specified below,
are no longer met:

The permanent and variable actions and their

effects causing instability shall be combined
using appropriate load factors as per the Limit
State requirements,
to obtain maximum
destabilizing effect.
Table 5 Partial

a)

Safety Factor

Deflection

for Materials,

limit,
y~

(Clause 5.4. 1)
SI

Definition

Partial Safety Factor

No.

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)

1.10

Resistance, governed by yielding, Ymo

Resistance of member to buckling, ymo
Resistance, governed by ultimate stress, y~t
Resistance of connection:
a)
b)
c)
d)

1.10
1.25

Bolts-Friction Type, y~r

Bolts-Bearing Type, ym~
Rivets, Ym,
Welds, ymW

30

Shop Fabrications

Field Fabrications

1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25

1.25
1.25
1.25
1.50

IS 800:2007
b)

Vibration limit,

c)

Durability consideration,

d)

Fire resistance.

or a building component should not impair the strength

of the structure or components or cause damage to
finishings. Deflections are to be checked for the most
adverse but realistic combination of service loads and
their arrangement, by elastic analysis, using a load
factor of 1.0. Table 6 gives recommended limits of
deflections for certain structural members and systems.
Circumstances may arise where greater or lesser values
would be more appropriate depending upon the nature
of material in element to be supported (vulnerable to
cracking or not) and intended use of the structure, as
required by client.

and

Unless specified otherwise, partial safety factor for

loads, y~,of value equal to unity shall be used for all
loads leading to serviceability limit states to check the
adequacy of the structure under serviceability limit
states.
5.6.1 Dejection
The deflection under serviceability

loads of a building

Table 6 Deflection
Type of

Deflection

DesignLoad

Limits
Maximum
Deflection

Supporthtg

Member

Building

(1)

(4)

(3)

(2)

Live load/ Whrd load

Elastic cladding

Purlinsand Girts
[

t,iVC

load

LNe load

Simplespan
Cantilever span

(6)

(5)

Brittle cladding

Span/150
Span/l 80

Elastic cladding

Span/240

Brittle cladding

Spatr/300

Elastic cladding

Span/120

Brittle cladding

Span/150

Profiled Metal Sheeting

Sparr/180

Plastered Sheeting

Sparr1240

L!ve load/Wind load

Rafter supporting

Crane load (Manual

operation)

Gantry

Crane

Spaa/500

Crane load (Electric

operation up to 50 t)

Gantry

Crane

Spanl150

Gantry

Crane

Span/l 000

Elastic cladding

Height/l 50

Masonry/Brittle cladding

Height/240

Crane (absolute)

SpanMOO

Relative displacement
between rails supporting
crane

IOmm

Gantry (Elastic cladding;

pendent operated)

Height/200

Gantry (Brittle cladding; cab

operated)

Height/400

Elements not susceptible to

cracking

Sparr/300

Elements susceptible to
cracking

Spsm/360

Elements not susceptible to

cracking

Span/l 50

Elements susceptible to
cracking

Span/180

Elastic cladding

Height/300

Brittle cladding

Height/500

Crane load (Electric

operationover 50 t)
No cranes

Crane + wind

Crane+wind

Live load

Live load

Whrd
Wind

Column

Gantry (lateral)

Column/frame

Floor and Roof

Cantilever

Building
Inter storey drift

31

Storey height/300

IS 800:2007
5.6.1.1 Where the deflection due to the combination
of dead load and Iive load is likely to be excessive,
consideration should be given to pre-camber the beams,
trusses and girders. The value of desired camber shall
be specified in design drawing. Generally, for spans
greater than 25 m, a camber approximately equal to
the deflection due to dead loads plus half the live load
may be used. The deflection of a member shall be
calculated without considering the impact factor or
dynamic effect of the loads on deflection. Roofs, which
are very flexible, shall be designed to withstand any
additional load that is likely to occur as a result of
pending of water or accumulation of snow or ice.

DESIGN

6.1 Tension Members

Tension members are linear members in which axial
forces act to cause elongation (stretch). Such members
can sustain loads upto the ultimate load, at which stage
they may fail by rupture at a critical section. However,
if the gross area of the member yields over a major
portion of its length before the rupture load is reached,
the member may become non-functional
due to
excessive elongation. Plates and other rolled sections
in tension may also fail by block shear of end bolted
regions (see 6.4.1).

5.6.2 Vibration
Suitable provisions in the design shall be made for
the dynamic effects of live loads, impact loads and
vibrdti on due to machinery operating loads. In severe
cases
possibility
of resonance,
fatigue
or
unacceptable
vibrations
shall be investigated.
Unusually flexible structures (generally the height
to effective width of lateral load resistance system
exceeding
5:1) shall be investigated
for lateral
vibration
under dynamic wind loads. Structures
subjected to large number of cycles of loading shall
be designed against fatigue failure, as specified in
Section 13. Floor vibration effect shall be considered
using specialist literature (see Annex C),

The factored design tension 1, in the members

satisfy the following requirement:

where
T~ = design strength of the member.
The design strength of a member under axial tension,
T~,is the lowest of the design strength due to yielding
of gross section, T~g rupture strength of critical section,
T~n, and block shear T~~,given in 6.2, 6.3 and 6.4,
respectively.
6.2 Design Strength

b)

Degree of exposure,

c)

Shape of the member and the structural detail,

d)

Protective measure, and

e)

Ease of maintenance.

Due to Yielding of Gross Section

The design strength of members under axial tension,

T~~,as governed by yielding of gross section, is given
by

Factors that affect the durability of the buildings, under

conditions relevant to their intended life, are listed
below:
Environment,

shall

T<T~

5.6.3 Durabi[i(y

a)

SECTION
6
OF TENSION MEMBERS

Tdg= Agfy Mno

where
f,

= yield stress of the material,

A~ = gross area of cross-section,

and

y~o = partial safety factor for failure in tension by

yielding (see Table 5).

5.6.3.1 The durability of steel structures shall be

ensured by following recommendations
in Section 15.
Specialist literature may be referred to for more detailed
and additional information in design for durability.

6.3 Design
Section

Strength

Due to Rupture

of Critical

6.3.1 Plates

5.6.4 Fire Resistance

The design strength in tension of a plate, T~n, as

governed by rupture of net cross-sectional area, An, at
the holes is given by

Fire resistance of a steel member is a function of its

mass, its geometry, the actions to which it is subjected,
its structural
support condition,
fire protection
measures adopted and the fire to which it is exposed.
Design provisioris to resist fire are briefly discussed in
Section 16. Specialist literature may be referred to for
more detailed information in design of fire resistance
of steel structures.

T~n= 0.9 AnfU/ y~,

where
Yml= partial safety factor for failure at ultimate
stress (see Table 5),

32

= ultimate stress of the material, and

An

= net effective area of tbe member given by,

.. ._,_,
____

IS 800:2007

An=

b-rid,
[

LC = length of the end connection, that is the

distance between the outermost bolts in the
end joint measured along the load direction
or length of the weld along the load
direction.

+ ~$-

it

where
b, t = width
and thickness
respective y,
d~

of

the

plate,

For preliminary sizing, the rupture strength

section may be approximately taken as:

= diameter of the bolt hole (2 mm in addition

to the diameter of the hole, in case the
directly punched holes),

= gauge length between

shown in Fig. 5,

P,

= staggered-pitch length between line of bolt

holes, as shown in Fig. 5,

n=
i=

the bolt holes,

of net

where

as

0.6 for one or two bolts, 0.7 for three bolts

and 0.8 for four or more bolts along the
length in the end connection or equivalent
weld length;

cf.

number of bolt holes in the critical section,

and

An

= net area of the total cross-section;

subscript for summation

AgO = gross area of the outstanding

An, = net area of the connected

of all the inclined

leg;
leg; and

thickness of the leg.

Itv

r]

--. .-k--
------+ET

bs=w+w,

L-.--

-.-Yd

b~=w

-t

FIG. 6 ANGLESWITHSINGLELEG CONNECTIONS

6.3,4 Other Section

FIG. 5 PLATESWITHBOLTSHOLES IN TENSION

The rupture strength,

Tdn, of the double angles,
channels, I-sections and other rolled steel sections,
connected by one or more elements to an end gusset is
also governed by shear lag effects. The design tensile
strength of such sections as governed by tearing of net
section may also be calculated using equation in 6.3.3,
where ~ is calculated based on the shear lag distance,
b,, taken from the farthest edge of the outstanding leg
to the nearest bolt/weld line in the connected leg of
the cross-section.

6.3.2 Threaded Rods

The design strength of threaded rods in tension, Tdn,as
governed by rupture is given by
Tdn = 0.9 An ful ym,
where
Am = net root area at the threaded section.
6.3.3 Single Angles

6.4 Design Strength

The rupture strength of an angle connected through
one leg is affected by shear lag. The design strength,
Tdn,as governed by rupture at net section is given by:

Due to Block Shear

The strength as governed by block shear at an end

connection of plates and angles is calculated as given
in 6.4.1.

7dn=0.9 AnC~u/ y~l + ~ A~O fY/Y~O

6.4.1 Bolted Connections

where

The block shear strength,

taken as the smaller of,

Td~ of connection

shall be

where
w

= outstand leg width,

b,

= shear lag width, as shown in Fig. 6, and

or
Td~= (0.944,. f. /( $

33

~ml) + Atgfy %0 )

IS 800:2007
where

where

Av~,Avn = minimum gross and net area in shear along

bolt line parallel
to external
force,
respectively
(1-2 and 3-4 as shown in
Fig. 7A and 1-2 as shown in Fig. 7B),
At~, A,fl = minimum gross and net area in tension
from the bolt hole to the toe of the angle,
end bolt line, perpendicular to the line of
force, respectively
(2-3 as shown in
Fig. 7B), and
~u,~Y

A.

= effective sectional
in 7.3.2, and

area as defined

Id

= design compressive
as per 7.1.2.1.

stress, obtained

7.1.2.1 The design compressive stress, ~d, of axially

loaded compression members shrdl be calculated using
the following equation:
f, /ymo
f.,

= ultimate and yield stress of the material,

respectively.

= Xfy/Ymo

~ fy/Yti

(j+[&-q

6.4.2 Welded Connection

0.5 [1 + a (x 0.2)+ az]

The block shear strength, Td~ shall be checked for

welded end connections
by taking an appropriate

non-dimensional

effective slenderness

ratio

section in the member around the end weld, which can

shear off as a block.

DESIGN

SECTION 7
OF COMPRESSION

X2 E

MEMBERS
Xx

7.1 Design Strength

where

7.1.1 Common hot rolled and built-up steel members

used for carrying axial compression, usually fail by
flexural buckling. The buckling strength of these
members is affected by residual stresses, initial bow
and accidental eccentricities of load. To account for
all these factors, the strength of members subjected to
axial compression is defined by buckling class a, b, c,
or d as given Table 7.
7.1.2 The design compressive
is given by:

= Euler buckling stress = (KL/\2

( /r]

KL/r = effective slenderness ratio or ratio

of effective
length,
KL to
appropriate radius of gyration, E
a=

imperfection
Table 7;

x=

stress reduction factor (see Table 8)

for different
buckling
class,
slenderness ratio and yield stress

strength Pd, of a member

P<Pd

where
AmO =

P~ = A,fCd

--EEm-40[

E
+*
-

-~
L

7A Plate

7B Angle

FIG. 7 BLOCKSHEARFAILURE
34

in

partial safety factor for material

strength.

--*--72
I
4*
*3
I
1

given

[o+($z~ar]
,

factor

. ._.
_,

b.

IS 800:2007
NOTE Calculated values of design compressive stress,.fi~
for different buckling classes are given in Table 9.

can be assessed, the effective length, KL can be

calculated on the basis of Table 11. Where frame
analysis does not consider the equilibrium of a framed
structure in the deformed shape (second-order analysis
or advanced
analysis),
the effective
length of
compression members in such cases can be calculated
using the procedure given in D-1. The effective length
of stepped column in single storey buildings can be
calculated using the procedure given in D-2.

7.1.2.2 The classification of different sections under

different buckling class a, b, c or d, is given in Table
10. The stress reduction factor X, and the design
compressive stress~,~, for different buckling class, yield
stress, and effective slenderness ratio is given in Table
8 for convenience.
The curves corresponding
to
different
buckling
class are presented
in nondimensional form, in Fig. 8.
Table 7 Imperfection
(Chzuse.s7.l.l

Factor,

7.2.3 Eccentric Beam Connection

In cases where the beam connections are eccentric in
plan with respect to the axes of the column, the same
conditions of restraint as in concentric connection shall
be deemed to apply, provided the connections
are
carried across the flange or web of the columns as the
case may be, and the web of the beam lies within, or in
direct contact with the column section, Where practical
difficulties prevent this, the effective length shall be
taken as equal to the distance between points of
restraint, in non-sway frames.

et

arzd7.1.2.1)

Buckling Class

0.21

0.34

0.49

0.76

7.2 Effective Length of Compression

Members

7.2.1 The effective length KL, is calculated from the

actual length L, of the member, considering
the
rotational
and relative
translational
boundary
conditions at the ends. The actual length shall be taken
as the length from centre-to-centre of its intersections
with the supporting members in the plane of the
buckling deformation. In the case of a member with a
free end, the free standing length from the center of
the intersecting member at the supported end, shall be
taken as the actual length.

7.2.4 Compression

Members

in Trusses

In the case of bolted, riveted or welded trusses and

braced frames, the effective
length, KL, of the
compression members shall be taken as 0.7 to 1.0 times
the distance between centres of connections, depending
on the degree of end restraint provided. In the case of
members of trusses, buckling in the plane perpendicular
to the plane of the truss, the effective length, KL shall
be taken as the distance between the centres of
intersection. The design of angle struts shall be as
specified in 7.5.

7.2.2 Effective Length

Where the boundary conditions in the plane of buckling

1.0

0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0

0.5

1.0

1,5

2:0

FIG. 8 COLUMNBUCKLINGCURVES
35

2;5

3;0

a00
Table 8(a) Stress Reduction

Factor,

x for Column Buckling

0
0
..
N
=

Class a

(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7.1.2.2)

Yield Stress,J

KM

(MPa)

1.

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

280

300

320

340

360

380

400

420

450

480

510

540

10

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

20

1.000

0.999

0.998

0.997

0.995

0.994

0.993

0.993

0.990

0.988

0.986

0.984

0.983

0.981

0.979

0.977

0.975

0.972

0.970

30

0.977

0.975

0.974

0.972

0.970

0.969

0.967

0.965

0.961

0.957

0.954

0.951

0.948

0.946

0.943

0.938

0.934

0.930

0.925

40

0.952

0.949

0,947

0.944

0.942

0.939

0.937

0.934

0.926

0.921

0.916

0.911

0.906

0.901

0.896

0.888

0.881

0.873

0.865

50

0.923

0.919

0.915

0.911

0.908

0.904

0.900

0.896

0.884

0.876

0.867

0.859

0.851

0.842

0.834

0.820

0.807

0.794

0.780

60

0.888

0.883

0.877

0.871

0.865

0.859

0.853

0.847

0.828

0.816

0.803

0.790

0.777

0.763

0.750

0.730

0.710

0.690

0.671

70

0.846

0.837

0.829

0.820

0.811

0.803

0.794

0.785

0.758

0.740

0.722

0.703

0.686

0.668

0.651

0.626

0.602

0.579

0.557

80

0.793

0.781

0.769

0.757

0.746

0.734

0.722

0.710

0.675

0.653

0.631

0.610

0.589

0.570

0.551

0.525

0.501

0.478

0.458

90

0.730

0.715

0.700

0.685

0.671

0.657

0.643

0.628

0.590

0.565

0.542

0.520

0.500

0.481

0.463

0.439

0.416

0.396

0.377

100

0.661

0.644

0.627

0.610

0.594

0.579

0.564

0.549

0.510

0.486

0.463

0.443

0.424

0.407

0.390

0.368

0.348

0.331

0.314

I 10

0.591

0.573

0.555

0.538

0.522

0.507

0.492

0.478

0.440

0.418

0.397

0.379

Q.362

0.346

0.332

0.312

0.295

0.279

0.265

120

0.525

0.507

0.489

0.473

0.458

0.443

0.429

0.416

0.381

0.361

0.343

0.326

0.311

0.297

0.284

0.267

0.252

0.238

0.226

130

0.466

0.448

0.432

0.416

0.402

0.388

0.376

0.364

0.332

0.314

0.298

0.283

0.269

0.257

0.246

0.231

0.217

U.206

0.195

0.275

0.260

0.247

0.235

0.224

0.214

0.201

0.189

0.179

0.170

0.177

0.166

0.157

0.149

0.157

0.147

0.139

0.132

140

0.413

0.397

0.382

0.368

0.355

0.342

0.331

0.320

0.291

150

0.368

0.353

0.339

0.326

0.314

0.303

0.293

0.283

0.257

0.243

0.229

0.218

0.207

0.197

0.189

160_

0.329

0.316

0.303

0.291

0.280

0.270

0.261

0.252

0.229

0.215

0.204

0.193

0.184

0.175

0.167

0.192

0.182

0.172

0.164

0.156

0.149

0.140

0.131

0.124

0.117

0.173

0.163

0.155

0.147

0.140

0.134

0.125

0.118

0.111

0.105

170

0.296

0.283

0.272

0.261

0.251

0.242

0.233

0.225

0.204

180

0.267

0.255

0.245

0.235

0.226

0.218

0.210

0.203

0.184

190

0.242

0.231

0.222

0.213

0.205

0.197

0.190

0.183

0.166

0.156

0.147

0.140

0.133

0.126

0.121

0.113

0.106

0.100

0.095

200

0.220

0.210

0.202

0.193

0.186

0.179

0.172

0.166

0.151

0.142

0.134

0.127

0.120

0.115

0.109

0.102

0.096

0.091

0,086

210

0.201

0.192

0.184

0.177

0.170

0.163

0.157

0.152

0.137

0,129

0.122

0.115

0.110

0.104

0.099

0.093

0.087

0.083

0.078

220

0.184

0.176

0.169

0.162

0.155

0.149

0.144

0.139

0.126

0.118

0.111

0.106

0.100

0.095

0.091

0.085

0.080

0.075

0.071

0.108

0.102

0.097

0.092

0.088

0.083

0.078

0.073

0.069

0.065

0.085

0.081

0.077

0.072

0.068

0.064

0.060

0.078

0.074

0.071

0.066

0.062

0.059

0.056

230

0.170

0.162

0.155

0.149

0.143

0.137

0.132

0.128

0.115

240

0.157

0.149

0.143

0.137

0.132

0.127

0.122

0.118

0.106

0.100

0.094

0.089

250

0.145

0.138

0.132

0.127

0.122

0.117

0.113

0.109

0.098

0.092

0.087

0.082

Table 8(b) Stress Reduction

Factor,

~ for Column Buckling

Class b

(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7. 1.2.2)

(MPa)

KL/r
4

200

10

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

I.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1,000

I.000

1.000

20

1.000

0.998

0.996

0.994

0.993

0.991

0.990

0.986

0.983

0.981

0.978

0.975

0.972

0.970

0.967

0.963

0.960

0.956

0.953

0.924

0.920

0.915

0.91 I

0.904

0.898

0.892

0.886

Yield Stress, A

210

220

230

240

250

260

280

300

320

340

360

380

400

420

450

480

510

540

30

0.963

0.961

0.958

0.955

0.953

0.950

0.948

0.943

0.938

0.933

0.929

40

0.925

0.921

0.917

0.913

0.909

0.906

0.902

0.895

0.887

0.880

0.873

0.866

0.859

0.852

0.845

0.835

0.825

0.815

0.805

50

0,883

0.877

0.872

0.866

0.861

0.855

0.850

0.839

0.829

0.818

0.808

0.798

0.787

0.777

0.767

0.752

0.737

0.722

0.708

60

0.835

0.827

0.820

0.812

0.805

0.798

0.790

0.775

0.761

0.746

0.732

0.718

0.704

0.691

0.677

0.657

0.638

0.620

0.602

70

0.781

0.771

0.761

0.751

0.742

0.732

0.722

0.703

0.685

0.667

0.649

0.632

0.615

0.599

0.584

0.561

0.540

0.520

0.502

80

0.721

0.709

0.697

0.685

0.673

0.661

0.650

0.627

0.606

0.585

0.566

0.547

0.529

0.512

0.496

0.474

0.453

0.434

0.416

90

0.657

0.643

0.629

0.615

0.602

0.589

0.576

0.552

0.530

0.508

0.488

0.470

0.452

0.436

0.421

0.400

0.380

0.363

0.346

100

0.593

0.577

0.562

0.548

0.534

0.520

0.507

0.483

0.461

0.440

0.421

0.403

0.387

0.372

0.358

0.339

0.321

0.306

0.291

110

0.531

0.515

0.500

0.485

0.471

0.458

0.445

0.422

0.401

0.381

0.364

0.348

0.333

0.319

0.306

0.289

0.274

0.260

0.247

120

0.474

0.458

0.443

0.429

0.416

0.403

0.391

0.370

0.350

0.332

0.316

0.30 I

0.288

0.276

0.265

0.249

0.236

0.223

0.212

130

0.423

0.408

0.394

0.380

0.368

0.356

0.345

0.325

0.307

0.291

0.276

0.263

0.251

0.240

0.230

0.217

0.204

0.194

0.184

140

0.378

0.364

0.350

0.338

0.327

0.316

0.306

0.287

0.271

0.256

0.243

0.23 I

0.221

0.21 I

0.202

0.190

0. I79

0.169

0.161

150

0.339

0.325

0.313

0.302

0.291

0.281

0.272

0.255

0.241

0.227

0.215

0.205

0.195

0.186

0.178

0.167

0.158

0.149

0.142

160

0.305

0.292

0.281

0.271

0.261

0.252

0.243

0.228

0.215

0.203

0.192

0.182

0.L74

o.166

0.158

0.149

0.140

0.133

0.126

170

0.275

0.264

0.253

0.244

0.235

0.227

0.219

0.205

0.193

0.182

0.172

0.163

0.155

0.148

0.142

0.133

0.125

0.118

0.112

0.147

0.140

0.133

0.128

0.120

0.113

0.106

0.101

0.108

180

0.249

0.239

0.229

0.220

0.212

0.205

0.198

0.185

0.174

0.164

0.155

190

0.227

0.217

0.208

0.200

0.193

0.186

0.179

0.168

0.157

0.148

0.140

0.133

0.127

0.121

0.115

0.102

0.096

0.091

200

0.207

0.198

0.190

0.183

0.176

0.169

0.163

0.153

0.143

0.135

0.128

0.121

0.[15

0.110

0.105

0.098

0.092

0.087

0.083

2}0

0.190

0.182

0.174

0.167

0.161

0.155

0.149

0.140

0.131

0.123

0.117

0.110

0.105

0.100

0.096

0.090

0.084

0.080

0.075

220

0.174

0.167

0.160

0.154

0.148

0.142

0.137

0.128

0.120

0.113

0.107

0.101

0.096

0.092

0.088

0.082

0.077

0.073

0.069

230

0.161

0.154

0.147

0.141

0.136

0.131

0.126

0.118

0.111

0.104

0.098

0.093

0.088

0.084

0.080

0.075

0.071

0.067

0.063

240

0.149

0.142

0.136

0.131

0.126

0.121

0.117

0.109

0.102

0.096

0.091

0.086

0.082

0.078

0.074

0.070

0.065

0.062

0.058

250

0.138

0.132

0.126

0.121

0.117

0.112

0.108

0.101

0.095

0.089

0.084

0.080

0.076

0.072

0.069

0.064

0.060

0.057

0.054

E
00

0
0

Table 8(c) Stress Reduction

Factor,

~ for Column Buckling

%
m
o
0
..

Class c

(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7.1.2.2)

KLlr
4

Yield Stress,

f, (MPa)

200

210

220

230

10

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

20

0.999

0.997

0.994

0.992

0.990

0.987

0.985

0.981

0.976

0.972

0,968

0.964

30

0.948

0.944

0.941

0.937

0.933

0,930

0.926

0.920

0.913

0.907

0.901

0.895

0.S89

0.883

0.877

40

0.896

0.891

0.885

0.880

0.875

0.870

0.866

0.856

0.847

0.838

0.829

0.820

0.812

0.803

0.795

240

250

260

280

300

320

340

360

400

420

450

480

1.000

1.000

1.000

I.000

1.000

1.000

I.000

0.961

0.957

0.953

0.948

0.943

0.938

0.933

0.869

0.861

0.853

0.845

0.783

0.771

0.760

0.748

380

510

540

50

0.841

0.834

0.827

0.821

0.814

0.807

0.801

0.788

0.776

0.763

0.752

0.740

0.729

0.717

0.706

0.690

0.675

0.660

0.645

60

0.783

0.774

0.765

0.757

0.748

0.740

0.732

0.716

0.700

0.685

0.670

0.656

0.642

0.628

0.615

0.596

0.578

0.561

0.544

70

0.722

0.711

0.700

0.690

0.680

0.670

0.660

0.641

0.623

0.605

0.588

0.572

0.557

0.542

0.528

0.508

0.489

0.471

0.454

80

0.659

0.646

0.634

0.622

0.611

0.600

0.589

0.568

0.548

0.529

0.512

0.495

0.479

0.464

0.450

0.430

0.412

0.395

0.379

90

0.596

0.583

0.569

0.557

0.544

0.533

0.521

0.499

0.479

0.460

0.443

0.426

0.411

0.397

0.383

0.365

0.348

0.332

0.318

I00

0.536

0.522

0.508

0.495

0.483

0.47 I

0.459

0.438

0.418

0.400

0.384

0.368

0.354

0.341

0.328

0.3I 1

0.296

0.282

0.269

110

0.480

0.466

0.453

0.440

0.428

0.416

0.405

0.385

0.366

0.349

0.333

0.3 I9

0.306

0.294

0.283

0.268

0.254

0.242

0.230

120

0.430

0.416

0.403

0.391

0..379

0.368

0.358

0.339

0.321

0.306

0.291

0.278

0.267

0.256

0.246

0.232

0.220

0.209

0.199

130

0.385

0.372

0.360

0.348

0.337

0.327

0.317

0.299

0.283

0.269

0.256

0.244

0.234

0.224

0.215

0.203

0.192

0.182

0.173

140

0.346

0.333

0.322

0.311

0.301

0.291

0.282

0.266

0.25 I

0.238

0.227

0.216

0.206

0.197

0.189

0.178

0.168

0.160

0.152

150

0.31 I

0.300

0.289

0.279

0.269

0.261

0.252

0.237

0.224

0.212

0.202

0.192

0.183

0.175

0.168

0.158

0.149

0.141

0.134

160

0.28 I

0.270

0.260

0.251

0.242

0.234

0.227

0.213

0.201

0,190

0.180

0.172

0.164

0.156

0.150

0.141

0.133

0.126

0.120

170

0.255

0.245

0.236

0.227

0.219

0.212

0.205

0.192

0.181

0.171

0.162

0.154

0.147

0.140

0.134

0.126

0.119

0.113

0.107

180

0.232

0.223

0.214

0.206

0.199

0.192

0.186

0.174

0.164

0.155

0.147

0.139

0.133

0.127

0.121

0.114

0.107

0.102

0.096

0.181

0.175

0.169

0.158

0.149

0.140

0.133

0.126

0.120

0.115

0.110

0.103

0.097

0.092

0.087

0.136

0.128

0.121

0.115

0.110

0.105

0.100

0.094

0.089

0.084

0.079

0.124

0.117

0.111

0.105

0.100

0.096

0.092

0.086

0.081

0.076

0.072

190

0.212

0.203

0.195

0.188

200

0.194

0.186

0.179

0.172

0.166

0.160

0.154

0.144

210

0.178

0.171

0.164

0.158

0.152

0.146

0.141

0.132

220

O.!64

0.157

0.151

0.145

0. I40

0.135

0.130

0.122

0.114

0.108

0.102

0.097

0.092

0.088

0.084

0.079

0.074

0.070

0.066

230

0.152

0.145

0.140

0.134

0.129

0.124

0.120

0.112

0.105

0.099

0.094

0.089

0.085

0.081

0.077

0.073

0.068

0.065

0.061

240

0.141

0.135

0.129

0.124

0.120

0.115

0.111

0.104

0.098

0.092

0.087

0.082

0.078

0.075

0.071

0.067

0.063

0.060

0.056

250

0.131

0.125

0.120

0.115

0.111

0. I07

0.103

0.096

0.090

0.085

0.081

0.076

0.073

0.069

0.066

0.062

0.058

0.055

0.052

Table 8(d) Stress Reduction

Factor,

~ for Column

Buckling

C lass d

(Clauses 7.1.2.1 and 7.1 .2.2)

Yield Stress, JY(MPa)

IA

200

210

220

230

240

10

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

I.000

1.000

20

0.999

0.995

0.991

0.988

0.984

0.980

0.977

0.970

0.964

0.958

0.952

0.946

250

260

280

300

320

340

360

400

420

450

480

510

540

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

1.000

i .000

1.000

0.940

0.935

0.930

0.922

0.915

0.908

0.901

380

30

0.922

0.916

0.91 I

0.906

0.901

0.896

0.891

0.881

0.872

0.863

0.855

0.847

0.839

0.831

0.823

0.813

0.802

0.792

0.782

40

0.848

0.841

0.834

0.828

0.821

0.815

0.808

0.796

0.784

0.773

0.762

0.751

o.74i

0.731

0.721

0.707

0.694

0.681

0.668

50

0.777

0.768

0.760

0.752

0.744

0.736

0.728

0.713

0.699

0.685

0.672

0.659

0.647

0.635

0.624

0.608

0.592

0.577

0.563

60

0.707

0.697

0.687

0.678

0.668

0.659

0.651

0.634

0.617

0.602

0.587

0.573

0.560

0.547

0.535

0.517

0.501

0.486

0.471

70

0.640

0.629

0.618

0.607

0.597

0.587

0.578

0.559

0.542

0.526

0.510

0.496

0.482

0.469

0.456

0.439

0.423

0.408

0.394

80

0.576

0.564

0.553

0.542

0.531

0.521

0.511

0.492

0.474

0.458

0.442

0.428

0.414

0.402

0.390

0.373

0.358

0.344

0.330

90

0.517

0.505

0.493

0.482

0.471

0.461

0.451

0.432

0.415

0.399

0.384

0.370

0.357

0.345

0.334

0.319

0.304

0.292

0.280

00

0.464

0.451

0.440

0.428

0.418

0.408

0.398

0,380

0.363

0.348

0.334

0.321

0.309

0.298

0.288

0,274

0.261

o,~49

0.239

10

0.416

0.404

0.392

0.381

0.371

0.361

0.352

0.335

0.319

0.305

0.292

0.281

0.270

0.259

0.250

o.~37

0.226

0.215

0.206

20

0.373

0.361

0.350

0.340

0.330

0.321

0.313

0.297

0.282

0.269

0.257

0.246

0.236

0.227

0.219

0.207

0.197

0.187

0.179

30

0.336

0.325

0.314

0.305

0.295

0.287

0.279

0.264

0.251

0.239

0.228

0.218

0.209

0.200

0.193

0.182

0.173

0.164

0.157

40

0.303

0.292

0.283

0.274

0.265

0.257

0.250

0.236

0.224

0.213

0.203

0.194

0.185

0.178

0.171

0.161

0.153

0.145

0.138

50

0.274

0.264

0.255

0.247

0.239

0.231

0.224

0.212

0.201

0.190

0.181

0.173

0.165

0.159

0.152

0.144

0.136

0.129

0.123

60

0.249

0.240

0.231

0.223

0.216

0.209

0.203

0.191

0.181

0.171

0.163

0.155

0.149

0.142

0.137

0.129

0.122

0.116

0.110

70

0.227

0.218

0.210

0.203

0.196

0.190

0.184

0.173

0.164

0.155

0.147

0.140

0.134

0.128

0.123

0.116

0.110

0.104

0.099

80

0.207

0.199

0.192

0.185

0.179

0.173

0.167

0.157

0.149

0.141

0.134

0.127

0.122

0.1)6

0.111

0.105

0.099

0.094

0.089

90

0.190

0.183

0.176

0.169

0.164

0.158

0.153

0.144

0.136

0.128

0.122

0.116

0.111

0.106

0.101

0.095

0.090

0.085

0.081

00

0.175

0.168

0.162

0.156

0.150

0.145

0.140

0.132

0.124

0.118

0.112

0.106

0.101

0.097

0.093

0.087

0.082

0.078

0.074

10

0.161

0.155

0.149

0.143

0.138

0.134

0.129

0.121

0.114

0.108

0.102

0.097

0.093

0.089

0.085

0.080

0.075

0.071

0.068

20

0.149

0.143

0.138

0.133

0.128

0.123

0.119

0.112

0.105

0.100

0.094

0.090

0.086

0.082

0.078

0.074

0.069

0.066

0.062

30

0.138

0.133

0.128

0.123

0.118

0.114

0.110

0.104

0.097

0.092

0.087

0.083

0.079

0.075

0.072

0.068

0.064

0.061

0.058

40

0.129

0.123

0.119

0.114

0.11o

0.106

0.103

0.096

0.090

0.085

0.081

0.077

0.073

0.070

0.067

0.063

0.059

0.056

0.053

50

0.120

0.115

0.110

0.106

0.102

0.099

0.095

0.089

0.084

0.079

0.075

0.071

0.068

0.065

0.062

0.058

0.055

0.052

0.049

%
00
0
0
..

~
o
4

Table 9(a) Design Compressive

Stress,~C~ (MPa) for Column Buckling

Class a

E
m
o
0
..

(Ckzuse 7.1.2.1)
KLlr
J

Yield

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

280

300

Stress, & (MPa)

320

340

360

380

400

420

450

480

510

540

10

182

191

200

213

218

227

236

255

273

291

309

327

34 s

364

382

409

436

464

491

20

182

191

200

208

217

226

235

252

270

287

305

322

339

357

374

400

425

451

476

30

178

186

195

203

212

220

229

245

262

279

295

311

328

344

360

384

408

431

454

40

173

181

189

197

205

213

221

237

253

268

283

298

313

328

342

363

384

405

425

281

294

306

318

336

352

368

383

310

320

329

50

168

176

183

191

198

205

213

227

241

255

268

60

162

169

175

182

189

I95

202

214

226

237

248

258

268

278

286

299

70

154

160

166

171

177

182

I88

197

207

215

223

230

237

243

249

256

263

268

274

80

I44

149

154

158

163

167

171

178

184

190

195

199

204

207

210

215

219

222

225

90

133

I37

140

i 43

146

149

] 52

157

161

164

168

I70

173

175

I77

179

182

184

185

100

120

123

125

128

130

132

133

136

139

141

143

145

146

148

I49

151

152

153

154

110

107

109

111

112

i 14

115

116

118

120

121

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

129

130

100

101

101

103

104

105

106

107

107

108

109

109

110

110

Ill

120

95.5

96.7

97.9

98.9

130

84.6

85.5

86.3

87

87.7

88.3

88.8

89.8

90.6

91.3

92.0

140

75.2

75.8

76.4

76.9

77.4

77.8

78.2

78.9

79.5

80.0

80.5

80.9

150

67.0

67.4

67.9

68.2

68.6

68.9

69.2

69.7

70.2

70.6

70.9

71.2

160

59.9

60.3

60.6

60.9

61.1

61.4

61.6

62.0

62.4

62.7

62.9

63.2

170

53.8

54.1

54.3

54.6

54.8

55.0

55.I

55.5

55.7

56.0

56.2

56.4

180

48.6

48.8

49.0

49.2

49.3

49.5

49.6

49.9

50.1

50.3

50.5

50.6

50.8

50.9

51.0

51.2

51.3

51.5

51.6

190

44.0

44.2

44.3

44.5

44.6

44.7

44.9

45.1

45.3

45.4

45.6

45.7

45.8

45.9

46.0

46.2

46.3

46.4

46.5

200

40.0

40.2

40.3

40.4

40.5

40.7

40.7

40.9

41.1

41.2

41.3

41.4

41.5

41.6

41.7

41.8

41.9

42.0

42.1

210

36.6

36.7

36.8

36.9

37.0

37.1

37.2

37.3

37.4

37.6

37.7

37.8

37.8

37.9

38.0

38.1

38.2

38.3

38.3

92.5

93.5

93.9

94.4

94.9

95.3

95.7

81,3

81.6

81.9

82.3

82.6

83.0

83.2

71.5

71.8

72.0

72.3

72.6

72.9

73.1

63.4

63.6

63.8

64.0

64.3

64.5

64.6

56,6

56.7

56.9

57.1

57.3

57.4

57.6

93.0

220

33.5

33.6

33.7

33.8

33.9

34.0

34.0

34.2

34.3

34.4

34.5

34.5

34.6

34.7

34.7

34.8

34.9

35.0

35.0

230

30.8

30.9

31.0

31.1

31.2

31.2

31.3

31.4

31.5

31.6

31.6

31.7

31.8

31.8

31.9

31.9

32.0

32.1

32.1

240

28.5

28.5

28.6

28.7

28.7

28.8

28.8

28.9

29.0

29.1

29.1

29.2

29.3

29.3

29.4

29.4

29.5

29.5

29.6

250

26.3

26.4

26.5

26.5

26.6

26.6

26.7

26.7

26.8

26.9

26.9

27.0

27.0

27.1

27.1

27.2

27.2

27.3

27.3

Table 9(b) Design Compressive

Stress,jC~ (MPa) for Column Buckling

Class b

(Clause 7. 1.2.1)
KLJr
J
10

-P

Yield Stress, -fY(MPa)

200

210

220

230

240

182

191

200

209

218

250
227

260

280

300

320

340

360

380

4CQ

420

450

480

510

540

236

255

273

291

309

327

345

364

382

409

436

464

491

369

394

419

443

468

20

182

190

199

208

217

225

234

251

268

285

302

319

336

353

30

175

183

192

200

208

216

224

240

256

271

287

302

318

333

348

370

392

414

435

342

360

378

395

40

168

176

183

191

198

206

213

228

242

256

270

283

297

310

323

50

161

167

174

181

188

194

201

214

226

238

250

261

272

283

293

308

322

335

347

226

235

243

251

259

269

279

287

295

181

187

197

207

217

162

(66

171

179

187

194

201

207

213

218

223

230

236

241

246

147

150

154

160

165

170

175

179

183

186

190

194

198

201

204

129

131

134

136

141

144

148

151

154

156

159

161

163

166

168

170

114

116

118

120

123

126

128

130

132

134

135

137

139

140

142

143

121
104

60

152

158

164

170

176

70

142

147

152

157

80

131

135

139

143

90

120

123

126

IC43

108

110

112

110

96.5

98.3

120

86.2

87.5

100

88.6

101

89.7

103

90.7

104

91.7

105

92.5

107

94.1

109

95.4

96.6
84.6

112
97.7

98.6

116

117

118

119

100

100

101

102

103

104

87.3

88.6

89.2

89.8

90.3

78.7

79.5

80.3

81.0

81.6

82.7

140

68.7

69.4

70.1

70.7

71.3

71.8

72.3

73.1

73.9

74.6

75.2

75.7

76.2

76.6

77.1

77.6

78.1

78.5

78.9

63.6

64.0

64.3

65.0

65.6

66.1

66.6

67.0

67.4

67.7

68.1

68.5

68,9

69.2

69.5

62.1

62.6

160

86.8

87.9

77.8

61.6

86.1

115

76.9

63.1

85.4

114

130
150

83.7

111

121

55.4

55.8

56.2

56.6

56.9

57.3

57.5

58.1

58.5

59.0

59.3

59.7

60.0

60.3

60.5

60.9

61.2

61.5

61.7

170

50.0

50.3

50.7

51.0

51.2

51.5

51.7

52.2

52.5

52.9

53.2

53.5

53.7

53.9

54.1

54.4

54.7

54.9

55.1

180

45.3

45.6

45.9

46,1

46.3

46.5

46.7

47.1

47.4

47.7

47.9

48.1

48.3

48.5

48.7

48.9

49.2

49.3

49.5

190

41.2

41.5

41.7

41.9

42.I

42.2

42.4

42.7

42.9

43.2

43.4

43.6

43.7

43.9

44.0

44.2

44,4

44.6

44.7

200

37.6

37.8

38.0

38.2

38.3

38.5

38.6

38.9

39.1

39.3

39.5

39.6

39.8

39.9

40.0

40.2

40.3

40.5

40.6

210

34.5

34.7

34.8

35.0

35.1

35.2

35.3

35.5

35.7

35.9

36.0

36.2

36.3

36.4

36.5

36.6

36.8

36.9

37.0

220

31.7

31.9

32.0

32.1

32.2

32.3

32.4

32.6

32.8

32.9

33.0

33.1

33.2

33.3

33.4

33.6

33.7

33.8

33.9

230

29.2

29.4

29.5

29.6

29.7

29.8

29.9

30.0

30.1

30.3

30.4

30.5

30.6

30.7

30.7

30.8

30.9

31.0

31.1

240

27.1

27.2

27.3

27.3

27.4

27.5

27.6

27.7

27.8

27.9

28.0

28.1

28.2

28.3

28.3

28.4

28.5

28.6

28.7

250

25.1

25.2

25.3

25.3

25.4

25.5

25.6

25.7

25.8

25.9

26.0

26.0

26.1

26.2

26.2

26.3

26.4

26.5

26.5
..
o
0
N
d

Table 9(c) Design Compressive

Stress,jC~ (MPa) for Column Buckling

Class c

6
~
o
..

(Clause 7.1 .2.1)

KL.lr
J

&.
N

Yield Stress, ~Y (MPa)

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

280

300

320

340

3641

380

400

420

450

480

510

540

10

182

191

200

209

218

227

236

255

273

291

309

327

345

364

382

409

436

464

491

20

182

190

199

207

216

224

233

250

266

283

299

316

332

348

364

388

412

435

458

30

172

180

188

196

204

21 I

219

234

249

264

278

293

307

321

335

355

376

395

415

40

163

170

177

184

191

198

205

218

231

244

256

268

280

292

304

320

337

352

367

50

153

159

165

172

178

183

189

201

212

222

232

242

252

261

270

282

295

306

317

60

142

148

153

158

163

168

173

182

191

199

207

215

222

228

235

244

252

260

267

70

131

136

140

144

148

152

156

163

170

176

182

187

192

197

202

208

213

218

223

80

120

123

127

130

133

136

139

145

149

154

158

162

165

169

172

176

180

183

186

90

108

111

114

116

119

121

123

127

131

134

137

140

142

144

146

149

152

154

156

100

102

104

105

107

109

112

114

116

119

120

122

124

125

127

129

131

132

100

102

103

104

106

107

108

110

111

112

113

100

97.5

110

87.3

89.0

90.5

92.0

93.3

94.6

95.7

97.9

120

78.2

79.4

80.6

81.7

82.7

83.7

84.6

86.2

87.6

88.9

90.1

91.1

92.1

93.0

93.8

94.9

130

70.0

71.0

71.9

72.8

73.5

74.3

75.0

76.2

77.3

78.3

79.2

80.0

80.7

81.4

82.0

82.9

140

62.9

63.6

64.4

65.0

65.6

66.2

66.7

67.7

68.6

69.3

70.0

70.7

71.2

71.8

72.3

72.9

150

56.6

57.2

57.8

58.3

58.8

59.2

59.7

641.4

61.1

61.7

62.3

62.8

63.3

63.7

64.1

64.6

95.9

96.8

97.6

83.6

84.3

84.9

73.5

74.1

74.6

65.1

65.5

65.9

160

51.1

51.6

52.1

52.5

52.9

53.3

53.6

54.2

54.8

55.3

55.7

56.1

56.5

56.9

57.2

57.6

58.0

58.4

58.7

170

46.4

46.8

47.1

47.5

47.8

48. I

48.4

48.9

49.3

49.8

50.1

50.5

50.8

51.1

51.3

51.7

52.0

52.3

52.6

180

42.2

42.5

42.8

43.1

43.4

43.6

43.9

44.3

44.7

45.0

45.3

45.6

45.8

46.1

46.3

46.6

46.9

47.1

47.3

190

38.5

38.8

39.0

39.3

39.5

39.7

39.9

40.3

40.6

40.9

41.1

41.4

41.6

41.8

42.0

42.2

42.5

42.7

42.9

200

35.3

35.5

35.7

35.9

36.I

36.3

36.5

36.8

37.0

37.3

37.5

37.7

37.9

38.1

38.2

38.4

38.6

38.8

39.0

210

32.4

32.6

32.8

33.0

33.1

33.3

33.4

33.7

33.9

34.1

34.3

34.5

34.7

34.8

34.9

35.1

35.3

35.4

35.6

220

29.9

30.1

30.2

30.4

30.5

30.6

30.8

31.0

31.2

31.4

31.5

31.7

31.8

31.9

32.1

32.2

32.4

32.5

32.6

230

27.6

27.8

27.9

28.0

28.2

28.3

28.4

28.6

28.8

28.9

29.1

29.2

29.3

29.4

29.5

29.7

29.8

29.9

30.0

240

25.6

25.7

25.9

26.0

26.1

26.2

26.3

26.4

26.6

26.7

26.9

27.0

27.1

27.2

27.3

27.4

27.5

27.6

27.7

250

23.8

23.9

24.0

24.1

24.2

24.3

24.4

24.5

24.7

24.8

24.9

25.0

25.1

25.2

25.3

25.4

25.5

25.6

25.7

Table 9(d) Design Compressive

Stress,~& (MPa) for Column Buckling

Class d

(Clause 7.1.2.1)
KM
4

Yield Stress, ~Y (MPa)

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

280

300

320

340

360

380

404)

420

450

480

510

540 -

10

182

191

200

209

218

227

236

255

273

291

309

327

345

364

382

409

436

464

49 I

20

182

190

198

206

215

223

231

247

263

279

294

310

325

340

355

377

399

42 I

442

30

168

175

182

189

i97

204

211

224

238

25 I

264

277

290

302

314

332

350

367

384

40

154

161

167

173

179

185

191

203

214

225

235

246

256

266

275

289

303

316

328

50

141

147

152

157

162

167

172

182

191

199

208

216

224

231

238

249

258

268

277

60

129

133

137

142

146

150

154

161

168

175

182

188

193

199

204

212

219

225

23 I

70

}16

120

124

127

130

133

i 37

142

148

153

158

162

167

171

174

180

184

189

193

80

105

108

111

113

116

118

121

125

129

i33

137

140

143

146

149

153

156

159

162

101

103

105

107

110

113

116

119

121

123

126

128

130

133

135

137

101

103

105

107

108

110

112

114

116

117

100

10I

90

94.1

100

96.4

98.6

92.6

94.0

96.7

99. I

81.0

82.1

83.2

85.3

87.1

72.1

73.0

73.9

75.5

77.0

64.5

65.2

65.9

67.2

57.2

57.8

58.4

59.0

51.6

52. !

.52.6

53.1

84.3

86.2

87.9

89.6

110

75.6

77.0

78.4

79.?

120

67.8

69.0

70.1

71.1

130

61.0

62.0

62.8

63.7

140

55.0

55.8

56.5

150

49.8

50.4

51.0

91.1

93.1

94.4

95.5

97.1

98.5

81.7

82.6

83.5

84.7

85.8

86.9

87.8

72.1

72.8

73.5

74.5

75.4

76.2

76.9

63.3

64.0

64.6

65.2

66.0

66.7

67.3

67,9

56.6

57.2

57.7

58.1

58.8

59.3

59.9

60.4

88.8

90.4

91.8

78.3

79.5

80.6

68.3

69.4

70.4

71.2

60.0

61.0

61.8

62.6

53.9

54.7

55.4

56.0

160

45.2

45.7

46.2

46.7

47,1

47.5

47.9

48.6

49.3

49.9

50.4

50.9

51.3

51.7

52.1

52.7

53.1

53.6

54.0

170

41.2

41.6

42,1

42.4

42.8

43.1

43.5

44.1

44.6

45.1

45.5

45.9

46.3

46.7

47.0

47.4

47.8

48.2

48,6

180

37.7

38.0

38.4

38.7

39.0

39.3

39.6

40.1

40.5

41.0

41.3

41.7

42.0

42.3

42.6

43.0

43.3

43.6

43.9

35.4

35.7

35.9

36.2

36.6

37.0

37.4

37.7

38.0

38.2

38.5

38.7

39.1

39.4

39.6

39.9

33.6

33.9

34.2

34.5

34.7

35.0

35.2

35.4

35.7

35.9

36.2

36.4

190

34.5

34.9

35.2

200

31.8

32,0

32.3

32.5

32.8

33.0

33.2

210

29.3

29.6

29.8

30.0

30.2

30.4

30.5

30.9

31.2

31.4

31.7

31.9

32.1

32.3

32.5

32.7

32.9

33.1

33.3

2Z0

27.1

27.3

27.5

27.7

27.9

28.0

28.2

28.5

28.7

29.0

29.2

29.4

29.6

29.7

29.9

30.1

30.3

30.5

30.6

230

25.2

25<3

25.5

25.7

25.8

26.0

26. i

26.4

26.6

26.8

27.0

27.k

27,3

27.5

27.6

27.8

27.9

28.1

28.2

240

23.4

23.6

23.7

23.9

24.0

24.i

24.2

24.5

24.7

24.8

25.0

25.2

25.3

25.4

25.5

25.7

25.9

26.0

26.1

250

21.8

22.0

22. !

22.2

22.3

22.s

22.6

22.8

22.9

23.1

23.2

23.4

23.5

23.6

23.7

23.9

24.0

24.1

24.2

..

Table 10 Buckling (3am of Cross-Sections

(Clause 7.1 .2.2)
Limits

Cross-Section

(2)

(1)

h/b, > 1.2:

t, <40 mm

Rolled I-Sections
1-.-%
r

40<mm<lj<100mm

,,

Buckling

About Axis

Buckling
Class

(3)

(4)

z-z
y.y

z-z

y-y

z-z
y-y

b
c

z-z
y-v

d
d

,T:
,

-J

h/bf s 1.2:
t( g 100 mm

Clr

L_.%_l
rl>lOOmm

t,
<40 mm

Welded l-Section

z-z

JJ-.Y

z-z
y-y

Hot rolled

Any

Cold formed

Any

Generally
(except as below)

Any

[?/tf<30

z-z

w,,,

Y-Y

ny

Any

I--Y

(r

tw

f,

:~r

~~

UT-

>40 mm

I x

L._&l

HOI1OWSection

6YE3D
welded

Box Section
+Y

Thick welds and

r
if: ,

~z

<30

L-J---d

Channel, Angle, T and Solid Sections

.!

~y~

*+

l--y
Built-up Member

l--y
zT-m

;T
l-y

44

IS 800:2007
Table 11 Effective

Length

of Prismatic

Compression

Members

(Clause 7.2.2)
Boundary Conditions
7

At One End
T
Translation

(1)

Schematic
Representation

Effective
Length

At the Other End

\
Rotation

F
Translation

\
Rotation

(2)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(5)
$)
t\
\I
\

Restrained

Restrained

Free

Free
/,

L]

Free

Restrained

2.OL

Free

I
;

Restrained

Free

Restrained

1.OL

Restrained

Restrained

Restrained

Restrained

Free

Restrained

1.2L

Restrained

Free

0.8.L

Restrained

Restrained

,/
L
{
\
\\

NOTE L is the unsupportedlength of the compressionmember(see7.2.1).

45

0.65L

IS 800:2007
7.3 Design Details

(see 9.3.2.2). The ends of compression members faced

for bearing shall invariably be machined to ensure perfect
contact of surfaces in bearing.

7.3.1 Thickness of Plate Elements

Classification of members on the basis of thickness of
constituent plate elements shall satisfy the widththickness ratio requirements specified in Table 2.

7.3.4.2 Where such members are not faced for complete

bearing, the splices shall be designed to transmit all
the forces to which the members are subjected.

7.3.2 Effective Sectional Area, A,

7.3.4.3
Wherever
possible,
splices
shall be
proportioned and arranged so that the centroidal axis
of the splice coincides as nearly as possible with the
centroidal axes of the members being jointed, in order
to avoid eccentricity; but where eccentricity is present
in the joint, the resulting stress shall be accounted for.

Except as modified in 3.7.2 (Class 4), the gross

sectional area shall be taken as the effective sectional
area for all compression
members fabricated
by
welding, bolting and riveting so long as the section is
semi-compact or better. Holes not fitted with rivets,
bolts or pins shall be deducted from gross area to
calculate effective sectional area.

7.4 Column

7.3.3 Eccentricity for Stanchions

7.4.1 General

and Columns

7.3.3.1 For the purpose of determining

Column bases should have sufficient stiffness and

strength to transmit axial force, bending moments and
shear forces at the base of the columns to their
foundation
without exceeding
the load carrying
capacity of the supports. Anchor bolts and shear keys
should be provided
wherever
necessary,
Shear
resistance at the proper contact surface between steel
base and concrete/grout
may be calculated using a
friction coefficient of 0.45.

the stress in a

stanchion or column section, the beam reactions or

similar loads shall be assumed to be applied at an
eccentricity of 100 mm from the face of the section or
at the centre of bearing whichever dimension gives the
greater eccentricity,
and with the exception of the
following two cases:
a)

b)

Bases

In the case of cap connection, the load shall

be assumed to be applied at the face of the
column or stanchion section or at the edge of
packing, if used towards the span of the beam.

The nominal bearing pressure between the base plate

and the support below may be determined on the basis
of linearly varying distribution
of pressure. The
maximum bearing pressure should not exceed the
bearing strength equal to 0.6~C~,wheref,~ is the smaller
of characteristic cube strength of concrete or bedding
material.

In the case of a roof truss bearing on a cap,

no eccentricity be taken for simple bearings
without connections capable of developing
any appreciable
moment. In case of web
member
connection
with face, actual
eccentricity is to be considered.

7.4,1.1 If the size of the base plate is larger than that

required to limit the bearing pressure on the base
support, an equal projection c of the base plate beyond
the Pace of the column and gusset may be taken as
effective in transferring the column load as given in
Fig. 9, such that bearing pressure on the effective area
does not exceed bearing capacity of concrete base.

7.3.3.2 In continuous columns, the bending moments

due to eccentricities of loading on the columns at any
floor may be divided equally between the columns
above and below that floor level, provided thaL the
moment of inertia of one column section, divided by
its effective length does not exceed 1.5 times the
correspoi~ding value of the other column. Where this
ratio is exceeded, the bending moment shall be divided
in proportion to the moment of inertia of the column
sections divided by their respective effective lengths.

7.4.2 Gusseted Bases

For stanchion with gusseted bases, the gusset plates,
angle cleats, stiffeners, fastenings, etc, in combination
with the bearing area of the shaft, shall be sufficient to
take the loads, bending moments and reactions to the
base plate without ex~eeding specified strength. All
the bearing surfaces shall be machined to ensure perfect
contact.

7.3.4 Splices
7.3.4.1 Where the ends of compression members are
prepared for bearing over the whole area, they shall be
spliced to hold the connected members accurately in
position, and to resist bending or tension, if present. Such
splices should maintain the intended member stiffness
about each axis. Splices should be located as close to
the point of inflection as possible. Otherwise their
capacity should be adequate to carry magnified moment

7.4.2.1 Where the ends of the column shaft and the

gusset plates are not faced for complete bearing, the
weldings, fastenings connecting them to the base plate
shall be sufficient to transmit all the forces to which
the base is subjected.

46

IS 800:2007
When only the effective area of the base plate is used
as in 7.4.1.1, C* may be used in the above equation
(see Fig. 9) instead of (a* - 0.3b2).

7.4.2.2 Column and base plate connections

Where the end of the column is connected directly to
the base plate by means of full penetration butt welds,
the connection shall be deemed to transmit to the base
all the forces and moments to which the column is
subjected.

7.4.3.2 When the slab does not distribute the column

load uniformly, due to eccentricity of the load etc,
special calculation shall be made to show that the base
is adequate to resist the moment due to the non-uniform
pressure from below.

7.4.3 Slab Bases

Columns with slab bases need not be provided with
gussets, but sufficient fastenings shall be provided to
retain the parts securely in place and to resist all
moments and forces, other than direct compression,
including those arising during transit, unloading and
erection,

7.4.3.3 Bases for bearing upon concrete

need not be machined on the underside.

7.4.3,4 In cases where the cap or base is fillet welded

directly to the end of the column without boring and
shouldering, the contact surfaces shall be machined to
give a perfect bearing and the welding shall be
sufficient to transmit the forces as required in 7.4.3.
Where full strength butt welds are provided, machining
of contact surfaces is not required.

7.4.3.1 The minimum thickness, t,, of rectangular slab

bases, supporting columns under axial compression
shall be
t,=

2.5w(a20.3b2

)y~0/fY

7.5 Angle Struts

> t~

7.5.1 Single Angle Struts

where
w

The compression in single angles may be transferred

either concentrically to its centroid through end gusset
or eccentrically by connecting one of its legs to a gusset
or adjacent member.

= uniform pressure from below on the slab

base under
the factored
load axial
compression;

a, b = larger and smaller projection, respectively

of the slab base beyond the rectangle
circumscribing the column; and
tf

or masonry

= flange thickness of compression

7.5.1.1 Concentric

loading

When a single angle is concentrically

loaded in
compression, the design strength may be evaluated
using 7.1.2.

member.

EFFECTIVE
j

FIG. 9 EFFECTIVEAREAOF A BASE PLATE

47

PORTION

STIFFENER

IS 800:2007
7.5.1.2 Loaded through one leg

stress shall not exceed the values based on 7.1.2, The

angles shall be connected together over their lengths
so as to satisfy the requirements of 7.8 and 10.2.5.

The flexura! torsional buckling strength of single angle

loaded in compression through one of its legs may be
evaluated using the equivalent slenderness ratio, ACas
given below:

7.5.2.2 Double angle discontinuous struts connected

back-to-back, to one side of a gusset or section by one
or more bolts or rivets in each angle, or by the
equivalent in welding, shall be designed in accordance
with 7.5.1 and the angles shall be connected together
over their lengths so as to satisfy the requirements
of 7.8 and 10.2.5.

where
k,, kz, k3 = constants
condition,

depending
upon the end
as given in Table 12,

7.5.3 Continuous Members

[-)
I

L,,,,= ~&

and k~ =

Double angle continuous struts such as those forming

the flanges, chords or ties of trusses or trussed girders,
or the legs of towers shall be designed as axially loaded
compression members, and the effective length shall
be taken in accordance with 7.2.4.

(b, +b2)/2t
-

TCLE

where

centre-to-centre
member,

1=

length of the supporting

7.5.4 Combined Stresses

In addition to axial loads, if the struts carry loads which
cause transverse bending, the combined bending and
axial stresses shall be checked in accordance with 9.3.
For determining the permissible axial and bending
stresses,
the effective
length shall be taken in
accordance with the 7.2 and 8.3.

r=
radius of gyration about the minor axis,
11
bj, bz = width of the two legs of the angle,
thickness

t=
=

of the leg, and

yield stress ratio ( 250~Y)05.

Table 12 Constants

kl, kz and k~
7.6 Laced Columns

St
No.

(1)

No. of Bolts

at Each End
Connection

Gusset/Connetting
Member
Fixity

>2
ii)

k,
7.6.1 General

(4)

(5)

(6)

Fixed

0.20

0.35

20

{ 0.70

0.60

0.75

0.35

20

{ 1.25

0.50

60

Hinged
Fixed

k,

(3)

(2)

i)

k,

Hinged

7.6.1.1 Members comprising two main components

laced and tied, should where practicable, have a radius
of gyration about the axis perpendicular to the plane
of lacing not less than the radius of gyration about the
axis parallel to the plane of lacing (see Fig. IOA
and 10 B).
7.6.1.2 As far as practicable, the lacing system shall
be uniform throughout the length of the column.
7.6.1.3 Except for tie plates as specified in 7.7, double
laced systems (see Fig. 10B) and single laced systems
(see Fig. IOA) on opposite
sides of the main
components shall not be combined with cross members
(ties) perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the strut
(see Fig. 10C), unless all forces resulting from
deformation of the strut members are calculated and
provided for in the design of lacing and its fastenings.

Stiffeners of in-plane rotational restraint provided by the

.gossetkmrmectingmember.
For partial restraint, the LCcan be interpolated between the I.C
results for fixed and hinged cases.

7.5.2 Double Angle Struts

7.5.2.1 For double angle discontinuous
struts,
connected back to back, on opposite sides of the gusset
or a section, by not less than two bolts or rivets in line
along the angles at each end, or by the equivalent in
welding, the load may be regarded as applied axially.
The effective length, KL, in the plane of end gusset
shall be taken as between 0.7 and 0.85 times the
distance between intersections,
depending on the
degree of the restraint provided. The effective length,
KL, in the plane perpendicular to that of the end gusset,
shall be taken as equal to the distance between centres
of intersections. The calculated average compressive

7.6.1.4 Single laced systems, on opposite faces of

the components being laced together shall preferably
be in the same direction so that one is the shadow of
the other, instead of being mutually opposed in
direction.
7.6.1.5 The effective slenderness ratio, (KZA-)., of laced
columns shall be taken as 1.05 times the (KVr)o, the
actual maximum slenderness ratio, in order to account
for shear deformation effects.
48

IS 800:2007

A
-..

1A
. . ---+-+

---%fB

LACING ON
FACE A

---

LACING ON

LACING ON

LACING ON

FACE B

FACE A

FACE B

PREFFERED LACING
ARWNGEMENT

PREFFERED LACING
ARWNGEMENT
10A .Wgle

10B Double Laced System

Laced System

10C Double Laced and Single Laced System Combined with Cross Numbers
FIG. 10 LACED COLUMNS

49

IS 800:2007
7.6.2 Width of Lacing Bars

construction, the effective lengths shall be taken as 0.7

times the distance between the inner ends of welds
connecting the single lacing bars to the members.

In bolted/riveted construction, the minimum width of

lacing bars shall be three times the nominal diameter
of the end boltfrivet.

NOTE The required section for lacing bars as compression/

tension members shall be determined by using the appropriate
design stresses, ~, subject to the requirements given in 7.6.3,
to 7.6.6 and T~in 6.1.

7.6.3 Thickness of Lacing Bars

The thickness of flat lacing bars shall not be less than
one-fortieth of its effective length for single lacings
and one-sixtieth of the effective length for double
lacings.

7.6.7 Attachment

The bolting, riveting or welding of lacing bars to the

main members shall be sufficient to transmit the force
calculated in the bars. Where welded lacing bars
overlap the main members, the amoupt of lap measured
along either edge of the lacing bar shall be not less
than four times the thickness of the bar or the thickness
of the element of the members to which it is connected,
whichever is less. The welding should be sufficient to
transmit the load in the bar and shall, in any case, be
provided along each side of the bar for the full length
of lap.

7.6.3.1 Rolled sections or tubes of equivalent strength

may be permitted instead of flats, for lacings.
7.6.4 Angle of Inclination
Lacing bars, whether in double. or single systems, shall
be inclined at an angle not less than 40 nor more than
7(P to the axis of the built-up member.
7.6.5 Spacing
7.6.5.1 The maximum spacing of lacing bars, whether
connected by bolting, riveting or welding, shall also
be such that the maximum slenderness ratio of the
components
of the main member (al/rl ), between
consecutive lacing connections is not greater than 50
or 0.7 times the most unfavorable
slenderness ratio
of the member as a whole, whichever is less, where al
is the unsupported length of the individual member
between lacing points, and r, is the minimum radius
of gyration of the individual member being laced
together

7.6.8 End 7te Plates

Laced compression members shall be provided with
tie plates as per 7.7 at the ends of lacing systems and
at intersection with other members/stays and at points
where the lacing systems are interrupted.
7.7 Battened

Columns

7.7.1 General
7.7.1.1 Compression members composed of two main
components
battened should preferably
have the,
individual members of the same cross-section
and
symmetrically disposed about their major axis. Where
practicable, the compression members should have a
radius of gyration about the axis perpendicular to the
plane of the batten not less than the radius of gyration
about the axis parallel to the plane of the batten (see
Fig. 11).

7.6.5.2 Where lacing bars are not lapped to form the

connection to the components of the members, they
shall be so connected that there is no appreciable
interruption in the triangulation of the system.
7.6.6 Design of Lacings
7.6.6.1 The lacing shall be proportioned
transverse shear, Vt, at any point in the
to at least 2.5 percent of the axial force
and shall be divided equally among
lacing systems in parallel planes.

to Main Members

to resist a total
member, equal
in the member
all transverse-

7.7.1.2 Battened compression members, not complying

with the requirements specified in this section or those
subjected to eccentricity of loading, applied moments
or lateral forces in the plane of the battens (see Fig. 11),
shall be designed according to the exact theory of
elastic stability or empirically, based on verification
by tests.

7.6.6.2 For members carrying calculated bending stress

due to eccentricity of loading, applied end moments
and/or lateral loading, the lacing shall be proportioned
to resist the actual shear due to bending, in addition to
that specified in 7.6.6.1.

NOTE If the column section is subjectedto eccentricityor

other moments about an axis perpendicular to battens, the
battens and the column section should be specially designed
for such moments and shears.

7.6.6.3 The slenderness ratio, KIJr, of the lacing bars

shall not exceed 145. In bolted/riveted construction,
the effective length of lacing bars for the determination
of the design strength shall be taken as the length
between the inner end fastener of the bars for single
lacing, and as 0.7 of this length for double lacings
effectively connected
at intersections.
In welded

7.7.1.3 The battens shall be placed opposite to each

other at each end of the member and at points where
the member is stayed in its length and as far as
practicable, be spaced and proportioned
uniformly
throughout. The number of battens shall be such that
the member is divided into not less than three bays
50

IS 800:2007
within its actual length from centre-to-centre
connections.

Battens shall be of plates, angles, channels, or I-sections

and at their ends shall be riveted, bolted or welded to
the main components so as to resist simultaneously a
shear Vb = VIC/NS along the column axis and a moment
M = V,C12N at each connection,

of end

where

00;

001
001
001

v,
u
I
/
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

= transverse

shear force as defined above;

c=

distance between centre-to-centre

longitudinally;

N=

number of parallel planes of battens; and

s=

minimum transverse distance between the

centroid of the rivet/bolt group/welding
connecting
the batten
to the main
member.

of battens,

01
10 01

100[
100

7.7.2.2 Tie plates

!00!

Tie plates are members provided at the ends of battened

and laced members, and shall be designed by the same
method as battens. In no case shall a tie plate and its
fastenings be incapable of carrying the forces for which
the lacing or batten has been designed.

)0

io oi

100!

100

7.7.2.3 Size

------1----------------%
d-+

When plates are used for battens, the end battens and
those at points where the member is stayed in its length
shall have an effective depth, longitudinally, not less
than the perpendicular distance between the centroids
of the main members. The intermediate battens shall
have an effective depth of not less than three quarters
of this distance, but in no case shall the effective depth
of any batten be less than twice the width of one
member, in the plane of the battens. The effective depth
of a batten shall be taken as the longitudinal distance
between outermost bolts, rivets or welds at the ends.
The thickness of batten or the tie plates shall be not
less than one-fiftieth
of the distance between the
innermost connecting lines of rivets, bolts or welds,
perpendicular to the main member.

.{ir.--yip
_
______
--------______
I

FIG. 11 BATTENCOLUMNSECTION
7.7.1.4 The effective slenderness ratio (K!A-). of battened
columns, shall be taken as 1.1 times the (ILVr)o, the
maximum actual slenderness ratio of the column, to
account for shear deformation effects.

7.7.2.4 The requirement of bolt size and thickness of

batten specified above does not apply when angles,
channels or I-sections are used for battens with their legs
or flanges perpendicular to the main member. However,
it should be ensured that the ends of the compression
members are tied to achieve adequate rigidity.

7.7.2 Design of Battens

7.7.2.1 Battens
Battens shall be designed to carry the bending moments
and shear forces arising from transverse shear force V[
equal to 2.5 percent of the total axial force on the whole
compression member, at any point in the length of the
member, divided equally between parallel planes of
battens. Battened member carrying calculated bending
moment due to eccentricity of axial loading, calculated
end moments or lateral loads parallel to the plane of
battens, shall be designed to carry actual shear in
addition to the above shear. The main members shall
also be checked for the same shear force and bending
moments as for the battens.

7.7.3 Spacing of Battens

In battened compression members where the individual
members are not specifically checked for shear stress
and bending moments, the spacing of battens, centreto-centre of its end fastenings, shall be such that the
slenderness ratio (KZYr) of any component over that
distance shall be neither greater than 50 nor greater
than 0.7 times the slenderness ratio of the member as a
whole about its z-z (axis parallel to the battens).
51

IS 800:2007
7.7.4 Attachment

7.8.4.1 Compression
members connected by such
riveting, bolting or welding shall not be subjected to
transverse loading in a plane perpendicular
to the
riveted, bolted or welded surfaces.

to Main Members

7.7.4.1 Welded connections

Where tie or batten plates overlap the main members,
the amount of lap shall be not less than four times the
thickness of the plate. The length of weld connecting
each edge of the batten plate to the member shall, in
aggregate, be not less than half the depth of the batten
plate. At least one-third of the weld shall be placed at
each end of this edge. The length of weld and depth of
batten plate shall be measured along the longitudinal
axis of the main member.

7.8.5 Where the components are in contact back-toback, the spacing of the rivets, bolts or intermittent
welds shall not exceed the maximum spacing for
compression members given in (see Section 10).

DESIGN

In addition, the welding shall be returned along the

other two edges of the plates transversely to the axis
of the main member for a length not less than the
minimum lap specified above.
7.S Compression
Members
Components Back=to=Back

Composed

SECTION
8
OF MEMBERS SUBJECTEDTO
BENDING

8.1 General
Members subjected to predominant bending shall have
adequate design strength to resist bending moment,
shear force, and concentrated forces imposed upon and
their combinations, Further, the members shall satisfy
the deflection limitation presented in Section 5, as
serviceability
criteria,
Member subjected to other
forces in addition to bending or biaxial bending shall
be designed in accordance with Section 9.

of Two

7.8.1 Compression members composed of two angles,

channels, or tees back-to-back in contact or separated
by a small distance, shall be connected together by
riveting, bolting or welding so that the ratio of most
unfavorable
slenderness of each member between the
intermediate connections is not greater than 40 or 0.6
times the most unfavorable
ratio of slenderness of
the strut as a whole, whichever is less (see Section 10).

8.1.1 Effective Span of Beams

The effective span of a beam shall be taken as the
distance between the centre of the supports, except
where the point of application of the reaction is taken
as eccentric at the support, when it shall be permissible
to take the effective span as the length between the
assumed lines of the reactions.

7.8.2 In no case shall the ends of the strut be connected

together with less than two rivets or bolts or their
equivalent in welding, and there shall be not less than
two additional
connections
in between,
spaced
equidistant along the length of the strut. Where the
members are separated back-to-back, the rivets or bolts
through these connections shall pass through solid
washers or packing in between. Where the legs of the
connected angles or the connected tees are 125 mm
wide or more, or where webs of channels are 150 mm
wide or over, not less than two rivets or bolts shall be
used in each connection, one on line of each gauge
mark.

8.2 Design Strength

in Bending

(Flexure)

The design bending strength of beam, adequately

supported against lateral torsional buckling (laterally
supported beam) is governed by the yield stress
(see 8.2.1). When abeam is not adequately supported
against lateral buckling (laterally un-supported beams)
the design bending strength may be governed by lateral
torsional buckling strength (see 8.2.2).
The factored design moment, M at any section, in a
beam due to external actions, shall satisfy

7.8,3 Where these connections are made by welding,

solid packing shall be used to effect the jointing unless
the members are sufficiently close together to permit
direct welding, and the members shall be connected
by welding along both pairs of edges of the main
components.

M<M~
where
M~ = design bending strength of the section,
calculated as given in 8.2.1.2.

7.8.4 The rivets, bolts or welds in these connections

shall be sufficient to carry the shear force and moments,
if any, specified for battened struts (see 7.7.3), and in
no case shall the rivets or bolts be less than 16 mm
diameter for members upto and including 10 mm thick;
20 mm diameter for members upto and including
16 mm thick; and 22 mm diameter for members over
16 mm thick.

8.2.1 Laterally Supported

Beam

A beam may be assumed to be adequately supported

at the supports, provided the compression flange has
full lateral restraint and nominal torsional restraint at
supports supplied by web cleats, partial depth end
plates, fin plates or continuity with the adjacent span.
Full lateral restraint to compression flange may be
52

IS 800:2007
M~ = Mdv

assumed to exist if the frictional or other positive

restraint of a floor connection to the compression flange
of the member is capable of resisting a lateral force
not less than 2.5 percent of the maximum force in the
compression
flange of the member. This may be
considered to be uniformly distributed along the flange,
provided gravity loads constitute the dominant loading
on the member and the floor construction is capable
of resisting this lateral force.

where
Mdv = design bending strength under high shear as
defined in 9.2.
8.2.1.4 Holes in the tension zone
a)

The design bending strength of a section which is not

susceptible to web buckling under shear before yielding
(where dtw < 67&) shall be determined
according
to 8.2.1.2.
8.2.1.1 Section with webs susceptible
before yielding

The effect of holes in the tension flange, on

the design bending strength need not be
considered if
@nf /Agf)

f~fu

The bending moment and axial force acting

on the section maybe assumed to be resisted
by the whole section. In such a case, the web
shall be designed for combined shear and
normal stresses using simple elastic theory in
case of semi-compact webs and simple plastic
theory in the case of compact and plastic
webs.

= ratio of yield and ultimate

stress of the material, and
of partial
safety
factors against ultimate to
yield stress (see 5.4.1).

When the An~/A~, does not satisfy the above

requirement, the reduced effective flange area,
A#atisfying the above equation maybe taken
as the effective flange area in tension, instead
of A~r

8.2.1.2 When the factored design shear force does not

exceed 0.6 V~, where V~ is the design shear strength of
the cross-section (see 8.4), the design bending strength,
M~ shall be taken as:
d = &,zpfy

4mo ) / 0.9

Yml/YmO = ratio

yielding (titW <676), the design bending strength shall

be calculated using one of the following methods:

b)

(%,

Anf /A~~ = ratio of net to gross area of

the flange in tension,

When the flanges are plastic, compact or semi-compact

but the web is susceptible to shear buckling before

The bending moment and axial force acting

on the section maybe assumed to be resisted
by flanges only and the web is designed only
to resist shear (see 8.4).

W/f.)

where

to shear buckling

a)

b)

The effect of holes in the tension region of

the web on the design flexural strength need
not be considered,
if the limit given in (a)
above is satisfied for the complete tension
zone of the cross-section,
comprising
the
tension flange and tension region of the
web.

c)

Fastener holes in the compression zone of the

cross-section need not be considered in design
bending strength calculation,
except for
oversize and slotted holes or holes without
any fastener.

1 ?(.0

To avoid irreversible deformation under serviceability

loads, Md shall be less than 1.2 Z. fy /ymo incase of
simply supported and 1.5 Z<Yhy~o in cantilever beams;

8.2.1.5

Shear lag eflects

The shear lag effects in flanges may be disregarded

provided:

where
P,

= 1.0 for plastic and compact sections;

= Z#ZP for semi-compact sections;

1%
ZP, Z. = plastic and elastic section modulii of the
cross-section, respectively;
f,
~mO

For outstand elements (supported

edge), bOs LO/20; and

along one

b)

For internal elements

edges), bis LO/ 10.

along two

(supported

where

= yield stress of the material; and

=

a)

LO = length between points

(inflection) in the span,

partial safety factor (see 5.4.1).

of zero moment

bO = width of the flange with outstand, and

8.2.1.3 When the design shear force (factored), V

exceeds 0.6Vd, where V~ is the design shear strength of
the cross-section (see 8.4) the design bending strength,
Md shall be taken

bi

= width of the flange as an internal element.

Where these limits are exceeded, the effective width

of flange for design strength may be calculated using
53

IS 800:2007
specialist literature, or conservatively
satisfying the limit given above.
8.2.2 Luterally

Unsupported

taken as the value

corresponding
to elastic lateral buckling
moment (see 8.2.2.1 and Table 14).
8.2.2.1

Beams

In case of simply supported, prismatic members with

symmetric cross-section, the elastic lateral buckling
moment, MC, can be determined from:

Resistance to lateral torsional buckling need not be

checked separately (member may be treated as laterally
supported, see 8.2.1) in the following cases:
a)

Bending is about the minor axis of the section,

b)

Section is hollow
solid bars, and

c)

In case of major axis bending, 1~~ (as defined

herein) is less than 0.4.

(rectangular/

tubular)

Elastic lateral torsional buckling moment

or
Cr=m=bzpfcrb
~,,b of non-slender
rolled steel sections in the above
equation may be approximately
calculated from the
values given in Table 14, which has been prepared using
the following equation:

The design bending strength of laterally unsupported

beam as governed by lateral torsional buckling is given
by:
d = ~b pfbd
where
&

= 1.0 for plastic and compact sections.

= Z@P for semi-compact

sections.

The following simplified equation may be used in the

case of prismatic members made of standard rolled
I-sections and welded doubly symmetric I-sections,
for calculating the elastic lateral buckling moment,
MC,(see Table 14):

ZP,Z. = plastic section modulus and elastic section

to
extreme
modulus
with respect
compression tibre.
fbd

= design

bending
compressive
stress,
obtained as given below [see Tables 13(a)
and 13(b)]

fbd = XLTfy &O

XLT = bending

stress reduction factor to

account for lateral torisonal buckling,
given by:

where
1,

= torsional
section;

Iw

= warping constant;

constant

= ~ bi t?/3 for open

IY,,rY= moment of inertia and radius of gyration,

respectively about the weaker axis;
o,

= 0.5[l+~L.

cxLT,the imperfection

parameter

(~

0.2)

+A~2]

is given by:

ctL~ = 0.21 for rolled steel section

/+

h~

= centre-to-centre distance between flanges; and

tf

effective length for lateral torsional buckling

(see 8.3);

thickness

of the flange.

~LT = 0.49 fOr welded Steel section

The non-dimensional
by
a LT

slenderness

MC, for different beam sections, considering loading,

support condition, and non-symmetric section, shall
be more accurately calculated using the method given
in Annex E.

ratio, k~T, is given

=V
f,

8.3 Effective Length for Lateral

L, b

where

M,, = elastic critical

moment
calculated
accordance with 8.2.2.1, and
~,. b = extreme

fibre bending

compressive

Torsional

Buckling

8.3.1 For simply supported beams and girders of span

length, 1,, where no lateral restraint to the compression
flanges is provided, but where each end of the beam is
restrained against torsion, the effective length LL~ of
the lateral buckling to be used in 8.2.2.1 shall be taken
as in Table 15.

in
stress

54

Table 13(a) Design Bending

Compressive

Stress Corresponding

to Lateral

Buckling,

fM, a~~ = 0.21

(Clause 8.2.2)
f,
f.r,b

200

210

1000o

181.8

8000

181.8

6000

181.8

190.9

409.1

436.4

463.6

490.9

409.1

436.4

463.6

490.9

381.8

409.1

436.4

463.6

490.9

436.4

463.6

490.9

420

450

309.1

327.3

345.5

363,6

381.8

309.1

327.3

345,5

363.6

381.8

309.1

327.3

345.5

363.6

280

300

320

340

200

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

200

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

200

540

400

260

190.9

510

380

250

190.9

480

360

230

240

220

4000

181.8

190.9

200

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

309.1

327.3

345.5

363.6

381.8

409.1

2000

181.8

190.9

200

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.1

290.9

309.1

327.3

345.5

363.6

381.8

409. I

436.4

463.6

490.9

1000

169.1

179.5

186

196.5

202.9

209.1

219.8

229.1

245.5

261.8

275.1

291.3

300.5

323.6

332.2

355.9

370.9

384.8

412.4

900

169.1

179.5

186

194.5

200.7

204.5

215.1

231.6

242.7

258.9

272

291.3

300.5

316.4

328.4

339.5

366.5

380.2

392.7
387.8

212.7

224

240

258,9

268.9

284,7

293.6

301.8

324.5

335.5

349.1

370.9

202.3

208

226.5

237.3

250.2

259.6

278,2

286.7

294.5

305.5

327.3

340.4

352.4

363.3

197.7

203.3

218.9

226.4

244.4

253.5

261.8

276,4

287.3

294

306.8

322.9

333.8

343.6

185.5

188.6

200.9

208.7

218.2

232.7

244.2

248.7

259.1

269.1

274.9

286.4

296.7

301.4

314.2

173.5

183.3

186.4

191.5

206.2

215.5

224

231.8

242.2

248.7

258.2

263.5

274.1

279.3

292.1

294.5

169.4

174.5

184.1

186.7

196

204.5

215.3

222.5

229.1

238.4

243.6

248.2

257.7

261,8

264.3

274.9

165.2

170.2

172.7

179.6

188.4

193.6

200.7

210.2

212.7

221,1

225.5

229.1

233.2

240

241.1

245.5

154.7

161.5

163.6

167.8

175.6

182.7

186.2

194.7

196.4

196.9

203.6

206.2

212.7

213.8

217.9

220.9

144.3

148.4

152.3

153.6

160.4

163.6

165.8

170

173.5

179.6

178.2

179.5

184.1

183.3

185.5

191.5

134.7

137.5

141.8

142.5

145.3

147.3

148.5

149.1

152.7

151.4

152.7

153

157.1

800

167.3

177.5

184

190.3

196.4

206.8

700

163.6

171.8

182

188.2

192

600

161.8

168

176

181,9

194.2

500

161.8

166.1

172

179.8

450

158.2

164.2

168

400

150.9

162.3

166

350

147.3

152.7

162

300

143.6

147

152

250

134.5

137.5

142

200

121.8

124.1

126

129.6

130.9

134.1

150

101.8

103.1

104

104.5

106.9

106.8

108.7

109.5

111.8

113.5

114.4

114.5

117.5

116.4

118.4

118.6

117.8

120.5

122.7

100

74.5

76.4

76

77.4

76.4

77.3

78

78.9

79.1

78.5

80.4

81.8

79.5

80

80.2

81.8

82,9

83.5

83.5

90

67.3

68.7

70

69

69.8

70.5

70.9

71.3

70.9

72.7

74.2

72

72.5

72.7

72.5

73.6

74.2

74.2

73.6

64.9

65.5

65.6

65.5

64.9

65.5

65.5

64.9

68.7

80

61.8

63

62

62.7

63.3

63.6

63.8

63.6

65.5

64

70

54.5

55.4

56

56.5

56.7

56.8

56.7

56

57.3

58.2

58.7

58.9

58.7

58.2

57.3

57.3

56.7

60.3

58.9

60

47.3

47.7

48

48. I

48

50

49.6

48.4

49.1

49.5

49.5

49.1

48.4

50.9

49.6

49.1

52.4

51

49.1

50

40

40.1

40

41.8

41.5

40.9

40.2

40.7

40.9

40.7

43.3

42,5

41.5

43.6

42

40.9

43.6

41.7

44.2

40

32.7

32.5

32

33.5

32.7

34.1

33.1

33.1

32.7

34.9

34

32,7

34.5

32.7

34.4

32.7

34.9

32.5

34.4

30

25.5

24.8

26

25.1

26.2

25

26

25.5

24.5

26.2

24.7

26.2

24.2

25.5

26.7

24.5

26.2

27.8

24.5

20

16.4

17.2

18

16.7

17.5

18.2

16.5

17.8

16.4

17.5

18.5

16.4

17.3

18.2

19.1

16.4

17.5

18.5

19.6

10

9.1

9.5

8.4

8.7

9.1

9.5

7.6

8.2

8.7

9.3

9.8

10.4

7.3

7.6

8.2

8.7

9.3

9.8

G
m
o
0
..
N

o
0
-a

Table 13(b) Design Bending

Compressive

Stress Corresponding

to Lateral

Buckling,

~~, a~~ = 0.49

(Clause 8.2.2)
I

1
f,

fcr,b

200

230

240

250

260

280

300

320

340

360

380

400

420

450

480

510

540

181.8

190.9

200.0

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

309.1

327.3

345.5

363.6

381.8

409.1

436.4

463.6

490.9

8000
.
6000
. .

181.8

190.9

200.0

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

309.1

327.3

345.5

363.6

381.8

409.1

436.4

463.6

490.9

181.8

190,9

200.0

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

345.5

363,6

381.8

409.1

436.4

463.6

490.9

4000
181.8
.
.
181.8
2000
. . ..
160.0
. 1000 ...

190.9

200.0

209.1

218.2

227,3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

309.1

327.3

345.5

363.6

381.8

409.1

436.4

463.6

490.9

190.9

200.0

209.1

218.2

227.3

236.4

254.5

272.7

290.9

309.1

327.3

345.5

363.6

381.8

409.1

436.4

463.6

490,9

247.3

255.3

266.0

280

290.2

302.7

318.5

329.2

343.6

238.0

252.0

262.5

269.1

282.5

290.5

305.5

319,9

333.8
319.1

290.9

309.1

327,3

164.2

170.0

179.8

185.5

190.9

196.2

211.3

220.9

235.6

164,2

170.0

173.5

183.3

188.6

193.8

203.6

218.2

226.9

171.5

176.7

181.8

191.5

201.1

210.0

224.0

234.9

242.2

252.2

258.2

271.1

282.3

296.7

306

169.4

172.4

177.3

182.0

196

207.3

215.3

222.5

232.4

238.4

247.3

259.6

270

279.3

292.1

304.4

168.0

172.7

177.3

188.4

193.6

203.6

213.3

222.5

228

236.4

244.4

253.6

261.8

273.5

274.9

200,9

206,2

214.2

218.2

225.3

229.1

240

245.7

250,4

220.9

231.3

236.5

235.6

900

154.5

. 800
700

152.7

158.5

168.0

150.9

154.6

160.0

600

145.5

150,8

154.0

161.0

500

140.0

145,1

150.0

154.7

159.3

161.4

167.8

175.6

185.5

192

450

134.5

141.3

144.0

148.5

152.7

156.8

160.7

168

177.3

186.2

191.6

196,4

203.8

210.9

213.8

4&

129.1

135.5

138.0

142.2

148.4

150

153.6

162.9

169.1

174,5

182.4

183.3

193.5

196.4

202.4

208.6

209.5

217.9

220.9

350

123.6

129.8

132.0

135.9

139.6

143.2

148.9

152.7

158.2

162.9

170

173.5

176.2

181.8

183.3

192.3

196.4

199.4

206.2

300

118.2

122.2

126.0

129.6

130.9

134.1

137.1

142.5

147.3

154.2

157.6

157.1

162.4

167.3

168

175.9

178.9

1808

181.6

. 250
.
200

109.1

112.6

116.0

117.1

120.0

122.7

125.3

129.8

130.9

136.7

139.1

140.7

145.1

149.1

148.9

151.4

152.7

157.6

157.1

98.2

101.2

102.0

104.5

104.7

109.1

108.7

112

117.3

119.3

120.5

121.1

124.4

127.3

126

130.9

130.9

129.8

132.5

150

83.6

84.0

86.0

87.8

89.5

88.6

89.8

91.6

95.5

96.0

95.8

98.2

100.2

101.8

103.1

102.3

104.7

106.6

103.1

100

63.6

63.0

64.0

64.8

65.5

65.9

66.2

68.7

68.2

69.8

71.1

68.7

69.1

72.7

72.5

73.6

74.2

74.2

73.6

. 90 . .
80

58.2

57.3

60.0

58.5

61.1

61.4

61.5

61.1

62.7

64.0

64.9

65.5

65.6

65.5

64.9

65.5

65.5

64.9

68.7

52.7

53.5

54.0

54.4

54.5

54.5

54.4

56

57.3

58.2

58.7

58.9

58.7

58.2

61.1

61.4

61.1

60.3

58.9

70

47.3

47.7

48.0

48.1

48.0

50.0

49.6

50.9

49.1

49.5

52.5

52.4

51.8

50.9

53.5

53.2

52.4

55.6

54.0

60

41.8

42.0

42.0

41.8

43.6

43,2

42.5

43.3

43.6

43.6

43.3

45.8

44.9

47.3

45.8

45.0

48.0

46.4

49.1

50

36.4

36.3

36.0

35.5

37.1

36.4

37.8

38.2

38.2

37.8

37.1

39.3

38.0

40.0

38.2

40.9

39.3

37.1

39.3

.. 40
..
30

29.1

30.5

30.0

29.3

30.5

29.5

30.7

30.5

30.0

32.0

30.9

32.7

31.1

32.7

30.5

32.7

30.5

32.5

34.4

23.6

22.9

22.0

23.0

24.0

22.7

23.6

22.9

24.5

23.3

24.7

22.9

24.2

25.5

22.9

24.5

26.2

23.2

24.5

16.4

I5.3

16.0

16.7

I5.3

15.9

16.5

15.3

16.4

17.5

15.5

16.4

17.3

18.2

15.3

16.4

17.5

18.5

14.7

9. I

7.6

8.0

8.4

8.7

9.1

9.5

7.6

8.2

8.7

9.3

9.8

6.9

7.3

7.6

8.2

8.7

9.3

9.8

. .20 .
10

220

10000

210

G
00
=
..
&
s
4

Table 14 Critical

Stress,JC,, b

JClause 8.2.2.1)
1

I
ll/tf

KLlr
8

12

16

14

18

20

10

22551.2

22255.1

22092.6

21994.1

21929.8

21885.7

20

6220.5

5947.9

5794.5

5700.0

5637.8

5594.7

5563.8

25

30

ZcI

35

80

60

217791o

I 21763.1

I 21752.7

21740.5

I 21733.8

5515.8

5489.7

5473.8

5463.5

5444.8

1 21727.2
5438.2

1=

! 21724.2

30

3149.3

2905.9

2764.6

2676.0

2616.7

2575.3

2545.3

2498.5

2472.8

2457.1

2447.0

2428.3

2421.7

2418.6

40

2036.1

1821.2

1693.0

I 610.8

1555.1

1515.8

1487.0

I 441.7

1416.5

1401.1

1391.0

1379.0

1372.5

1365.9

1362.8

50

1492.9

1303.2

I 187,3

1111.8

1059.9

1022.7

912.0

902.0

890.2

883.7

877.1

874.2

624.7

618.2

611.7

608.7

458.0

451.7

448.7

1 OQ9.5

1178.0

905.0

787.4

835.6

995.3

752.4

951.7

726.4

684.6

927.1
660.9

636.4

646.1

70

973.9

823.2

728.5

664.8

620.1

587.4

562.9

522.9

500.0

485.5

476.0

464.4

80

831.3

695.4

609.2

550.7

509.1

478.4

455.3

417.2

395.1

381.2

371.8

360.5

354.1

347.7

344.7

90

725.9

602.6

523.6

469.5

430.9

402.2

380.4

344.2

322.9

309.3

300.2

289.1

282.8

276.5

273,5

100

644.7

532.0

459.3

409,3

373.2

346.4

325.8

291.4

270.9

257.7

248.8

237.9

231.8

225.5

222.5

110
120
130

580.4
527.9
484.3

476.6
431.9
395.0

409.3
369.5
3% 9 I,
---

362.9
326.0
7CK1T----,

329.2
303.9
294.5
270.7
76:;
----- 1
, 244-. . ... I,

284.5
252.3
7767
I,
----

251.8
221.2
1971
I,
----

232.1
202.4
179o
i1
----

219.3
190.1

210.8
181.6

200.1
171.2

194.0
165.2

187.8
159.I

184,8
156.2

167.1

158.8

148.6

142.8

136.7

133.9

140

447.6

364.2

309.5

271.5

243.4

222.3

205.8

177.5

160.2

148.7

140.7

130.8

125.0

119.0

116.2

126.0

116.3

110.6

104.7

101.9

98.8

93.0

90.1

89.0
80.7
73.7
67.8
62.6
58.1
54.1
50.6
47.5
44.:8 I

83.2
75.0
68.1
62.2
57.1
52.7
48.8
45.4
42.4

80.4
72.3

42.2

37.3

150

416.0

337.8

286.6

250.6

224.2

204.2

188.4

161.5

144.8

133.7

160

388.7

315.2

266.8

232.8

207.8

188.8

173.9

148.2

132.0

121.3

113.9

104.3

170

364.9

295.4

249.6

217.5

193.7

175.6

161.4

136.7

121.3

180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270

343.9
325.2
308.3
293.3
279.5
267.1
255.8
245.3
235.7
226.8

278.0
262.6
248.8
236.5
225.3
215.2
205.8
197.3
189.5
182.3

234.6
221.3
209.6
198.9
189.3
180.7
172.8
165.6
159.0
152.8

204.1
192.3
181.7
172.4
163.9
156.3
149.4
143.0
137.3
131.9

181.5
170.7
161.2
152.7
145.1
138.2
132.0
126.3
121.1
116.3

164.2
154.2
145.4
137.6
130.6
124.3
118.6
113.4
108.7
104.3

150.6
141.2
133.0
125.7
119.1
113.3
108.0
103.2
98.8
94.7

127.1
118.6
111.3
104.8
99.0
93.9
89.3
85.1
81.3
77...91

112.2
104.3
97.5
91.5
86.2
81.5
77.2
73.5
70.1
670
.,. . II

111.0
102.2
94.6
88.1
82.4
77.4
72.9
69.0
65.5
62.3

103.6
95.2
87.8
81.4
75.9
71.2
66.9
63.1
59.7
56.7

94.4
86.0
79.0
72.8
67.5
62.9
58.9
55.3
52.1
49.3

126.9

111.9

100.2

91.1

74.7

122.3

107.8

118.1

104.1

280

290
.--- ....
300

218.6

210.9
203.8

169.4
163.7

147.2

175.7

141.9
137.1

%.6
93.2

87.7
84.5

71..8

64.1
615
----

69.1

59.1

594 .
-..

I
I

53.9

56.8

51.5

5A 1
---1
52.1

47.1

49.2

46.8

rt

44.4
1

42.2

40.4

40.0
1

38.1

36.2

39.7

65.3
59.5
54.5
50.1
46.2
42.8

33.2

31.5

39.8
I

37.2

34.8

I
I

35.2
t

5435.1

+ 5451.4
2434.9

60

10

32.7
!

30.8

29.0

..
~
o

-1

IS 800:2007
Insitnply supported beams with intermediate lateral
restraints against lateral torsional buckling, the effective
length for lateral torsional
buckling
to be used
in 8.2.2.1, ~~ shall be taken as the length of the relevant
segment in between the lateral restraints. The effective
length shall be equal to 1.2 times the length of the
relevant segment in between the lateral restraints.

at that point, relative to the end supports.

The
intermediate
lateral restraints
should be either
connected to an appropriate bracing system capable
of transferring the restraint force to the effective lateral
support at the ends of the member, or should be
connected to an independent robust part of the structure
capable of transferring the restraint force. Two or more
parallel member requiring such lateral restraint shall
not be simply connected together assuming mutual
dependence for the lateral restraint.

Restraint against torsional rotation at supports in these

beams may be provided by:
a)

web or flange cleats, or

b)

bearing stiffeners acting in conjunction

the bearing of the beam, or

c)

lateral end frames or external

supports
providing lateral restraint to the compression
flanges at the ends, or

d)

their being built into walls.

The intermediate lateral restraints should be connected

to the member as close to the compression flange as
practicable.
Such restraints should be closer to the
shear centre of the compression flange than to the shear
centre of the section. However, if torsional restraint
preventing relative rotation between the two flanges is
provided, the intermediate
lateral restraint may be
connected at any appropriate level.

with

8.3.2 For beams,

which are provided with members

giving effective lateral restraint to the compression
flange at intervals along the span, in addition to the
end torsional restraint required in 8.3.1, the effective
length for Iateral torsional buckIing shall be taken as
the distance, centre-to-centre of the restraint members
in the relevant segment under normal loading condhion
and 1.2 times this distance, where the load is not acting
on the beam at the shear and is acting towards the shear
centre so as to have destabilizing effect during lateral
torsional buckling deformation.

For beams which are provided with members giving

effective lateral restraint at intervals along the span,
the effective lateral restraint shall be capable of resisting
a force of 2.5 percent of the maximum force in the
compression flange taken as divided equally between
the points at which the restraint members are provided.
Further, each restraint point should be capable of
resisting 1 percent of the maximum force in the
compression flange.
8.3.4.1 In a series of such beams, with solid webs,
which are connected together by the same system of
restraint members, the sum of the restraining forces
required shall be taken as 2.5 percent of the maximum
flange force in one beam only,

8.3.3 For cantilever beams of projecting length L, the

effective length .L~Tto be used in 8.2.2.1 shall be taken
as in Table 16 for different support conditions.
8.3.4 Where a member is provided intermediate lateral
supports to improve the lateral buckling strength, these
restraints should have sufficient strength and stiffness
to prevent lateral movement of the compression flange
Table 15

Effective

Length

8.3.4.2 In the case of a series of latticed beams, girders

or roof trusses which are connected together by the same
system of restraint members, the sum of the restraining

for Simply Supported

Beams, L~T

(Clause 8.3. 1)
SI

Conditions

No.

Loading Condition

of Restraint at Supports

>

TorsionalRestraint

WarpingRestraint

(2)

(3)

(1)
i)
ii)
iii)

iv)
v)

vi)
vii)

Destabilizing
(4)

(5)

Fullyrestrained

Both flangesfullyrestrained

Fully restrained
Fully restrained
Fully restrained
Fully restrained
Partially restrained by bottom flange
support connection
Partially restrained by bottom flange
bearing support

Compression flange fully restrained

Both flanges fully restrained
Compressicmflange partially restrained
Warping not reslrdined in both flanges
Warping not restrained in both flanges

0.70 L
0.75 L
0.80 L
0.85 L
1.00 L

0.85 L
0.90 L
0.95 L

1.0 L+2D

1.2L+2D

Warping not restrained in both flanges

1.2 L+2D

1.4 L+2D

NOTES
1 Torsionalrestraintpreventsrotationaboutthe longitudinalaxis.
2 Warpingrestraintpreventsrotationof the flange in its plane.
3 D is the overall depth of the beam.
58

1.00L
1.20L

IS 800:2007
Minor Axis Bending:

forces required shall be taken as 2.5 percent of the

maximum force in the compression flange plus 1.25
percent of this force for every member of the series other
than the first, up to a maximum total of 7.5 percent.

Hot-Rolled
Rectangular

8.3.5 Purlins adequately restrained by sheeting need

not be normally checked for the restraining forces
required by rafters, roof trusses or portal frames that
carry predominately
roof loads provided there is
bracing of adequate stiffness in the plane of rafters or
roof sheeting which is capable of acting as a stressed
skin diaphragm.

or Welded

2b t~

hollow sections of uniform thickness:

Loaded parallel to depth (h)

A h I (b + h)

Loaded parallel to width (b)

A b i (b + h)

Circular hollow tubes of uniform thickness 2 A I n

A

Plates and solid bars

where
A=

cross-section

b=

overall breadth of tubular section, breadth

of I-section flanges,

d=

clear depth of the web between flanges,

of support to the tension (top) flange in the hogging

moment region on lateral restraint to the compression
flange may be considered as per specialist literature.

h=

overall depth of the section,

8.4 Shear

NOTE Fastener holes need not be accounted for in plastic

8.3.6 In case of beams with double curvature bending,

adequate direct lateral support to the compression
flange in the hogging moment region maybe provided
as given above for simply supported beam. The effect

area,

tf

= thickness of the flange, and

tw

= thickness of the web.

design shear strength calculation provided that:

The factored design shear force, V, in a beam due to

external actions shaIl satisfy
v<

If A,ndoes not satisfy the above condition, the effective shear

area may be taken as that satisfying the above limit. Block
shear failure criteria may be verified at the end connections.
Section 9 maybe referred to for design strength under combined
high shear and bending.

v,,

where
V~ = design strength
=

v / ymo

8.4.2 Resistance

where
7.,0 = partial safetY factor
(see 5.4.1).

against

8.4.2.1 Resistance to shear buckling

as specified, when

shear failure

shall be verified

d ~ > 67e for a web without stiffeners, and

/ w

The nominal shear strength of a cross-section, Vn,may

be governed by plastic shear resistance (see 8.4.1) or
strength of the web as governed by shear buckling
(see 8.4.2).
8.4.1 The nominal plastic shear resistance
shear is given by:

to Shear Buckling

> 67E ~
r

under pure

for a web with stiffeners

where
K,

= shear buckling coefficient (see 8.4.2.2), and

Vn= Vp
& = ~250\

fy

where
8.4.2.2 Shear buckling design methods
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of webs with or without
intermediate stiffeners as governed by buckling may
be evaluated using one of the following methods:

Y
Av

= shear area, and

a)

jYW = yield strength of the web.

8.4.1.1 The shear area may be calculated as given below:
I and channel sections:
Major Axis Bending:
Hot-Rolled

htW

Welded

dtW

Simple post-critical
method The simple
post critical method, based on the shear
buckling strength can be used for webs of Isection girders, with or without intermediate
transverse stiffener, provided that the web has
transverse stiffeners at the supports.
The
nominal shem strength is given by:
Vn= Vcr

59

IS 800:2007
where

where

Vc, = shear force corresponding

buckling

to web

cb = buckling strength, as obtained from

8.4.2.2(a)

= Av~~

f,

where
11 = shear stress corresponding to web
buckling, determined as follows:
1) when

~Ws 0.8

Tb=&w/h

[f

yw -3T;

+y1]05 -l//

~.

1.5 r~ sin 2$

($=

inclination

of the tension

field

= ()

2) when 0.8< AWC 1.2

7,=

yield strength of the tension field

obtained from

tan-~
c

[1-0.8(AW -0.8)] (~YW/fi)

Wtf = the width of the tension field, given

by:
d cos~ + (c SC SJ sin @

where
Aw = non-dimensional
ratio for shear
given by:

tCr,e =

fyw :

yield stress of the web

d=

depth of the web

web slenderness
buckling stress,

= spacing of stiffeners in the web

b = shear stress corresponding

buckling of web 8.4.2.2(a)

Sc, s, = anchorage lengths of tension field

along the compression and tension
flange respectively, obtained from:

the elastic critical shear stress of the

K, n E
eb=

0.5

M,,
2
s=

sin@ fyw tw
[

12(1 -/.)[dAw~w~

where
Poissons ratio, and
P=
K, = 5.35 when transverse stiffeners are
provided only at supports
= 4.0 + 5.35 /(c/d)2 for cld <1.0

M~, = reduced plastic moment capacity of

the respective
flange
plate
(disregarding any edge stiffener)
after accounting for the axial force,
Nf in the flange, due to overall
bending and any external axial
force in the cross-section,
and is
calculated as:

where c, d are the spacing of

transverse stiffeners and depth of
the web, respectively.
Tension field method The tension field
method, based on the post-shear buckling
strength,
may be used for webs with
intermediate transverse stiffeners, in addition
to the transverse stiffeners at supports, provided
the panels adjacent to the panel under tension
field action, or the end posts provide anchorage
for the tension fields and if cld 21.0, where c,
d are the spacing of transverse stiffeners and
depth of the web, respectively.

Mfr =0.25b, t,2

,fyf[]
-{ivI/(b,
~lfyl/ymo)}2]
where
bf, t~ = width and thickness of the relevant
flange respectively
fyf = yield stress of the flange
8.5 Stiffened

In the tension field method, the nominal shear

resistance, Vn, is given by:
v = Vtf

rb +0.9w,,

Web Panels

8.5.1 End Panels Design (see Fig. 12)

The design of end panels in girders
panel (panel A) is designed using
shall be carried in accordance with
herein. In this case the end panel

where
J(, =[4

1<c

where

= 5.35 + 4.0 /(c/d)z for cld 21.0

b)

to

tW~vsin @]< VP
60

in which the interior

tension field action
the provisions given
should be designed

Table 16 Effective

Length,

..._ .,__

L1,T for Cantilever

(Clause 8.3.3)

rOp restraint conditions

61

----

of Length,

IS 800:2007
using only simple
to 8.4.2.2(a).

post critical

method,

8.5.3 Anchor Forces

according

The resultant longitudinal shear, R,~, and a moment kf,~

from the anchor of tension field forces are evaluated
as given below:

Additionally, the end panel along with the stiffeners

should be checked as a beam spanning between the
flanges to resist a shear force, R,f and a moment, M,f
due to tension tleld forces as given in 8.5.3. Further,
end stiffener should be capable of resisting the reaction
plus a compressive force due to the moment, equal to
M,j (see Fig. 12).
8.5.2 End Panels Designed
(see Fig. 13 and Fig. 14)

where

(1

Using Tension Field Action

1/2

Hq = I.zsvp 1~

The design of end panels in girders, which are designed

using tension field action shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions mentioned herein. In
this case, the end panel (Panel B) shall be designed
according to 8.4.2.2(b).

= web depth

If the actual

factored

shear

force,

Additionally it should be provided with an end post

consisting of a single or double stiffener (see Fig. 13
and Fig. 14), satisfying the following:

of H~ may be reduced by the ratio

a)

Single s~iflener (see Fig. 13) The top of

the end post should be rigidly connected to
the flange using full streng~h welds.

Cr

V,f = the basic shear

utilizing tension
8.4.2.2(b), and

strength
for the panel
field action as given in

Vcr = critical shear strength for the panel designed

utilizing tension field
action as given
in 8.4.2.2(a).
8.5.4 Panels with Openings Panels with opening of
dimension greater than 10 percent of the minimum
panel dimension should be designed without using
tension field action as given in 8.4.2.2(b). The adjacent
panels should be designed as an end panel as given in
8.5.1 or 8.5.2, as appropriate.

Doulde sf@er
(see Fig. 14) The end post
should be checked as abeam spanning between
the flanges of the girder and capable of resisting
a shear force R,~ and a moment, Mt~due to the
tension field forces as given in 8.5.3.

BEARING
STIFFENER

v L,
v,~_ v

where

The end post should be capable of resisting

the reaction plus a moment from the anchor
forces equal to 2/3 M,~ due to tension field
forces, where M,f is obtained from 8.5.3, The
width and thickness of the end post are not
to exceed the width and thickness of the
ilange.
b)

V in the panel

designed using tension field approach is less than the

shear strength, VtFasgiven in 8.4.2.2(b), then the values

PANEL A

PANEL B

:<

~1

,~

NOTES
1 Panel A is designed utilizing tension field action as given in 8.4.2.2(b).
2 Panel II is designed without utilizing tension field action as given in tMWa).
3 Bearing stiffener is designed for the compressive force due to bearing plus compressive force due to the moment M,, as
given in 8.5.3.

FIG. 12 END PANELDESIGNEDNOT USING TENSION FIELD ACTION

fj~

IS 800:2007

k-

1-

j
7

BEARING
STIFFENER AND
END POST
/

PANEL A

PANEL A

7
1!

NOTES
1 Panel A is designed utilizi~g tension field action as given in 8.4.2.2(b).
2 Panel B is designed utilizing tension field action as given in 8.4,2.2(b).
3 Bearing stiffener and end post is designed for combinationof compressiveloads due to bearing and a moment equal to 2/3 M,t m
given in 8.5.3.

FIG. 13

END PANEL DESIGNED USING TENSION FIELD ACTION (SINGLE STIFFENER)

END POST
i

,
~

T
BEARING
STIFFENER

PANEL A

PANEL A

w///I

NOTES
1 Panel A is designed utilizing tension field action as given in 8.%2.2(b).
2 Bearing stiffener is designed for compressive force due to hewing as given in 8.4.2.2(a).
3 End post is designed for horizontal shear R,, and moment M,, as given in 8.5.3.

FIG. 14 END PANEL DESIGNED USING TENSION FIELD ACTION (DOUBLH STIFFENER)
8.6 Design of Beams and Plate Girders
Webs

longitudinal

with Solid

1)

4<200
.

8.6.1 Minimum Web Thickness

&

lW

The thickness of the web in a section shall satisfy the

following requirements:
8.6.1.1 Serviceability
a)

2)

requirement

When transverse

rw

3)

both longitudinal

one longitudinal
b)

to flanges along

when c < d
4.s

270Ew

tw

edges)

< ~ 90E (web connected

[W

when 0.74 d< c c d

.E < m)&w

stiffeners are not provided,

~ < 200c (web connected

rw

edges),

when3d2c2d

4)
to flanges along

c)

edge only),

When only transverse stiffeners are provided

(in webs connected to flanges along both
63

when c > 3d, the web shall be considered

as unstiffened,

When transverse stiffeners and longitudinal

stiffeners at one level only are provided
(0.2 d from compression flange) according
to 8.7.13 (a)

IS 800:2007
1)

when 2.U > c > d

fYr = yield stress

flange.

of compression

8.6.2 Sectional Properties

~)

when 0.74 d<c

zs
(u

3)

d)

<d

8.6.2.1 The effective sectional area of compression

flanges shall be the gross area with deductions for
excessive width of plates as specified for compression
members ( ree Section 7) and for open holes occurring
in a plane perpendicular to the direction of stress at
the section being considered (see 8.2.1.4).

250 f%,

when c <0.74

When a second longitudinal

:it neutral axis is provided)

The effective sectional area of tension flanges shall be

the gross sectional area with deductions for holes as
specified in 8.2.1.4.

stiffener (located

The effective sectional area for parts in shear shall be

tAen as specified in 8.4.1.1.

d
5:400Ew
lW

8.6.3 Flanges
8.6.3.1 In riveted or bolted construction, flange angles
shall form as large a part of the area of the flange as
practicable (preferably not less than one-third) and the
number of flange plates shall be kept to a minimum.

dqrthOf the web,

thickness

of the web,

spacing of transverse stiffener

(.s[/[~Fig. 12 :md Fig. 13),
yield stress ratio of web=

1n exposed situations, where flange angles are used, at

least onc plate of the top flange shall extend over the
full length of the girder, unless the top edge of the web
is machined flush with the flange angles. Where two
or more flange plates are used, tacking rivets shall be
provided, if necessary to comply with the requirements
of Section 10,

.
~fl .
[--./:fi

and
yield stress of the web.
8.6.1.2 Compr[ssion flange buckling requirement

Each flange plate shall extend beyond its theoretical

cut-off point, and the extension shall contain sufficient
rivets, bolts or welds to develop in the plate, the load
calculated for the bending moment on the girder section
(taken to include the curtailed plate) at the theoretical
cut-off point.

[n order m avoid buckling of the compression flange into

Ihe web, the web thickness shall satisfy the following:
a)

When transverse

stiffeners are not provided

b)

When transverse

stiffeners are provided and

1)

whenc21.5d

2)

when c < 1.5d

The outstand of flange plates, that is the projection

beyond the outer line of connections to flange angles,
channel or joist flanges or in the case of welded
constructions their projection beyond the face of the
web or tongue plate, shall not exceed the values given
in 3.7.2 (see Table 2).
In the case of box girders, the thickness of any plate,
or the aggregate thickness of two or more plates, when
these plates are tacked together to form the flange, shall
satisfy the requirements given in 3.7.2 (see Tldble 2).

where
d

= depth of the web,

tw

= thickness

= spacing

E,

= yield stress ratio of web=

8.6.3.2

Flange splices should preferably, not be located at

points of maximum stress. Where splice plates are
used, their area shall be not less than 5 percent in excess
of the area of the flange element spliced; their centre
of gravity shall coincide, as nearly as possible, with
that of the element spliced. There shall be enough bolts,
rivets or welds on each side of the splice to develop

of the web,

of transverse stiffenel
(see Fig. 12 and Fig. 13),

250

f)1

and

Flange splices

64

IS 800:2007
augment the strength of the web, they shall be placed
on each side of the web and shall be equal in thickness.
The proportion of shear force assumed to be resisted
by these plates shall be limited by the amount of
horizontal shear which they can transmit to the flanges
through their fastenings, and such reinforcing plates
and their fastenings shall be carried up to the points
at which the flange without the additional plates is
adequate.

the 10xI in the element spliced plus 5 percent but in no

case should the strength developed be less than 50
percent ofthe effective strength of the material spliced.
In welded construction, flange plates shall be joined
by complete penetration butt welds, wherever possible.
These butt welds shall develop the full strength of the
plates.
8.6.3.3

Connection

offianges

to web

The flanges of plate girders shall be connected to the

web by sufficient rivets, bolts or welds to transmit the
maximum horizontal shear force resulting from the
bending moment gradient in the girder, combined with
any vertical loads which are directly applied to the
flange. If the web is designed using tension field
method as given in 8.4.2.2 (b), the weld should be able
to transfer the tension freld stress, jywacting on the
web,
8.6.3.4

Bolted/Riveted

8.7 Stiffener
8.7.1 General

8.7.1.1 When the web of a member acting alone (that

is without stiffeners) proves inadequate, stiffeners for
meeting
the following
requirements
should be
provided:

Webs

8.6.4.1 Effective sectional

b)

Load carrying stiflener To prevent local

buckling
of
the
web
due
to
concentrated loading (see 8.7.3 and 8.7.5).

c)

Bearing stl~ener To prevent local crushing

of the web due to concentrated
loading
(see 8.7.4 and 8.7.6).

d)

Torsion stiflener To provide torsional

restraint to beams and girders at supports
(see 8.7.9).

e)

Diagonal
stiffener
To provide local
reinforcement
to a web under shear and
bearing (see 8.7.7).

f)

Tension strencr To transmit tensile forces

applied to a web through a flange (see 8.7.8).

area of web of plate girder

The effective cross-sectional area shall be taken as the

full depth of the web plate multiplied by the thickness.

The some stiffeners may perform more than one

function and their design should comply with the
requirements of all the functions for which designed.

~()r~ Where webs are varied in thickness in Lhedepth of

the section by the ase of tongue plates or the like, or where the
pt-opcrrtiunof the web included in the flange area is 25 percent
or more of the overall depth, the above approximation is not
pcnnissib]c and the maximum shear stress shall be computed
on theory,

8.7.1.2 O[ltstand of web sti~eners

Unless the outer edge is continuously stiffened, the
outstand from the face of the web should not exceed

8.6.4.2 Splice,v in vvebs

2ot,,E.

Splices and cutouts for service ducts in the webs should

prefembly not be located at points of maximum shear
force and heavy concentrated loads.

When the outstand of web is between 14tqE and 20t&

then the stiffener design should be on the basis of a
core section with an outstand of 14t~&,where tqis the
thickness of the stiffener.

Splices in the webs of the plate girders and rolled

sections shall be designed to resist the shears and
moments at the spliced section (see Annex F).

8.7.1.3 St(~~bearing length

In riveted or bolted construction, splice plates shall be

provided
on each side of the web. In welded
construction, web splices shall preferably be made with
complete penetration butt welds.
8.6.4.3

intermediate tramverse web st~fener TO

improve the buckling strength of a slender
web due to shear (see 8.7.2).

Welded construction

The gap between the web plates and flange plates shall
be kept to a minimum and for fillet welds shall not
exceed 1 mm at any point before welding.
8.6.4

a)

construction

For girders in exposed situations and which do not have

flange plates for their entire length, the top edge of the
web plate shall be flush with or above the angles, and
the bottom edge of the web plate shall be flush with or
set back from the angles.
8.6.3.5

Where

additional

Design

plates

are required

The stiff bearing length of any element b,, is that length

which cannot deform appreciably
in bending.
To
determine b], the dispersion of load through a steel bearing
element should be taken as 45 through solid material,
such as bearing plates, flange plates, etc (see Fig. 15).

to

65

IS 800:2007
8.7.1.4 Eccentricity

where

Where a load or reaction is applied eccentric to the

centreline of the web or where the centroid of the
stiffener does not lie on the centreline of the web, the
resulting eccentricity of loading should be accounted
for in the design of the stiffener.
8.7.1.5 Buckling resistance

L= length of the stiffener.

If the load or reaction is applied to the flange by a
compression
member, then unless effective lateral
restraint is provided at that point, the stiffener should
be designed as part of the compression
member
applying the load, and the connection between the
column and beam flange shall be checked for the effects
of the strut action.

of stiffeners

The buckling resistance F~d should be based on the

design compressive stress fcd (see 7.1.2.1) of a strut
(curve c), the radius of gyration being taken about the
axis parallel to the web. The effective section is the
full area or core area of the stiffener (see 8.7.1.2)
together with an effective length of web on each side
of the centreline of the stiffeners, limited to 20 times
the web thickness. The design strength used should be
the minimum value obtained for buckling about the
web or the stiffener.

8.7.2 Design of Intermediate

8.7.2.1 General

Intermediate transverse stiffeners may be provided on

one or both sides of the web.
8.7.2.2 Spacing
Spacing of intermediate stiffeners, where provided,
shall comply with 8.6.1 depending on the thickness of
the web.

The effective length for intermediate

transverse
stiffeners used in calculating the buckling resistance,
F~~, should be taken as 0.7 times the length, L of the
stiffener.

8.7.2.3 Outstand ofstifjleners

The outstand
with 8.7.1.2.

The effective length for load carrying web stiffeners

used in calculating
the buckling resistance,
FXd,
assumes that the flange through which the load or
reaction is applied is effectively restrained against
lateral movement relative to the other flange, and
should be taken as:
a)

KL = 0.7 Lwhen flange is restrained against

rotation in the plane of the stiffener (by other
structural elements).

b)

KL = L, when flange is not so restrained:

Transverse Web Stl~eners

of the stiffeners

should

comply

8.7.2.4 Minimum stiffeners

Transverse web stiffeners not subject to external loads
or moments should have a second moment of area, Is
about the centreline of the web, if stiffeners are on both
sides of the web and about the face of the web , if
single stiffener on only one side of the web is used
such that:

t.

<

45 -&-bq
,
;
\\
I
t
X
\ \\

L,

FIG. 15 STIFF BEARING LENGTH, b]

66

IS 800:2007
8.7.2.6 Connection

~ > 1.5d3t;
s

depth of the web;

tw

required
web thickness
for
= minimum
spacing using tension field action, as given
in 8.4.2.1; and

= actual stiffener spacing.

8.7.2.5 Buckling check on intermediate

stiffeners

t~/(5b,

tw = web thickness,
b,

transverse web

in mm; and

= outstand width of the stiffener, in mm.

For stiffeners subject to external loading, the shear

between the web and the stiffener due to such loading
has to be added to the above value.
Stiffeners not subject to external loads or moments may
terminate clear of the tension flange and in such a
situation the distance cut short from the line of the weld
should not be more than 4tW.

F, = V- VC,/y.O < F,,

where

v=

to web

where

Stiffeners not subjected to external loads or moments

should be checked for a stiffener force:

F~~ = design resistance

stiffeners,

sti$eners

Intermediate
transverse
stiffeners
not subject to
external loading should be connected to the web so as
to withstand a shear between each component of the
stiffener and the web (in kN/mm) of not less than:

C2

where
d=

of intermediate

of the intermediate
8.7.3 Load Carrying Stiffeners

factored shear force adjacent to the stiffener,

and

8.7.3.1 Web check

Vcr = shear buckling resistance of the web panel

designed without using tension field action
as given in 8.4.2.2(a).

Load carrying web stiffeners should be provided where

compressive forces applied through a flange by loads
or reactions exceed the buckling strength, FCdW,of the
unstiffened web, calculated using the following:

Stiffeners subject to external loads and moments should

meet the conditions for load carrying web stiffeners
in 8.7.3. In addition they should satisfy the following
interaction expression:

The effective length of the web for evaluating the

slenderness ratio is calculated as in 8.7.1.5. The area
of cross-section is taken as (b, + n I) tW:
where
b]

= width of stiff bearing

(see 8.7.1.3), and

on the

flange

n, = dispersion of the load through the web at

45, to the level of half the depth of the crosssection.

If F~ c FX, then (F~ FX) should be taken as zero;

where

The buckling strength of this web about axis parallel

to the web is calculated as given in 7.1.2.1, using
curve c.

F~ = stiffener force given above;

F~~ = design resistance of an intermediate web
stiffener corresponding to buckling about an
axis parallel to the web (see 8.7.1.5);

8.7.4 Bearing Stiffeners

FX = external load or reaction at the stiffener;

a load carrying
FX~ = design resistance of
stiffener corresponding
to buckling about
axis parallel to the web (see 8.7.1.5);

Bearing stiffeners should be provided for webs where

forces applied through a flange by loads or reactions
exceeding the local capacity of the web at its connection
to the flange, FW, given by:

on the
stiffener
due
to
M~ = moment
eccentrically
applied load and transverse
load, if any; and

FW= (b, + n~) twf,~ll~o

where

capacity of the stiffener

Mv~ = yield moment
its elastic modulus about its
based on
centroidal axis parallel to the web.

67

bl

= stiff bearing length (see 8.7.1.3),

rq

= length obtained

by dispersion

through the

IS 800:2007
8.7.9 Torsional Stiffeners

flange to the web junction at a slope of 1 :2.5

to the plane of the flange,
tw = thickness

Where bearing stiffeners are required to provide

torsional restraint at the supports of the beam, they
should meet the following criteria:

of the web, and

.~W = yield stress of the web.

8.7.5 Design of Load Carrying Stiffeners

8.7.5.1 Buckling check

a)

Conditions

b)

Second moment of area of the stiffener section

about the centreline of the web, 1, should be
such that:

The external load or reaction, FX on a stiffener should

not exceed the buckling resistance, FX~of the stiffener
as given in 8.7.1.5.

of 8.7.4, and

1, 2 o.34a, D3TC
where

Where the stiffener also acts as an intermediate stiffener

it should be checked for the effect of combined loads
in accordance with 8.7.2.5.

U,

= 0.006 for L~~ It-ys 50,

= 0.3/( ~~ /rY) for 50< ~~ /rY= 100,
= 30/( L~~ /rY )2 for L~~ Jry >100,

8.7.5.2 Bearing check

Load carrying web stiffeners should also be of sufficient

D=

size that the bearing strength of the stiffener, FP,~,given

below is not less than the load transferred, FX

TC~ = maximum
thickness
of
compression flange in the span
under consideration,

F,,, = A,fy,/ (0.8y~0 ) 2 F,

effective
KL = laterally unsupported
length of the compression flange
of the beam, and

where
Fx = external load or reaction,
A~ = area of the stiffener
flange, and

in contact

with the

8.7.10 Connection
Bearing Stiffeners

~Y~ = yield stress of the stiffener.

8.7.6 Design of Bearing Sti#eners

radius of gyration of the beam

about the minor axis.
to Web of Load

Carrying

and

Stiffeners, which resist loads or reactions applied

through a flange, should be connected to the web by
sufficient welds or fasteners to transmit a design force
equal to the lesser of:

Bearing stiffeners should be designed for the applied

load or reaction less the local capacity of the web as
given in 8.7.4. Where the web and the stiffener material
are of different strengths the lesser value should be
assumed to calculate the capacity of the web and the
stiffener. Bearing stiffeners should project nearly as
much as the overhang of the flange through which load
is transferred.
8.7.7 Design of Diagonal

overall depth of beam at support,

a)

tension capacity of the stiffene~

b)

sum of the forces applied at the two ends of

the stiffener when they act in the same
direction or the larger of the forces when they
act in opposite directions.

Stiffeners

and

Where the web and the stiffener are of different

strengths, the value for design should be taken as given
in 8.7.6.

Stiffeners, which do not extend right across the web,

should be of such length that the shear stress in the
web due to the design force transmitted by the stiffener
does not exceed the shear strength of the web. In
addition, the capacity of the web beyond the end of
the stiffener should be sufficient to resist the applied
force.

8.7.8 Design of Tension Sti#eners

8.7.11 Connection

Tension stiffeners should be designed to carry the

portion of the applied load or reaction less the capacity
of the web as given in 8.7.4 for bearing stiffeners.

8.7.11.1 In tension

Diagonal stiffeners should be designed to carry the

portion of the applied shear and bearing that exceeds
the capacity of the web.

to Flanges

Stiffeners required to resist tension should be connected

to the flange transmitting the load by continuous welds
or non-slip fasteners.

Where the web and the stiffener are of different

strengths, the value for design should be taken as given
in 8.7.6.

8.7.11.2 In compression
Stiffeners
68

required

to resist

compression

should

.
..k

,,

IS 800:2007
8.8.2 Where the concentrated or moving load does not
act directly on top of the web, the local effect shall be
considered in the design of flanges and the diaphragms.

either be fitted against

the loaded
flange
or
connected by continuous welds or non-slip fasteners.
The stiffener should be fitted against or connected
both flanges when:

to

8.9 Purlins

a)

a load is applied directly over a support, or

b)

it forms the end stiffener of a stiffened web,

or

c)

it acts as a torsion stiffener.

Where concentrated
loads are applied to hollow
sections consideration should be given to local stresses
and deformations
and the section reinforced
as
necessary.
Horizontal

Stiffeners

Where horizontal stiffeners are used in addition

vertical stiffeners, they shall be as follows:
a)

b)

to

One horizontal stiffener shall be placed on the

web at a distance from the compression flange
equal to 1/5 of the distance
from the
compression flange angle, plate or tongue
plate to the neutral axis when the thickness
of the web is less than the limits specified
in 8.6.1. The stiffener shall be designed so
that I, is not less than 4ctW>where 1, and tWare
as defined in 8.7.2.4 and c is the actual
distance between the vertical stiffeners

8.10 Bending

Horizontal
web stiffeners
shall extend
between vertical stiffeners, but need not be
continuous over them; and

d)

Horizontal stiffeners may be in pairs arranged

on each side of the web, or single located on
one side of the web.

in a Non-principal

Plane

8.10.1 When the flexural deflection of a member is

constrained to a non-principal plane by lateral restraints
preventing lateral deflection, then the force exerted by
the restraints shall be determined, and the principal
axes bending moments acting on the member shall be
calculated from these forces and applied forces, by a
rational analysis.
The combined effect of bending
about the principal axes shall satisfy the requirements
of Section 9.

A second horizontal
stiffener
(single or
double) shall be placed at the neutral axis of
the girder when the thickness of the web is
less than the limit specified in 8.6.1. This
stiffener shall be designed so that 1, is not less
than dz tWJ where I, and tw are as defined
in 8.7.2.4 and dz is twice the clear distance
from the compression flange angles, plates or
tongue plates to the neutral axis;

c)

Rails (Girts)

All purlins shall be designed in accordance with the

requirements for uncased beams as specified in 8.2.1
and 8.2.2, and the limitations of bending stress based
on lateral instability of the compression flange and the
limiting deflection specified under 5.6.1 for the design
of purlins. The maximum bending moment shall not
exceed the values specified in 8.2.1. The calculated
deflections should not exceed those permitted for the
type of roof cladding used as specified in 5.6.1. In
calculating the bending moment, advantage may be
taken of the continuity of the purlin over supports. The
bending about the two axes should be determined
separately
and checked according
to the biaxial
bending requirements specified in Section 9.

8.7.12 Hollow Sections

8.7.13

and Sheeting

8.10.2 When the deflections of a member loaded in a

non-principal plane are unconstrained;
the principal
axes bending moments shall be calculated by a rational
analysis. The combined effect of bending about the
principal
axes shall satisfy the requirements
of
Section 9.

MEMBER

SECTION 9
SUBJECTED TO COMBINED
FORCES

9.1 General
This section governs the design of members subjected
to combined forces, such as shear force and bending,
axial force and bending, or shear force, axial force and
bending.

8.8 Box Girders

The design and detailing of box girders shall be such
as to give full advantage of its higher load carrying
capacity. Box girder shall be designed in accordance
with specialist
literature.
The diaphragms
and
horizontal
stiffeners
should conform
to 8.7.12
and 8.7.13.

9.2 Combined

Shear and Bending

9.2.1 No reduction in moment capacity of the section is

necessary as long as the cross-section is not subjected
to high shear force (factored value of applied shear force
is less than or equal to 60 percent of the shear strength
of the section as given in 8.4). The moment capacity
may be tiiken as, M~ (see 8.2) without any reduction.

8.8.1 All diaphragms shall be connected such as to

transfer the resultant shears to the web and flanges.
69

----&

IS 800:2007
9.2.2 When the factored value of the applied shear force
is high (exceeds the limit specified in 9.2.1), the
factored moment of the section should be less than the
moment capacity of the section under higher shear
force, lkf~,, calculated as given below:
a)

where
MY,M,

M~~Y,Mn~Z= design reduced flexural strength under

combined axial force and the respective
uniaxial
moment
acting alone (see
9.3.1.2);

Plastic or Compact Section

M,, = Jf,

P(%W,) ~ 1.2-%f,/Ymo

where

N=

p=

(2v/vd-1)2

v=

given by N, = A~.fYlY~O;
M~Y, M~Z = design strength under corresponding
moment acting alone (see 8.2);
A~ = gross area of the cross-section;

factored applied shear force as

governed by web yielding or web
buckling,

a,, (X2 = constants

Mfd = plastic design strength of the area

of the cross-section excluding the
shear area, considering
partial
safety factor ymO,and
= elastic section
whole section.

Semi-compact
~dv

modulus

a)

Plates
Mn~ = M~(l n2)

b)

Welded I or H sections

of the
Mn,Y = M,,

Section
= Z

fvi

as given in Table 17; and

Klo = partial factor of safety in yielding.

9.3.1.2 For plastic and compact sections without bolts
holes, the following approximations may be used for
evaluating Mn~Yand Mn~Z:

Vd = design shear strength as governed

by web yielding or web buckling
(see 8.4.1 or 8.4.2),

Ze

factored applied axial force (Tension, T

or Compression, P);

N~ = design strength in tension, Tdas obtained

from 6 or in compression due to yielding

M~ = plastic design moment of the

whole section disregarding high
shear force effect (see 8.2.1.2)
considering web buckling effects
(see 8.2.1.1),

b)

= factored applied moments about the

minor and major axis of the cross-section,
respectively;

[( )]
1- ~

5 MdYwhere n > a

M .~Z = M~Z (1 -n)/(1

y.,

0.5a)

SM~Z

where
9.3 Combined

Axial Force and Bending

Moment
n = N/N~

Under combined axial force and bending moment, section

strength as governed by material failure and member
strength as governed by buckling failure shall be checked
in accordance with 9.3.1 and 9.3.2 respectively.

c)

anda = (A2bt~)/A

For standard I or H sections

for n s 0.2

M.,, = M,,

for n >0.2

MtiY = 1.56 MdY(l -n)(n

9.3.1 Section Strength

Mnd, = l.ll
d)

9.3.1.1 Plastic and compact sections

In the design of members subjected to combined axial
force (tension or compression) and bending moment,
the following should be satisfied:

For rectangular
box sections

+0.6)

MdZ(ln)SM,Z

hollow sections and welded

When the section is symmetric

axes and without bolt holes
Mti, = M~, (1 -n)/(1

(-4J+(*h)

<0.5

-0.5a,)

about both

<MdY

Mm,, = M,: (1 n) /(1 0.5aW) < M~Z

where

Conservatively, the following equation may also be

used under combined axial force and bending moment:
e)

aW=(A-2bt~)/A

<0.5

a, =(A-2htW)/A

<0.5

Circular hollow tubes without bolt holes

Mn~ = 1.04M~ (1n17) <M~

70

....__

. ,_,
___

IS 800:2007
9.3.1.3

Semi-compact

with respect
fibre; and

section

In the absence of high shear force (see 9.2.1), semicompact section design is satisfactory under combined
axial force and bending, if the maximum longitudinal
stress under combined axial force and bending, ~,
satisfies the following criteria:

without

~,

holes,

compression

v = 0.8, if T and M can vary independently,

or otherwise
= 1.0.
9.3.2.2

f. ~fy%o
For cross-section
reduces to,

to extreme

Bending and axial compression

Members subjected to combined axial compression and

biaxial bending shall satisfy the following interaction
relationships:

the above criteria

~<lo

:+KY

~+mfdy
Mdz

liy

where

;+
di

N~, M~Y, M~z are as defined in 9.3.1.1.

C~YMY
+K~~
M,,

z <1.()
MdZ

C~YMY
0.6 KY +KZ
M,,

C M
~<1.()
M~Z

where
Table 17 Constants

al and CCz

C~Y,Cm, = equivalent uniform moment factor as per

Table 18;

(Clause 9.3.1.1)
Section

al

CZ2

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

i)
ii)
iii)

I and channel
Circular tubes
Rectanguku
tubes
Solid rectangles

5n>)
2
1.661
(11.13rr2)< 6
1.73+ 1.8rr]

2
2
1.66/
(1-1 .13n)<6
1.73+ 1.8n3

s]

P = applied axial compression

load;

No.

iv)

MY,M,=

MdY, Ma, = design bending strength about y (minor)

or z (major) axis considering laterally
unsupported length of the cross-section
(see Section 8);

9.3.2 Overall Member Strength

Members subjected to combined
axial force and
bending moment shall be checked for overall buckling
failure as given in this section.

KY = 1+ (AY 0.2)nY< 1 + 0.8 nY;

K. = 1 + (AZ 0.2)nZ< 1+ 0.8 n.; and

Bending and axial tension

O. IALTn,

The reduced effective moment, M.f~, under tension and

bending calculated as given below, should not exceed
the bending strength due to lateral torsional buckling,
M~ (see 8.2.2).
Me,, = [M VT Zec/A]s

K~~ =

A=

moment

and tension,

area of cross-section;

Zec = elastic

section

modulus

0.25) 21-

(C.,T-

0.25)

nY nZ = ratio of actual applied axial force to the

design axial strength for buckling about
the y and z axis, respectively, and

M~

c
factored applied
respectively:

1- (Cm,, -

0.1 ny

where

where
M,T=

maximum
factored applied bending
moments
about y and z-axis of the
member, respectively;

P~v
.. . P~Z= design strength under axial compression
as governed by buckling about minor (y)
and major (z) axis respectively;

NOTE. n =NINA.

9.3.2.1

under factored

of the section

71

mLT =

equivalent uniform moment factor for

lateral torsional buckling as per Table 18
corresponding
to the actual moment
gradient between lateral supports against
torsional
deformation
in the critical
region under consideration.

Table 18 Equivalent

u
?/s
m
a
o
..

Uniform Moment Factor

(Clause 9.3.2.2)

M
I

Range

Bending Moment Riigmm

Concentrated
(4)

Uniform Loading
(3)

(2)

(1)

Load

0.6 ~ 0.4 yJk O.4

l~ry~l

o
~

cm,, C&, CLT

VM

i
o~c@l

0,2 + ().8&2

-l~ysl

0.2 + 0.8as20.4

0.4

.. -.- ..

1 ~a,~O
O.1(1-yr) +.8

-.l~y~o

o<~:1

r-

--J

-0.8 a, 20.4

O.l O.8a,20.4

o<~sl

I/A4n

_.. _. .

-.

0.90 + O.io ah

0.095 0.05 uh

-l~y,~l
._ .

0.2(1@ -0.8 G 20.4

a,> 0.4

_...

o~lp~l

0095 + 0.05 al,

l<yf~o

0.95 + 0.05 ah (1+2 @

._.

__

..- .- -

0.90 + 0.10 ah

1 <a$~O
0.90 + 0.050+ (1+2@

For members with sway bockling mode, the equivalent uniform moment factor C~ = Cm = 0.9.
Cm, C,~.

CMLT

shall be obtained according to the bending moment diagratn between the relevant braced poinh

Cw

Bendiag ms
~.~

cm

Y-Y

A40ment factor

points braced in direction

-d

=V===J=%
\ftx
cm,,

------

IS 800:2007
SECTION 10
CONNECTIONS

tightened
welding.

10.1.1 This section deals with the design and detailing

requirements for joints between members. Connection
elements consist of components such as cleats, gusset
plates, brackets, connecting plates and connectors such
as rivets, bolts, pins, and welds. The connections in a
structure shall be designed so as to be consistent with
the assumptions made in the analysis of the structure
and comply with the requirements
specified in this
section. Connections shall be capable of transmitting
the calculated design actions.

10.2 Location

10.1.4 The ductility of steel assists the distribution of

forces generated within a joint. Effects of residual
stresses and stresses due to tightening of fasteners and
normal tolerances of fit-up need not therefore be
considered in connection design, provided ductile
behaviour is ensured.
10.1.5 In general, use of different forms of fasteners
to transfer the same force shall be avoided. However,
when different forms of fmteners are used to carry a
shear load or when welding
and fasteners
are
combined, then one form of fastener shall be normally
designed to carry the total load. Nevertheless, fully
tensioned friction grip bolts may be designed to share
the ioad with welding, provided the bolts are fully

SI

Nominal Size of
Fastener, d

No.

p)

(1)

after

Details of Fasteners

Bolts may be located in standard size, over size, short

slotted or long slotted hole.
a)

Standard clearance hole Except where

fitted bolts, bolts in low-clearance or oversize
holes are specified, the diameter of standard
clearance holes for fasteners shall be as given
in Table 19.

b)

Over size hole Holes of size larger than the

standard clearance holes, as given in Table
19 may be used in slip resistant connections
and hold down bolted connections,
only
where specified, provided the over size holes
in the outer Ply is covered by a cover plate of
sufficiently
large size and thickness and
having a hole not larger than the standard
clearance hole (and hardened washer in slip
resistant connections).

c)

Short and long slots Slotted holes of size

larger than the standard clearance hole, as
given in Table 19 maybe used in slip resistant
connections
and hold
down
bolted
connections, only where specified, provided
the over size holes in the outer ply is covered
by a cover plate of sufficiently large size and
thickness and having a hole of size not larger
than the standard
clearance
hole (and
hardened washer in slip resistant connection).

10.1.3 Ease of fabrication and erection should be

considered in Ihe design of connections.
Attention
should be paid to clearances
necessary
for field
erection, tolerances, tightening of fasteners, welding
procedures, subsequent inspection, surface treatment
md maintenance.

(Clause

pretension

10.2.1 Clearances for Holes for Fasteners

connected to the surface

section, the ability of the
the applied forces locally
necessary, local stiffening

Table 19 Clearances

necessary

10.1.6 The partial safety factor in the evaluation of

design strength of connections shall be taken as given
in Table 5.

10.1 General

10.1.2 Where members are

of a web or the flange of a
web or the flange to transfer
should be checked and where
provided.

to develop

10.2.2 Minimum

Spacing

The distance between centre of fasteners shall not be

less than 2.5 times the nominal diameter of the fastener.
for Fastener

Holes

10.2.1)

Size of the Hole= Nominal Diameter of the Fastener+

Clearances

mm
Standard Clearance in
Diameter and Width
of slot

Cher Size
Clearance in Diameter

Clearance in the Length of the Slot

(3)

(4)

(5)

< Short Slot

Long Slot >

(6)

i)

12 14

1.0

3.0

4.0

2.5 d

ii)

1622

2.0

4.0

6.0

2.5 d

iii)

24

2.0

6.0

8.0

2.5 d

iv)

Larger than 24

3.0

8.0

10.0

2.5 d

73

IS 800:2007
10.2.3 Muxlmum

not apply to fasteners interconnecting the components

of back to back tension members. Where the members
are exposed to corrosive influences, the maximum edge
distance shall not exceed 40 mm plus 4t, where t is the
thickness of thinner connected plate.

Spacing

10.2.3.1 The distance between the centres of any two

adjacent fasteners shall not exceed 32t or 300 mm,
whichever is less, where tis the thickness of the thinner
plate.

10.2.5 Tacking Fasteners

10.2.3.2 The distance between the centres of two

adjacent fasteners (pitch) in a line lying in the direction
of stress, sh~ll not exceed 16t or 200 mm, whichever
is less, in tension members and 12t or 20() mm,
whichever is less, in compression members; where r is
the thickness of the thinner plate. In the case of
compression members wherein forces are transferred
through butting faces, this distance shall not exceed
4.5 times the diameter of the fasteners for a distance
equal to 1.5 times the width of the member from the
butting faces.

10.2.5.1 In case of members

when the maximum distance
adjacent fasteners as specified
tacking fasteners not subjected
be used.

covered under 10.2.4.3,

between centres of two
in 10.2.4.3 is exceeded,
to calculated stress shall

10.2.5.2 Tacking fasteners shall have spacing in a line

not exceeding 32 times the thickness of the thinner
outside plate or 300 mm, whichever is less. Where the
plates are exposed to the weather, the spacing in line
shall not exceed 16 times the thickness of the thinner
outside plale or 200 mm, whichever is less. In both
cases, the distance between the lines of fasteners shall
not be greater than the respective pitches.

10.2.3.3 The distance between the centres of any two

consecutive fasteners in a line adjacent and parallel to
an edge of an outside plate shall not exceed 100 mm
plus 4t or 200 mm, whichever is less, in compression
and tension members; where t is the thickness of the
thinner outside plate.

10.2.5.3 All the requirements specified in 10.2.5.2 shall

generally apply to compression members, subject to
the stipulations in Section 7 affecting the design and
construction of compression members.

10.2.3.4 When fasteners are staggered at equal intervals

and the gauge does not exceed 75 mm, the spacing
specified in 10.2.3.2 and 10.2.3.3 between centres of
fasteners may be increased by 50 percent, subject to
the maximum spacing specified in 10.2.3.1.

10.2.5.4 In tension members (see Section 6) composed

of two flats, angles, channels or tees in contact back to
back or separated back to back by a distance not
exceeding the aggregate thickness of the connected parts,
tacking fasteners with solid distance pieces shall be
provided at a spacing in line not exceeding 1000 mm.

10.2.4 Edge and End Distances

10.2.4.1 The edge distance is the distance at right angles
to the direction of stress from the centre of a hole to
the adjacent edge. The end distance is the distance in
the direction of stress from the centre of a hole to the
end of the element.

10.2.5.5 For compression

members
covered in
Section 7, tack~ng fasteners in a line shall be spaced at
a distance not exceeding 600 mm.
10.2.6 Countersank

In slotted holes, the edge and end distances should be

measured from the edge or end of the material to the
centre of its end radius or the centre line of the slot,
whichever is smaller. In oversize holes, the edge and
end distances should be taken as the distance from the
relevant edge/end plus half the diameter of the standard
clearance hole corresponding to the fastener, less the
nominal diameter of the oversize hole.

Heads

For countersunk heads, one-half of the depth of the

countersinking
shall be neglected in calculating the
length of the fastener in bearing in accordance
with 10.3.3.
For fasteners
in tension
having
countersunk heads, the tensile strength shall be reduced
by 33.3 percent. No reduction is required to be made
in shear strength calculations.
10.3 Bewing

10.2.4.2 The minimum edge and end distances from

the centre of any hole to the nearest edge of a plate
shall not be less than 1.7 times the hole diameter in
case of sheared or hand-flame cut edges; and 1.5 times
the hole diameter in case of rolled, machine-flame cut,
sawn and planed edges.

Type Bolts

10.3.1 Effective Areas of Bolts

10.3.1.1 Since threads can occur in the shear plane,
the area .4Cfor resisting shear should normally be taken
as the net tensile stress area, An of the bolts. For bolts
where the net tensile stress area is not defined, An shall
be taken as the area at the root of the threads.

10.2.4.3 The maximum edge distance to the nearest

line of fasteners from an edge of any un-stiffened part
should not exceed 12 tE, where c = (250/)2 and t is
the thickness of the thinner outer plate. This would

10.3.1.2 Where it can be shown that the threads do not

occur in the shear plane, A~ may be taken as the cross
section area, A, at the shank.
74

IS 800:2007
10.3.1.3 In the calculation of thread length, allowance
should be made for tolerance and thread run off.

the connected plates) exceeds 5 times the diameter, d

of the bolts, the design shear capacity shall be reduced
by a factor ~1~,given by:

10.3.2 A bolt subjected to a factored shear force ( VJ

shall satisfy the condition

~,, = 8 d /(3 d+ 1,) = 8 /(3+1,/d)

~i, shall not be more than f$j given in 10.3.3.1. The
grip length, 1~shall in no case be greater than 8d.

v... = Vdb
where V~~is the design strength of the bolt taken as the
smaller of the value as governed
by shear, V~,~
(see 10.3.3) and bearing, V,P~ (see 10.3.4).

10.3.3.3 Packing plates

The design shear capacity of bolts carrying shear
through a packing plate in excess of 6 mm shall be
decreased by a factor, ~P~given by:

10.3.3 Shear Capacity of Bolt

The design strength of the bolt, V~,~as governed shear
strength is given by:
v dstr =

~,, =(1 -0.0125

tpk)

where

nsb 1 ~mb

tP~ = thickness of the thicker packing, in mm.

where
Vn,b = nominal
shear capacity
calculated as follows:
v],, =@

%)+%

10.3.4 Bearing Capacity of the Bolt

of a bolt,

The design bearing strength of a bolt on any plate, V~P~

as governed by bearing is given by:

%,)
where

where
~

v npb

= uitimate tensile strength of a bolt;

nominal bearing strength of a bolt

= 2.5 k~ d tfu

nn = number of shear planes with threads

intercepting the shear plane;

where

n, = number of shear planes without threads

intercepting the shear plane;

e
b s mailer f ~

P
0.25,
3d0

$,

1.0;
u

A,b = nominal plain shank area of the bolt; and

Anb = net shear area of the bolt at threads, may
be taken as the area corresponding
to
root diameter at the thread.

e, p = end and pitch distances of the fastener

along bearing direction;
dO = diameter of the hole;

10.3.3.1 L.ongjoints

fub,it

Plj =

1.075-1,
=

1.075-

/(200

= Ultimate tensile

ultimate tensile
respectively;

When the length of the joint, lj of a splice or end

connection
in a compression
or tension element
containing more than two bolts (that is the distmce
between the first and last rows of bolts in the joint,
measured in the direction of the load tmnsfer) exceeds
15a!in the direction of load, the nominal shear capacity
(see 10.3.2), V~~shall be reduced by the factor ~lj, given
by:

stress of the bolt and the

stress

of the plate,

d = nominal diameter of the bolt; and

[ = summation of the thicknesses
of the
connected plates experiencing bearing
stress in the same direction, or if the bolts
are countersunk,
the thickness of the
plate minus one half of the depth of
countersinking.

~) but 075<Pli<10

The bearing resistance (in the direction normal to the

slots in slotted holes) of bolts in holes other than
standard
clearance
holes may be reduced
by
multiplying the bearing resistance obtained as above,
V~p~,by the factors given below:

o.oo5(lj /d)

where
d = Nominal diameter of the fastener.
NOTE This provisiondoes not apply when the distribution
of shear over the length of joint is uniform, as in the connection
of web of a section to the flanges.

10.3.3.2 Large grip lengths

a)

Over size and short slotted holes 0.7, and

b)

Long slotted holes

0.5.

NOTE The block shear of the edge distance due to

bearing force may be checked as given in 6.4.

When the grip length, 1~(equal to the total thickness of

75

IS 800:2007
0 be limited, a bolt subjected only to a factored design
jhe~ force, V,~in the interface of connections at which
$Iip cannot be tolerated, shall satisfy the following:

10.3.5 Tension Capacity

Aboltsubjected
satisfy:

toafactored

tensile force, Th shall

V,f < Vd,f

Th < T~h
where

where

Vd,f = Vn,f/ ymf

T~b Tnb\)mb
T,,~ = nominal tensile
calculated as:

capacity

f).90~u~ A,, < fYb ASb (~mb

Vn,~ = nominal shear capacity of a bolt as

governed
by slip for friction
type
connection, calculated as follows:

of the bolt,

f %())

v~,f = t%n. Kh F.

where

where
&

= ultimate tensile stress of the bolt,

Pf

~,b = yield stress of the bolt,

A.

= net tensile stress area as specified in the

appropriate Indian Standard (for bolts
where the tensile stress area is not
defined, A,, shall be taken as the area at
the bottom of the threads), and

ne = number of effective interfaces

frictional resistance to s~ip,
K~ = 1.0 for fasteners in clearance

to Combined

Sheat- and Tension

hoIes,

y~~ = 1.10 (if slip resistance

service load),

is designed

at

= 1.25 (if slip resistance

ultimate load),

is designed

at

F. = minimum bolt tension (proof load) at

installation
and may be taken as

where

A.bfO>

factored shear force acting on the bolt,

A nh

design shear capacity (see 10.3.2),

net area of the bolt at threads, and

fO = proof stress (= 0.70~ub).

Tb = factored tensile force acting on the bolt, and

T~b .

offering

= 0.7 for fasteners in long slotted holes

loaded parallel to the slot,

A bolt required to resist both design shear force (V,~)

and design tensile force (TJ at the same time shall
satisfy:

V,b =
vdb =

as

= 0.85 for fasteners in oversized and short

slotted holes and for fasteners in long
slotted holes loaded perpendicular to the
slot,

A,~ = shank area of the bolt.

10.3.6 Bolt Subjected

coefficient of friction (slip factor)

specified in Table 20 @~= 0.55),

NOTE Vn.may be

design tension capacity (see 10.3.5).

evaluated at

a service load or ultimate

load using appropriate partial safety factors, depending upon

10.4 Friction

whether slip resistance is required at service load or ultimate

load.

Grip Type Bolting

10.4.1 In friction grip type bolting, initial pretension

in bolt (usually high strength) develops clamping force
at the interfaces of elements being joined. The frictional
resistance to slip between the plate surfaces subjected
to clamping force opposes slip due to externally applied
shear. Friction grip type bolts and nuts shall conform
to IS 3757. Their installation procedures shall conform
to IS 4000.

10.4.3.1

Long joints

The provision for the long joints in 10.3.3.1 shall apply

to friction grip connections also.
10.4.4 Capacity after slipping
When friction type bolts are designed not to slip only
under service loads, the design capacity at ultimate load
may be calculated as per bearing type connection
(see 10.3.2 and 10.3.3).

10.4.2 Where slip between bolted plates cannot be

tolerated at working loads (slip critical connections),
the requirements of 10.4.3 shall be satisfied. However,
at ultimate loads, the requirements of 10.4.4 shall be
satisfied by all connections.

NOTE The block shear resistance of the edge distance due

to bearing force may be checked as given in 6.4.

10.4.5 Tension Resistance

10.4.3 Slip Resistance

A friction bolt subjected to a factored tension force (Tf )

shall satisfy:

Design for friction type bolting in which slip is required

76

IS 800:2007
Tf < Tdf

where
V,f = applied factored shear at design load,

where
Tdf

V~f = design shear strength,

Tnf1 k
Tn~ = nominal tensile strength of the friction bolt,
calculated as:

T~ = externally applied
design load, and

where

= net tensile stress area as specified in

various parts of IS 1367 (for bolts where
the tensile stress area is not defined, A.
shall be taken as the area at the root of
the threads);

f2=$[Te-fiqf0bet4]
271, 1;
e
where

A,, = shank area of the bolt; and

y~~ = partial factor of safety.
Average Values for Coefficient
of Friction (pf)
(Clause
SI

Treatment of Surface

Coefficient
of Friction,

(2)

&

Surfacesnot treated
Surfacesblastedwith short or grit with
any looserust removed,no pitting
Surfacesblastedwith shot or grit and
hot-dipgalvanized
Surfaces blasted with shot or grit and
spray+netallizedwith zinc (thickness

0.20
0.50

(1)

O
ii)
iii)
iv)

vi)
vii)

viii)

ix)

x)
xi)
xii)

= distance from the bolt centreline to the toe

of the fillet weld or to half the root radius
for a rolled section,

le

= distance between prying force and bolt

the
minimum
and
is
centreline
of either the end distance or the value given
by:

where

0.10

Surfacesblastedwith shot or grit and

paintedwith ethylzincsilicatecoat
(thickness30-60 ~)
Sandblastedsurface,atter light rusting
Surfacesblasted with shot or grit and
painted with ethylzinc silicate coat
(thickness60-80 W)
Surfacesblasted with shot or grit and
painted with alcalizinc silicate coat
(thickness60-80 ,mn)
Surface blasted with shot or grit and
spray metallized with aluminium
(thickness>50 ,mrr)
Clean mill scale
Sand blasted surface
Red lead painted surface

2 for non pre-tensioned

tensioned bolt,

P=

0.25

50-70 jan)

v)

1,

10.4.3)

No.

at

10.4.7 Where prying force, Q as illustrated in Fig. 16

is significant, it shall be calculated as given below and
added to the tension in the bolt.

f, = ultimate tensile stress of the bolt;

Table 20 ~pical

tension

T~~ = design tension strength.

0.9$U~An ~~YbA,b(y~ll %)

A.

factored

0.30

0.52
0.30

bolt and 1 for pre-

= 1.5,

b,

= effective width of flange per pair of bolts,

f.

= proof stress in consistent units, and

= thickness of the end plate.

2Te

0.30

0.50

II

0.33
0.48
0.1

10.4.6 Combined Shear and Tension

Bolts in a connection for which slip in the serviceability

limit state shall be limited, which are subjected to a
tension force, T and shear force, V, shall satisfy:

TC+Q

FIG. 16 COMBINED PRYING FORCE AND TENSION

77

IS 800:2007
10.5 Welds and Welding

shall not be less than 3 mm and shall generally not exceed

0.7?, or 1.Ot under special circumstances, where t is the
thickness of the thinner plate of elements being welded.

10.5.1 General
Requirements of welds and welding shall conform to
IS 816 and IS 9595, as appropriate.

Table 21 Minimum Size of First Rtm or of a

Single Run Fillet Weld

10.5.1.1 End returns

(Clause 10.5.2.3)
Fillet welds terminating at the ends or sides of parts
should be returned continuously around the corners
for a distance of not less than twice the size of the
weld, unless it is impractical
to do so. This is
particularly important on the tension end of parts
carrying bending loads.

Thickness of Thicker Part

Minimum Size

mm
_

mm

/. _.
Over
(1)
i)
ii)

10.5.1.2 Lap joint

iii)

In the case of lap joints, the minimum lap should not

be less than four times the thickness of the thinner part
joined or 40 mm, whichever is more. Single end fillet
should be used only when lapped parts are restrained
from openings. When end of an element is connected
only by parallel longitudinal fillet welds, the length of
the weld along either edge should not be less than the
transverse spacing between longitudinal welds.

iv)

(2)

Up to and
trrcluding
(3)

10
20
32

10
20
32
50

(4)
3

5
6
10

8 of first run
for minimum size of
weld

NOTES
1 When the minimumsize of the fillet weld given in the table
is greater than the thickness of the thhner part, the minimum
size of the weld should be equal to the thickness of the thinner
part. The thicker part shall be adequately preheated to prevent
cracking of the weld.
2 Where the thicker part is more than 50 mm thick, special
precautions like pre-heating should be taken.

10.5.1.3 A single fillet weld should not be subjected to

moment about the longitudinal axis of the weld.

10.5.3.2 For the purpose of stress calculation in fillet

welds joining faces inclined to each other, the effective
throat thickness shall be taken as K times the fillet size,
where K is a constant, depending
upon the angle
between fusion faces, as given in Table 22.

10.5.2 Size of Weld

10.5.2.1 The size of normal fillets shall be taken as the
minimum weld leg size. For deep penetration welds,
where the depth of penetration beyond the root run is
a minimum of 2.4 mm, the size of the fillet should be
taken as the minimum leg size plus 2.4 mm.

10.5.3.3 The effective throat thickness of a complete

penetration butt weld shall be taken as the thickness of
the thinner part joined, and that of an incomplete
penetration butt weld shall be taken as the minimum
thickness of the weld metal common to the parts joined,
excluding reinforcements.

10.5.2.2 For fillet welds made by semi-automatic or

automatic processes, where the depth of penetration is
considerably in excess of 2.4 mm, the size shall be
taken considering actual depth of penetration subject
to agreement between the purchaser and the contractor.
10.5.2.3 The size of
3 mm. The minimum
run fillet weld shall
the risk of cracking

SI
No.

10.5.4 Effective Lengthor Area of Weld

fillet welds shall not be less than

size of the first run or of a single
be as given in Table 21, to avoid
in the absence of preheating.

10.5.4.1 The effective length of fiilet weld shall be

taken as only that length which is of the specified size
and required throat thickness, In practice the actual
length of weld is made of the effective length shown
in drawing plus two times the weld size, but not less
than four times the size of the weld.

10.5.2.4 The size of butt weld shall be specified by the

effective throat thickness.

10.5.4.2 The effective length of butt weld shall be taken

as the length of the continuous ftdl size weld, but not
less than four times the size of the weld.

10.5.3 Effective Throat Thickness

10.5.3.1 The effective throat thickness of a fillet weld
Table 22 Values of K for Different

Angles Between Fusion Faces

(Clause 10.5.3.2)
Angle Between Fusion Faces
Constant,

60900

91100

0.70

0.65

78

IOI--1O6
0.60

1070113

I 14120

0.55

0.50

,,.

IS 800:2007
10.5.7.1.3 Slot or plug welds

10.5.4.3 The effective area of a plug weld shall be

considered as the nominal area of the hole in the plane
of the faying surface. These welds shall not be designed
to carry stresses.

The design shear stress on slot or plug welds shall be

as per 10.5.7.1.1.
10.5.7.2 Site welds

10.5.4.4 If the maximum length /j of the side welds

transferring shear along its length exceeds 150 times
the throat size of the weld, tt, the reduction in weld
strength as per the long joint (see 10.5.7.3) should be
considered. For flange to web connection, where the
welds are loaded for the full length, the above limitation
would not apply.
10.5.5 Intermittent

The design strength in shear and tension for site welds

made during erection of structural members shall be
calculated according to 10.5.7.1 but using a partial
safety factor y~Wof 1.5.
10.5.7.3 Long joints
When the length of the welded joint, lj of a splice or
end connection in a compression or tension element is
greater than 150 t,, the design capacity of weld
(see 10.5.7.1.1), fwd shall be reduced by the factor

Welds

10.5.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, the intermittent

fillet welding shall have an effective length of not
less than four times the weld size, with a minimum

0.21.
Plw=l.2---#o.o

of 40 mm.
10.5.5.2 The clear spacing between the effective lengths
of intermittent fillet weld shall not exceed 12 and 16
times the thickness
of thinner plate joined, for
compression and tension joint respectively, and in no
case be more than 200 mm.

where
lj

10.5.8 Fillet Weld Applied

Section

For the purpose of this code, weld shall be fillet, butt,

slot or plug or compound welds. Welding electrodes
shall conform to 1S 814.

10.5.7.1 Shop welds

10.5.8.3 Where the size specified for a fillet weld is

such that the parent metal will not project beyond the
weld, no melting of the outer cover or covers shall be
allowed to occur to such an extent as to reduce the
throat thickness (see Fig. 18).

10.5.7.1.1 Fillet welds

Design strength of a fillet weld, ~W~shall be based on
its throat area and shall be given by:

10.5.8.4 When fillet welds are applied to the edges of

a plate, or section in members subject to dynamic
loading, the fillet weld shall be of full size with its leg
length equal to the thickness of the plate or section,
with the limitations specified in 10.5.8.3.

t YIW

where

fu

f,/&*

smaller of the ultimate stress of the weld

or of the parent metal, and

y~~ = partial

to the Edge of a Plate or

10.5.8.2 Where the fillet weld is applied to the rounded

toe of a rolled section, the specified size of the weld
should generally not exceed 3/4 of the thickness of the
section at the toe (see Fig. 17B).

10.5.7 Design Stresses in Welds

of the

10.5.8.1 Where a fillet weld is applied to the square

edge of a part, the specified size of the weld should
generally beat least 1.5 mm less than the edge thickness
in order to avoid washing down of the exposed arris
(see Fig. 17A).

10.5.6 Weld Types and Quality

f..

= length of the joint in the direction

force transfer, and

t, = throat size of the weld.

10.5.5.3 Unless otherwise specified, the intermittent

butt weld shall have an effective length of not less than
four times the weld size and the longitudinal space
between the effective length of welds shall not be more
than 16 times the thickness of the thinner part joined.
The intermittent welds shall not be used in positions
subject to dynamic, repetitive and alternating stresses.

fwd f..

10.5.8.5 End fillet weld, normal to the direction of force

shall be of unequal size with a throat thickness not
less than 0.5t, where t is the thickness of the part, as
shown in Fig. 19. The difference in thickness of the
welds shall be negotiated at a uniform slope.

safety factor (see Table 5).

10.5.7.1,2 Butt welds

Butt welds shall be treated as parent metal with a
thickness equal to the throat thickness, and the stresses
shall not exceed those permitted in the parent metal.

10.5.9 Stresses Due to Individual

When subjected
79

Forces

to either compressive

or tensile or

IS 800:2007

1.5 mm

17A

17B

FIG. 17 FILLET WELDS ON SQUARE EDGE OF PLATE OR ROUND TOE OF ROLLED SECTION

18A Desirable

18B Acceptable
because
Full Throat Thickness

of

18C Not Acceptable because of

Reduced Throat Thickness

Fm. 18 FULL SIZE FILLETW ELDAPPLIIZDTO THE EDGE OF A PLATE OR SECTION

not be done fo~

shear force alone, the stress in the weld is given by:

a)

side fillet welds joining

flange plates, and

b)

fillet welds where sum of normal and shear

stresses does not exceed~W~ (see 10.5.7.1.1).

faorq=~
where
L=
q
P=

10.5.10.2.1 Check for the combination of stresses in

butt welds need not be carried out provided that

= shear stress, in N/mm*;

(axial force Nor the shear

t,

= effective throat thickness

and

lW

= effective length of weld, in mm.

10.5.10 Combination

and

10.5.10.2 Butt welds

calculated normal stress due to axial force,

in N/mm*;

force transmitted
force Q);

cover plates

a)

butt welds are axially loaded, and

b)

in single and double bevel welds the sum of

normal and shear stresses does not exceed the
design normal stress, and the shear stress does
not exceed 50 percent of the design shear
stress.

of weld, in mm;

of Stresses

10.5.10.2.2 Combined

10.5.10.1 Fillet welds

bearing, bending and shear

Where bearing stress, fb, is combined with bending

(tensile or compressive), fb and shear stresses, q under
the most unfavorable conditions of loading in butt
welds, the equivalent stress, ~, as obtained from the
following formula, shall not exceed the values allowed
for the parent metal:

10.5.10.1.1 When subjected to a combination of normal

and shear stress, the equivalent stress fe shall satisfy
the following:

& = Jf;

+f;

+f, fbr+%

where
where
L=

normal stresses, compression or tension, due

to axial force
or bending
moment
(see 10.5.9), and

L=
fb

= shear stress due to shear force or tension (see

10.5.9).

10.5.10.1.2 Check for the combination

of stresses need
80

equivalent

stress;

= calculated stress due to bending, in N/mmz;

fb,

= calculated
and

stress due to bearing, in N/mm*;

= shear stress, in N/mm*.

IS 800:2007

CHAMFER

1
h
ri
h:b = 1:2 or Flatter

FORCE

FORCE

FIG, 19 END FILLETWELD NORMALTODIRECTIONOR FORCE

d)

10.5.11 Where a packing is welded between two

members and is less than 6 mm thick, or is too thin to
allow provision of adequate welds or to prevent
buckIing, the packing shall be trimmed flush with the
edges of the element subject to the design action and
the size of the welds along the edges shall be increased
over the required size by an amount equal to the
thickness of the packing. Otherwise, the packing shall
extend beyond the edges and shall be fillet welded to
the pieces between which it is fitted.

10.6.1 Connections can be classified as rigid, semi-rigid

and flexible for the purpose of analysis and design as
per the recommendation in Annex F. Connections with
sut%cient rotational stiffness maybe considered as rigid.
Examples of rigid connections include flush end-plate
connection
and extended end-plate
connections.
Connections with negligible rotational stiffness may be
considered as flexible (pinned). Examples of flexible
connections
include single and double web angle
connections and header plate connections. Where a
connection cannot be classified as either rigid or flexible,
it shall be assumed to be semi-rigid. Examples of semirigid connections include top and seat angle connection
and top and seat angle with single/double web angles.

10.6 Design of Connections

Each element in a connection shall be designed so that
the structure is capable of resisting the design actions.
Connections and adjacent regions of the members shall
be designed by distributing the design action effects
such that the following requirements are satisfied:
a)

Design action effects distributed to various

elements shall be in equilibrium
with the
design action effects on the connection,

b)

Required deformations in the elements of the

connections are within their deformations
capacities,

c)

All elements in the connections

and the
adjacent areas of members shall be capable
of resisting the design action effects acting
on them, and

Connection
elements shall remain stable
under
the design
action
effects
and
deformations.

10.6.2 Design shall be on the basis of any rational

method supported by experimental evidence. Residual
stresses due to installation of bolts or welding normaily
need not be considered in statically loaded structures,
Connections in cyclically loaded structures shall be
designed considering fatigue as given in Section 13.
For earthquake load combinations,
the connections
shall be designed to withstand the calculated design
action effects and exhibit required ductility as specified
in Section 12.
81

IS 800:2007
6)

10.6.3 Beam and column splice shall be designed in

accordance with the recommendation
given in F-2
and F-3.
10.7 Minimum

Design Action on Connection

A splice subjected to a shear force only

shall be designed to transmit the design
shear force together with any bending
moment resulting from the eccentricity
of the force with respect to the centroid
of the group.

Connections carrying design action effects, except for

lacing connections, connections of sag rods, purlins
and girts, shall be designed to transmit the greater of
a)

the design action in the member; and

b)

the minimum design action effects expressed

either as the value or the factor times the
member design capacity for the minimum size
of member required by the strength limit state,
specified as follows:
1)

7)

Connections in rigid construction a

bending moment of at least 0.5 times the
member design moment capacity

2)_ Connections
to beam
in simple
construction a shear force of at least
0.15 times the member design shear
capacity or 40 kN, whichever is lesser
3)

Splices in members subjected to axial

tension a force of at least 0.3 times
the member design capacity in tension

5)

Splices in members subjected to axial

compression for ends prepared for full
contact in accordance with 17.7.1, it shall
be permissible
to carry compressive
actions by bearing on contact surf?ces.
When members are prepared for full
contact to bear at splices, there shall be
sufficient
fasteners
to hold all parts
securely in place. The fasteners shall be
sufficient to transmit a force of at least
0,15 times the member design capacity
in axial compression.

Splices in members subject to combined

actions a splice in a member subject
to a combination of design axial tension
or design axial compression and design
shall
satisfy
moment
bending
requirements in (4), (5) and (6) above,
simultaneously.
For earthquake load combinations, the
design action effects specified in this
section may need to be increased to meet
the required behaviour of the steel frame
and shall comply with Section 12.

Connections
at the ends of tensile or
compression member a force of at least
0.3 times the member design capacity

4)

Splices injlexural members a bending

moment of 0.3 times the member design
capacity in bending. This provision shall
not apply to splices designed to transmit
shear force only.

10.8 Intersections
Members or components meeting at a joint shall be
arranged to transfer the design actions between the
parts, wherever practicable, with their centroidal axes
meeting at a point. Where there is eccentricity at joints,
the members and components shall be designed for
the design bending moments which result due to
eccentricity.
The disposition of fillet welds to balance the design
actions about the centroidal
axis or axes for end
connections of single angle, double angle and similar
type members is not required for sta~ally
loaded
members but is required for members, connection
components subject to fatigue loading.
Eccentricity
between the centroidal axes of angle
members and the gauge lines for their bolted end
connections may be neglected in statically loaded
members, but shall be considered in members and
connection components subject to fatigue loading.

When members are not prepared for full

contact,
the splice material
and its
fasteners shall be arranged to hold all
parts in line and shall be designed to
transmit a force of at least 0.3 times the
member
design
capacity
in axial
compression.

10.9 Choice of Fasteners

Where slip in the serviceability
limit state is to be
avoided in a connection,
high-strength
bolts in a
friction-type joint, fitted bolts or welds shall be used.

In addition,
splices located between
points of effective lateral support shall
be designed for the design axial force,
P~ plus a Jesign bending moment, not
less than the design bending moment
M,= (P, /,)/1 000

Where a joint is subjected to impact or vibration, either

high strength bolts in a friction type joint or ordinary
bolts with locking devices or welds shall be used.
10.10 Connection

where, /, is the distance between points

of effective lateral support.

Components

Connection components
82

(cleats, gusset plates, brackets

IS 800:2007
and only bolts in the tension side of the
neutral axis may be considered
for
calculating the neutral axis and second
moment of area.

and the like) other than connectors, shall have their

capacities assessed using the provisions of Sections 5,
6,7,8 and 9, as applicable.
10.11 Analysis of a Bolt/Weld

Group

2)

In the friction grip bolt group only the

bolts
shall be considered
in the
calculation of neutral axis and second
moment of area.

3)

The fillet weld group

in isolation from the
for the calculation of
moment of the weld

10.11.1 Bolt/Weld Group Subject to In-plane Loading

10.11.1.1 General method of analysis
The design force in a boltiweld or design force per
unit length in a boltiweld group subject to in-plane
loading shall be determined in accordance with the
following:
a)

b)

c)

10.11.2.2 Alternative

The connection plates shall be considered to

be rigid and to rotate relative to each other
about a point known as the instantaneous
centre of rotation of the group.

shall be considered
connected elemen~
centroid and second
length.

analysis

The design force per unit length in a fillet weld/bolt

group may alternatively be determined by considering
the fillet weld group as an extension of the connected
member and distributing the design forces among the
welds of the fillet weld group so as to satisfy
equilibrium between the fillet weld group and the
elements of the connected member.

In the case of a group subject to a pure couple

only, the instantaneous
centre of rotation
coincides with the group centroid. In the case
of in-plane shear force applied at the group
centroid, the instantaneous
centre of the
rotation is at infinity and the design force is
uniformly distributed throughout the group.
In all other cases, either the results of
independent analyses for a pure couple alone
and for an in-plane shear force applied at the
group centroid shall be superposed,
or a
recognized method of analysis shall be used.

10.11.3 Bolt/Weld Group

Out-of-Plane Loading

Subject

to In-plane

and

10.11.3.1 General method of analysis

The design force in a bolt or per unit length of the
weld shall be determined
by the superposition
of
analysis for in-plane and out-of-plane cases discussed
in 10.11.1 and 10.11.2.

The design force in a bolt or design force per

unit length at any point in the group shall be
assumed to act at right angles to the radius
from that point to the instantaneous centre,
and shall be taken as proportional
to that
radius.

10.11.3.2 Alternative

analysis

10.11.2.1 General method of analysis

The design force in a bolt or per unit length in the

fillet weld group may alternatively be determined by
considering the fillet weld group as an extension of
the connected member and proportioning the design
force per bolt or unit length in the weld group to satisfy
equilibrium
between the bolt/weld group and the
elements of the connected member.

The design force of a bolt in bolt group or design force

per unit length in the fillet weld group subject to outof-plane loading shall be determined in accordance
with the following:

Force calculated in the most stressed bolt or highest

force per unit length of the weld shall satisfy the
strength requirements
of 10.3, 10.4 or 10.5, as
appropriate.

10.11.2 Bolt/Weld
Loading

a)

b)

Group Subject

to Out-of-Plane

Design force in the bolts or per unit length in

the fillet weld group resulting from any shear
force or axial force shall be considered to be
equally shared by all bolts in the group or
uniformly distributed over the length of the
fillet weld group.

10.12 Lug Angles

10.12.1 Lug angles connecting outstanding leg of a
channel-shaped
member shall, as far as possible, be
disposed symmetrically with respect to the section of
the member.
10.12.2 In the case of angle members, the lug angles
and their connections to the gusset or other supporting
member shall be capable of developing a strength not
less than 20 percent in excess of the force in the
outstanding leg of the member, and the attachment of
the lug angle to the main angle shall be capable of

Design force resulting from a design bending

moment shall be considered to vary linearly
with the distance from the relevant centroidal
axes:
1)

In bearing type of bolt group plates in

the compression side of the neutral axis
83

IS 800:2007
Actual tensile stress, ~ = T,/A~

developing a strength not less than 40 percent in excess

of the force in the outstanding leg of the angle.

The permissible stress, ~,[ is smallest of the values as

obtained below:

10.12.3 In the case of channel members and the like,

the lug angles and their connection to the gusset or
other supporting
member
shall be capable
of
developing a strength of not less than 10 percent in
excess of the force not accounted for by the direct
connection of the member, and the attachment of the
lug angles to the member shall be capable of developing
20 percent in excess of that force.

a)

As governed by yielding of gross section

~,= 0.6~

b)

As governed by rupture of net section

1)

Plates under tension

&t= 0.69 T,n 1A,

2)

10.12.4 In no case shall fewer than two bolts, rivets or

equivalent welds be used for attaching the lug angle to
the gusset or other supporting member.

Angles under tension

&,= 0.69 T,. 1A,

c)

As governed by block shear

f,, = 0.69 T,, I A,

10.12.5 The effective connection of the lug angle shall,

as far as possible terminate at the end of the member
connected, and the fastening of the lug angle to the
main member shall preferably start in advance of the
direct connection of the member to the gusset or other
suppcting member.

where

10.12.6 Where lug angles are used to connect an angle

member, the whole area of the member shall be taken
as effective not withstanding
the requirements
of
Section 6 of this standard.

T,

= actual
tension
(service) load,

As

= gross area,

Tdn

working

design
strength
in- tension
of
respective plate/angle calculated in
accordance with 6.3, and

Tdb = design block shear strength

in
tension of respective
plate/angle
calculated in accordance with 6.4.

SECTION 11
WORKING STRESS DESIGN

11.3 Compression

Members

11.3.1 Actual Compressive

11.1 General
11.1.1 General design requirements
apply in this section.

under

Stress

The actual compressive stress,~ at working (service) load,

P, of a compression member shall be less than or equal to
the permissible compressive stress,fiC as given below:

of Section 3 shall

Actual compressive

11.1.2 Methods of structural analysis of Section 4 shall

also apply to this section. The elastic analysis method
shall be used in the working stress design.

The permissible

stress, fc = P, 1A.

compressive

stress, f,c = 0.60 fcd

where
11.1.3 The working stress shall be calculated applying
respective partial load factor for service load/working
load.
11.1.4 In load combinations involving wind or seismic
loads, the permissible
stresses in steel structural
members may be increased by 33 percent. For anchor
bolts and construction
loads this increase shall be
limited to 25 percent. Such an increase in allowable
stresses should not be considered if the wind or seismic
load is the major load in the load combination (such as
acting along with dead load alone).

A.

= effective sectional
and

area as defined in 7.3.2,

&d

stress as defined
= design compressive
7.1.2.1 (for angles see 7.5.1.2).

in

11.3.2 Design Details

Design of the compression
to 7.3.

members

shall conform

11.3.3 Column Bases

The provisions of 7.4 shall be followed for the design
of column bases, except that the thickness of a simple
column base, t$shall be calculated as:

11.2 Tension Members

11.2.1 Actual Tensile Stress

t,=

The actual tensile stress, j on the gross area of crosssection, A~ of plates, angles and other tension members
shall be less than or equal to the smaller value of
permissible tensile stresses,jat, as given below:

3 w (az 0.3b2 )\fb,

where
w

84

= uniform pressure from below on the slab

base due to axial compression;

IS 800:2007
a,b=

= permissible bending
equal to 0.75fY.

f,,

11.4.2

larger and smaller projection of the slab base

beyond the rectangle circumscribing
the
column, respectively; and

The actual shear stress, ~~ at working load, V, of a

bending member shall be less than or equal to the
permissible shear stress, r,~given below:

stress in column base

Actual shear stress, z~ = V. i A,

11.3.4 Angle Struts

The permissible

Provisions of 7.5 shall be used for design of angle

struts, except that the limiting actual stresses shall be
calculated in accordance with 11.3.1.
11.3.5 Laced and Battened

a)

Columns

When subject to shear buckling (see 8.4.2.1):

Vn

= design shear strength as given in 8.4.2.2(a), and

A,, = shear area of the cross-section

in 8.4.1.

as given

11.4.3 Plate Girder

The actual bending tensile and compressive

Provisions of 8.3,8.4,8.5,8.6
and 8.7 shall apply, for
the design of plate girder, except that the allowable
stresses shall conform to 11.4.1 and 11.4.2.

stresses,

fh,, ~~c at working (service) load moment, M, of a

bending member shall be less than or equaI to the
permissible bending stresses, ~,~t, ja~Crespectively, as
given herein. The actual bending stresses shall be
calculated as:
and

fbt= %

11.4.4 Box Girder

In design of box girder the provisions of 8.8 shall apply,
except that the allowable
bending stresses shall
conform to 11.4.1.

/%,

The permissible bending stresses, ~,~. or f,b~ shall be

the smaller of the values obtained from the following:
Laterally
supported
beams
bending about the minor axis:

and

11.5 Combined

Reduction in allowable moment need not be considered

under combined bending and shear.

Plastic and compact sections

JJ.orjt,, = 0.60~
Laterally unsupported
major axis bending:

beams

Stresses

11.5.1 Combined Bending and Shear

beams

11.5.2 Combined Bending and Axial Force

&,cor&,, = 0.66&
2) Semi-compact sections
b)

pure sheac

T,, = 0.70 Vm/Av

11.4.1 Bending Stresses

1)

When subjected

where

11.4 Members Subjected to Bending

a)

shear stress is given by:

T,, = 0.40 f,
b)

The laced and battened columns shall be designed in

accordance with 7.6 and 7.7, except that the actual
stresses shall be less than the permissible stresses given
in 11.3.1.

fk = M. IZ.C

Shear Stress in Bending Members

subjected

Members subjected to combined axial compression

bending shall be so proportioned
to satisfy
following requirements:

to

a)

and
the

Member stability requirement:

f&= 0.60 M, J Z,C

f,,, = 0.60 M, I Z.t
c)

Plates and solid rectangles

minor axis:

bending

about

fah =.Lb,= o.75fy

where

= yield stress of the sect; and

M~

= design bending
strength
of a
laterally unsupported beam bent
about major axis, calculated in
accordance with 8.2.2.

cmyf.y+K

f
++o.6Ky~

%fky

fix,

A<1O
T Lz-

~ K %zfw
,~-

JatIcy

Jacz

< ~.o

Jatcz

where

z.., Zet= elastic section modulus for the

cross section with respect to
extreme compression and tension
fibres, respectively;
f,

f
J-+o.6Ky
f =Y

Cmy,Cmz=
k=
fkyfbz

equivalent
uniform moment
factor as per Table 18,
applied axial compressive stress
under service load,

stresses
= applied compressive
due to bending about the major
(Y) and minor

(z) axis

member, respectively,
85

of the

IS 800:2007
-kpfacz

fabcy.&

allowable
axial compressive
stress as governed by buckling
about minor (y) and major (z)
axis, respectively,

formula, shall not exceed 0.9fY

allowable bending compressive

stresses due to bending about
minor (y) and major (z) axes of
the cross-section (see 11.4),

where

f.

f,+ f: f;+ 3T;

actual shear stress,

actual tensile stress,
yield stress, and

f,

Ky = 1 + (kY 0.2)nY< 1 + 0.8 nY,

f,
The value
to be used
the values

Kz = 1 + (l,Z 0.2)nz S 1 + 0.8 nZ,

O.lk,~ n,
1-

= Jf:+

(C~,, - 0.25) 21

actual bearing stress.

of permissible bending stresses fbCyand fkz
in the above formula shall each be lesser of
of the maximum allowable stresses f,k and

fab~in bending about appropriate

KL~ =

0.1 ny

(C~L, -

11.6 Connections

0.25)
11.6.1 All design provisions of Section 10, except for
the actual and permissible stress calculations, shall
apply.

where
nY nZ = ratio
stress
stress
and z
c MLT =

L,T

b)

of actual applied axial

to the allowable axial
for buckling about the y
axis, respectively;

equivalent
factor; and

uniform

non-dimensional
ratio (see 8.2.2).

11.6.2 Actual Stresses in Fasteners

11.6.2.1 Actual stress in bolt in shear, f,b should be
less than or equal to permissible stress of the bolt, f,,b
as given below:

moment

The actual stress in bolt in shear, Lb= V,b/A,b

slenderness

The permissible
Vn,b/A,b

Member strength requirement

+fk+f~z<lo

0.6 fy
fky
fk

stress in bolt in shear, f2.h

.. = 0.60

where

At a support he values J&Y and ~,,, shall be

calculated using laterally supported member
and shall satisfy:
fc

axis.

V,b =

actual shear force under working (service)

load,

Vn,b=

nominal shear capacity of the bolt as given

in 10.3.3, and

A,b = nominal plain shank area of the bolt.

11.5.3 Combined Bending and Axial Tension

11.6.2.2 Actual stress of bolt in bearing on any plate,

should be less than or equal to the permissible
bearing stress of the boltiplate, f,pb as given below:

Members subjected to both axial tension and bending

shall be proportioned so that the following condition
is satisfied:

fpb

Actual stress of bolt in bearing on any plate,

fpb = V,blApb
The permissible

where
&bty&btz

bearing stress of the bolt/plate,

fiP~ = 0.60 VnP~J APb

permissible
tensile
stresses
under
bending about minor (y) and major (z)
axis when bending alone is acting, as
given in 11.4.1.

where
V~Pb= nominal bearing capacity of a bolt on any
plate as given in 10.3.4, and
A pb

11.5.4 Combined Bearing, Bending and Shear Stresses

nominal bearing area of the bolt on any plate.

11.6.2.3 Actual tensile stress of the bolt,~b should be

less than or equal to permissible tensile stress of the

Where a bearing stress is combined with tensile or

compressive stress, bending and shear stresses under
the most unfavorable
conditions
of loading, the
equivalent
stress, f, obtained from the following

boh,f.,b as given below:

Actual tensile stress of the bolt, ~b = T, / A,~
86

IS 800:2007
The permissible

without premature

tensile stress of the bolt,

failure.

12.2 Load and Load Combinations

where
T<

tension in boltunder

Tnb

design tensile capacity ofaboltas

10.3.5, and

12.2.1 Earthquake loads shall be calculated

IS 1893 (Part 1), except that the reduction
recommen-ded
in 12.3 may be used.

working (service) load,

given in

12.2.2 In the limit state design of frames resisting

earthquake loads, the load combinations shall conform
to Table 4.

A,~ = nominal plain shank area of the bolt.

11.6.2.4 Actual compressive or tensile or shear stress
of a weld,~W should be less than or equal to permissible
stress of the weld, ~~Was given below:
The permissible

12.2.3 In addition the following load combination shall

be considered
as required
in 12.5.1.1,
12.7.3.1,
12.11.2.2 and 12.11.3.4:

stress of the weld,~,W = 0.6~Wn

where
j&

= nominal
calculated

shear

capacity

of the weld

as

a)

1.2 Dead Load (DL) + 0.5 Live Load (LL) *

2,5 Earthquake Load (EL); and

b)

0.9 Dead Load (DL) & 2.5 Earthquake

(EL).

in 10.5.7.1.1.

11.6.2.5 If the bolt is subjected to combined shear and

tension, the actual shear and axial stresses calculated
in accordance with 11.6.2.1 and 11.6.2.3 do not exceed
the respective permissible stresses ~a,~andf,[b then the
expression given below should satisfy:

12.3 Response

[21+[2]10

where

.f,b,~b = actual
shear and
respectively, and

tensile

as per
factors

stresses

Reduction

Factor

For structures
designed
and detailed as per the
provision of this section, the response reduction factors
specified in Table 23 may be used in conjunction with
the provision in IS 1893 for calculating the design
earthquake forces.
Table 23 Response Reduction Factor
Building System
sl

Lateral Load Resisting

No.
(1)

i.sbt~aib= permissible hear and tensile tresses

Load

(R) for

System

(2)

R
(?)

respectively.
O

11.6.3 Stresses in Welds

Braced
a)

11.6.3.1 Actual stresses in the throat area of fillet welds

shall be less than or equal to permissible stresses, faw
as given below:

b)

c)
ii)

Moment
a)

faw = 0.4 f,

b)

11.6.3.2 Actual stresses in the butt welds shall be less

than the permissible stress as governed by the parent
metal welded together.

Frame Systems:

OrdtnaryConcentricallyBracedFrames
(OCBF)
SpecialConcentricallyBracedFrame
(SCBF)
EccentricallyBracedFrame(EBF)

4
4.5
5

Frame System:

OrdinaryMomentFrame(OMF)
SpecialMomentFrame(SMF)

12.4 Connections,

4
5

Joints and Fasteners

12.4.1 All bolts used in frames designed to resist

earthquake loads shall be fully tensioned high strength
friction grip (HSFG) bolts or turned and fitted bolts.

SECTION 12
DESIGN AND DETAILING FOR
EARTHQUAKE
LOADS

12.4.2 All welds used in frames designed to resist

earthquake loads shall be complete penetration butt welds,
except in column splices, which shall conform to 12.5.2.

12.1 GeneraI
Steel frames shall be so designed and detailed as to
give them adequate strength, stability and ductility to
resist severe earthquakes
in all zones classified in
IS 1893 (Part 1) without collapse. Frames, which form
a part of the gravity load resisting system but are not
intended to resist the lateral earthquake loads, need
not satisfy the requirements of this section, provided
they can accommodate
the resulting deformation

12.4.3 Bolted joints shall be designed not to share load

in combination with welds on the same faying surface.
12.5 Columns
12.5.1 Column Strength
When PjP~ is greater than 0.4, the requirements
in 12.5.1.1 and 12.5.1.2 shall be met.
87

IS 800:2007
Where
P,

= required
compressive
member, and

strength

Pd = design stress in axial

obtained from 7.1.2.

wit,h importance factor greater than unity (1> 1.0) in

seismic zone III.

of the

compression

12.7.1.2 The provision

in this section apply for
diagonal and X-bracing only. Specialist literature
may be consulted for V and inverted V-type bracing.
K-bracing shall not be permitted in systems to resist
earthquake.

as

12.5.1.1 The required axial compressive

and axial
tensile strength in the absence of applied moment, shall
be determined from the load combination in 12.2.3.

12.7.2 Bracing Members

12.5.1.2 The required strength determined in 12.5.1.1

need not exceed either of the maximum load transferred
to the column considering
1.2 times the nominal
strength of the connecting beam or brace element, or
the resistance of the foundation to uplift.

12.7.2.1 The slenderness

exceed 120.

12.7.2.2 The required compressive strength of bracing

member shall not exceed 0.8 times P~, where P~ is the
design strength in axial compression (see 7.1.2).

12.5.2 Column Splice

12.7.2.3 Along any line of bracing, braces shall be

provided such that for lateral loading in either direction,
the tension braces will have to resist between 30 to 70
percent of the total lateral load,

12.5.2.1 A partial-joint penetration groove weld may

be provided in column splice, such that the design
strength of the joints shall be at least equal to 200 percent
of the required strefigth.

12.7.2.4 Bracing cross-section can be plastic, compact

or semi-compact, but not slender, as defined in 3.7.2.

12.5.2.2 The minimum required strength for each

flange splice shall be 1.2 times j#f as showing Fig.
20, where A~ is the area of each flange in the smaller
connected column.

12.7.2.5 For all built-up braces, the spacing of tack

fasteners
shall be such that the unfavorable
slenderness ratio of individual element, between such
fasteners, shall not exceed 0.4 times the governing
slenderness ratio of the brace itself. Bolted connections
shall be avoided within the middle one-fourth of the
clear brace length (0.25 times the length in the middle).

12.6 Storey Drift

The storey drift limits shall conform to IS 1893. The
deformation compatibility
of members not designed
to resist seismic lateral load shall also conform to
IS 1893 (Part 1).
Pmjn= 1.2 fYA,

12.7.2.6 The bracing members shall be designed so that

gross area yielding (see 6.2) and not the net area rupture
(see 6.3) would govern the design tensile strength.

Pmh = 1.2 fyA ,

of bracing members shall not

12.7.3 Bracing Connections

12.7.3.1 End connections in bracings shall be designed
to withstand the minimum of the following:
A tensile force in the bracing equal to 1.2f#~;
Force in the brace due to load combinations
in 12.2.3; and

c)

Maximum force that can be transferred to the

brace by the system.

1[

JI

FIG. 20 PARTIALPENETRATION
GROOVEWELD IN

12.7.3.2 The connection should be checked for tension

rupture and block shear under the load determined
in 12.7.3.1.

COLUMN SPLICE

12.7 Ordinary
(OCBF)

a)
b)

Concentrically

Braced

Frames

12.7.1 Ordinary concentrically braced frames (OCBF)

should be shown to withstand inelastic deformation
corresponding to a joint rotation of at least 0.02 radians
without degradation in strength and stiffness below the
full yield value. Ordintuy concentrically braced frames
meeting the requirements
of this section shall be
deemed to satisfy the required inelastic deformation.

12.7.3.3 The connection shall be designed to withstand

a moment of 1.2 times the full plastic moment of the
braced section about the buckling axis.

12.7.1.1 Ordinary concentrically braced frames shall

not be used in seismic zones IV and V and for buildings

12.8.1 Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF)

should be shown to withstand inelastic deformation

12.7.3.4 Gusset plates shall be checked for buckling

out of their plane.
12.8 Special Concentrically

88

Braced Frames

(SCBF)

IS 800:2007
12.8.3.4 Gusset plates shall be checked for buckling
out of their plane.

corresponding to a joint rotation of at least 0.04 radians

without degradation in strength and stiffness below the
full yield value. Special concentrically braced frames
meeting the requirements
of this section shall be
deemed to satisfy the required inelastic deformation.

12.8.4 Column
12.8.4.1
The column
sections
used in special
concentrically braced frames (SCBF) shall be plastic
as defined in 3.7.2.

12.8.1.1 Special concentrically braced frames (SCBF)

mav. be used in anv. seismic zone [see IS 1893 (Part 1)1
and for any building (importance-factor
value).

12.8.4.2
third of
designed
addition,
develop
smaller
nominal
section.

12.8.1.2 The provision in this section apply for diagonal

and X-bracing only. Specialist
literature
may be
consulted for V and inverted V-type bracing. K-bracing
shall not be permitted in system to resist earthquake.
12.8.2 Bracing Members
12.8.2.1 Bracing members
steel of IS 2062 only.

shall be made of E250B

12.9 Eccentrically

12.8.2.2 The slenderness of bracing members shall not

exceed 160 (only hangers).

Braced Frames (EBF)

Eccentrically braced frames (EBF) shall be designed

in accordance with specialist literature.

12.8.2.3 The required compressive strength of bracing

member shall not exceed the design strength in axial
compression PA(see 7.1.2)

12.10 Ordinary

Moment

Frames

(OMF)

(OMF) should be
12.10.1
Ordinary
moment
frames
shown
to withstand
inelastic
deformation
corresponding to a joint rotation of 0.02 radians without
degradation in strength and stiffness below the full yield
value (MP). Ordinary moment frames meeting the
requirements of this section shall be deemed to satisfv.
the required inelastic deformation.

12.8.2.4 Along any line of bracing, braces shall be

provided such that for lateral loading in either direction,
the tension braces will resist between 30 to 70 percent
of the load.
12.8.2.5 Braced cross-section
in 3.7.2.

Splices shall be located within the middle onethe column clear height. Splices shall be
for the forces that can be transferred to it. In
splices in columns shall be designed to
at least the nominal shear strength of the
connected member and 50 percent of the
flexural strength of the smaller connected

shall be plastic as defined

12.10.1.1 Ordinary moment frames (OMF) shall not

be used in seismic zones IV and V and for buildings
with importance factor greater than unity (1 > 1.0) in
seismic zone III.

12.8.2.6 In built-up braces, the spacing of tack

connections shall be such that the slenderness ratio of
individual element between such connections shall not
exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness ratio of
the brace itself. Bolted connection shall be avoided
within the middle one-fourth of the clear brace length
(0.25 times the length, in the middle).

12.10.2 Beam-to-Column

Joinls and Connections

Connections are permitted to be rigid or semi-rigid

moment connections and should satisfy the criteria
in 12.10.2.1 to 12.10.2.5.

12.8.2.7 The bracing members shall be designed so that

gross area yielding (see 6.2) and not the net area rupture
(see 6.3) would govern the design tensile strength.

12.10.2.1
Rigid moment connections
should be
designed to withstand a moment of at least 1.2 times
of either the full plastic moment of the connected beam
or the maximum moment that can be delivered by the
beam to the joint due to the induced weakness at the
ends of the beam, whichever is less.

12.8.3 Bracing Connections

12.8.3.1 Bracing end connections shall be designed to
withstand the minimum of the following:

12.8.3.2 The connection should be checked for tension

rupture and block shear under the load determined
in 12.8.3.1.

12.10.2.2 Semi-rigid connections should be designed

to withstand either a moment of at least 0.5 times the
full plastic moment of the connected beam or the
maximum moment that can be delivered by the system,
whichever is less. The design moment shall be achieved
within a rotation of 0.01 radians. The information given
in Annex F may be used for checking.

12.8.3.3 The connection shall be designed to withstand

a moment of 1.2 times the full plastic moment of the
braced section about the critical buckling axis.

12.10.2.3 The stiffness and strength of semi-rigid

connections shall be accounted for in the design and
the overall stability of the frame shall be ensured.

a)

A tensile force in the bracing equal to 1. l~#~;

and

b)

Maximum force that can be transferred

brace by the system.

to the

89

IS 800:2007
12.10.2.4 The rigid and semi-rigid connections should
be designed to withstand a shear resulting from the
load combination
1.2DL + 0.5LL plus the shear
corresponding
to the design
moment
defined
in 12.10.2.1 and 12.10.2.2, respectively.

A
/
/

12.10.2.5 In rigid fully welded connections, continuity

plates (tension stiffener, see 8.7) of thickness equal to
or greater than the thickness of the beam flange shall
be provided and welded to the column flanges and web.

dp

12.11.1 Special moment frames (SMF) shall be made

of E250B steel of IS 2062 and should be shown to
withstand inelastic deformation corresponding
to a
joint rotation of 0.04 radians without degradation in
strength and stiffness below the full yield value (MP).

FIG. 21 CONTINUITYPLATES

Special moment frames meeting the requirements of

this section shall be deemed to satisfy the required
inelastic deformation.

12.11,2,5 Continuity plates (tension stiffner) (see 8.7)

shall be provided in all strong axis welded connections
except in end plate connection.

12,11.1,1 Special moment frames (SMF) maybe used

in any seismic zone [see IS 1893 (Part 1)] and for any
buildings (importance-factor
values).

12.11,3 Beam and Column Limitation

12.11.3.1
Beam and column sections shall be either
plastic or compact as defined in 3.7.2. At potential
plastic hinge locations, they shall necessarily be plastic.

Joints and Connections

12.11.2.1 All beam-to-column

connections shall be
rigid (see Annex F) and designed to withstand a
moment of at least 1.2 times the full plastic moment of
the connected beam. When a reduced beam section is
used, its minimum flexural strength shall be at least
equal to 0.8 times the full plastic moment of the
unreduced section.

12.11.3.2 The section selected for beams and columns

shall satisfy the following relation:

12.11.2.2
The connection
shall be designed
to
withstand a shear resulting from the load combination
1.2DL + 0.5LL plus the shear resulting from the
application of 1.2MP in the same direction, at each end
of the beam (causing double curvature bending). The
shear strength need not exceed the required value
corresponding to the load combination in 12.2.3.

where

12.11.2.3 In column strong axis connections (beam and

column web in the same plane), the panel zone shall
be checked for shear buckling in accordance with 8.4.2
at the design shear defined in 12.11.2.2. Column web
doubler plates or diagonal stiffeners may be used to
strengthen the web against shear buckling.

= sum of the moment capacity in the

column above and below the beam
centreline; and

~MP,

= sum of the moment capacity in the

beams at the intersection of the beam and
column centrelines.

12.11.3.3 Lateral support to the column at both top

and bottom beam flange levels shall be provided so as
to resist at least 2 percent of the beam flange strength,
except for the case described in 12.11.3.4.
12.11.3.4 A plane frame designed as non-sway in the
direction perpendicular to its plane, shall be checked
for buckling, under the load combination specified
in 12.2.3.

t > (dp+bp)/90
where
t

= thickness of column web or doubler plate,

dP

= panel-zone
and

bP = panel-zone

~MP

In tall buildings, higher mode effects shall be accounted

for in accordance with specialist literature.

12.11.2.4 The individual thickness of the column webs

and doubler plates, shall satisfy the following:

depth between continuity

Ti

bP

12.11 Special Moment Frames (SMF)

12.11.2 Beam-to-Column

CONTINUITY
PLATE

12.12 Column

Bases

plate,
12.12.1 Fixed column bases and their anchor bolts
should be designed to withstand a moment of 1.2 times

width between column flanges.

90

IS 800:2007
environment
as in normal atmospheric
condition
and suitably protected
against
corrosion (pit depth c 1 mm).

the full plastic moment capacity of the column section.

The anchor bolts shall be designed to withstand the
combined action of shear and tension as well as prying
action, if any.
12.12.2 Both fixed and hinged column bases shall be
designed to withstand the full shear under any load
case or 1.2 times the shear capacity of the column
section, whichever is higher.
SECTION 13
FATIGUE

is not subjected
150 C.

to temperature

g)

Transverse fillet or butt weld connects plates

of thickness not greater than 25 mm.

h)

Holes shall not be made in members

connections subjected to fatigue.

and

if condition

The values obtained from the standard S-N curve shall

be modified by a capacity reduction factor p. when
plates greater than 25 mm in thickness are joined
together by transverse fillet or butt welding, given by:

Structure and structural elements subject to loading

that could lead to fatigue failure shall be designed
against fatigue
as given in this section,
This shall
however not cover the following:
Corrosion fatigue,

Structure
exceeding

Fatigue need not be investigated,

in 13.2.2.3, 13.5.1 or 13.6 is satisfied.

13.1 General

a)

f)

p,=

(25/tP)025 <1.0

where

b)

Low cycle (high stress) fatigue,

c)

Thermal fatigue,

d)

Stress corrosion

e)

Effects of high temperature

f)

Effects of low temperature

temperature).

tp

cracking,
(> 1500 C), and

13.2.2 Design Spectrum

13.1.1 For the purpose of design against fatigue,

different details (of members and connections)
are
classified under different fatigue class. The design
stress range corresponding to various number of cycles,
are given for each fatigue class. The requirements of
this section shall be satisfied with, at each critical
location of the structure subjected to cyclic loading,
considering relevant number of cycles and magnitudes
of stress range expected to be experienced during the
life of the structure.

13.2.2.1 Stress evaluation

Design stress shall be determined by elastic analysis
of the structure to obtain stress resultants and the local
stresses may be obtained by a conventional
stress
analysis method. The normal and shear stresses shall
be determined considering all design actions on the
members, but excluding stress concentration due to the
geometry of the detail. The stress concentration effect
is accounted
for in detail category classification
(see Table 26). The stress concentration, however, not
characteristic
of the detail shall be accounted for
separately in the stress calculation.

13.2 Design
13.2.1 Reference Design Condition
The standard S-N curves for each detail category are
given for the following conditions:
Detail is located in a redundant load path,
wherein local failure at that detail alone will
not lead to overall collapse of the structure.

b)

Nominal stress history at the local point in

the detail is estimated/evaluated
by a
conventional
method without taking into
account the local stress concentration effects
due to the detail.

c)

Load cycles are not highly irregular.

d)

Details are accessible

regular inspection.

e)

Structure is exposed to only mildly corrosive

for and subject

in mm of the thicker plate

No thickness
correction
is necessary
when full
penetration butt weld reinforcements
are machined
flush and proved free of defect through non-destructive
testing.

(< brittle transition

a)

= actual thickness
being joined.

In the fatigue design of trusses made of members with

open sections, in which the end connections are not
pinned, the stresses due to secondary bending moments
shall be taken into account, unless the slenderness ratio
(KZfr), of the member is greater than 40.
In the determination
of stress range at the end
connections between hollow sections, the effect of
connection
stiffness
and eccentricities
may be
disregarded, provided
a)

to

91

the calculated stress range is multiplied by

appropriate factor given in Table 24(a) in the
case of circular hollow section connections
and Table 24(b) in the case of rectangular
holIow section connections.

,,,,,,

-.

..,..

IS 800:2007
b)

thedesign throat thickness ofiillet weldsin

the joints is greater than the wall thickness of
the connected member.

value, the partial safety factor for loads in the evaluation

of stress range in fatigue design shall be taken as 1.0.
13.2.3.2 Partial safety factor forfatigue

13.2.2.2 Design stress spectrum

Partial safety factor for strength is influenced by

consequences of fatigue damage and level of inspection
capabilities.

In the case of loading events producing non-uniform

stress range cycle, the stress spectrum may be obtained
by a rational method, such as rain flow counting or
an equivalent method.

13.2.3.3 Based on consequences

of fatigue failure,
component details have been classified as given in
Table 25 and the corresponding
partial safety factor
for fatigue strength shall be used:

13.2.2.3 Low fatigue

Fatigue assessment is not required for a member,
connection or detail, if normal and shear design stress
ranges, f satisfy the following conditions:

a)

Fail-safe structural component/detail

is the
one where local failure of one component due
to fatigue crack does not result in the failure
of the structure due to availability of alternate
load path (redundant system).

b)

Non-fail-safe structural component/detail

is
the one where local failure of one component
leads rapidly to failure of the structure due to
its non-redundant nature.

or if the actual number of stress cycles, N~c, satisfies

()

27 I ymfi

N~C < 5X106

Yrnf

where
%, = Partial

safety factors for strength and

load, respectively (see 13.2.3), and

k,,

Table 25 Partial

Safety Factors
Strength (ymn)
(Clause 13.2.3.3)

= actual fatigue stress range for the detail.

S1No.

Table 24 (a) Multiplying Factors for Calculated

Stress Range (Circular Hollow Sections)
(Clause 13.2.2.1)
sl

No.

Type of Connection

Chords

Verticals

Diagonals

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

K type

1.5

1.5
1.5

1.0
1.8

1.3

{ N type
K type
{ N type

1.0

1.2

1.65

1.25

i)

Gap
connections

ii) Overlap
connections

1.5

strength (Y~fo

Inspection

and Access

for Fatigue

Consequence

of Failure

Fail-Safe Non-fail-Safe
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

i)

Periodic inspection, maintenance and accessibility to

detail is good

1.00

1.25

ii)

Periodic inspection, maintenance and accessibility to

detail is poor

1.15

1.35

I.4

13.3 Detail Category

Table 24 (b) Multiplying Factors for Calculated
Stress Range (Rectangular Hollow Sections)
(Clause 13.2.2.1)
SI

Types of Joint

Chords

Verticals

Diagonals

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

K type

1.5

1.0

1.5

N type
K type

1.5

2.2

1.6

1.5

1.0

1.3

{ N type

1.5

2.0

I .4

Tables 26 (a) to (d) indicate the classification

of
different details into various categories for the purpose
of assessing fatigue strength. Details not classified in
the table may be treated as the lowest detail category
of a similar detail, unless superior fatigue strength is
proved by testing and/or analysis.

No.

(1)
i)

Gap
connections

ii) Overlap
connections

Holes in members and connections

loading shall not be made:
a)

using punching in plates

greater than 12 mm unless
punched and subsequently
the affected material around
and

b)

using gas cutting unless the holes are reamed

to remove the material in the heat affected
zone.

13.2.3 Partial Safety Factors

13.2.3.1 Partial safety factor for actions

and their

etiects (fifl)
Unless and otherwise the uncertainty in the estimation
of the applied actions and their effects demand a higher
92

subjected to fatigue

having thickness
the holes are subreamed to remove
the punched hole,

IS 800:2007
13.4 Fatigue Strength

~=j.o

The fatigue strength of the standard detail for the

norroal or shear fatigue stress range, not corrected for
effects discussed in 13.2.1, is given below (see also
Fig. 22 and Fig. 23):
a)

b)

$=.fk

when

Shear stress

where

X 106

N~cS5

r 5x1O

~, ~t = design normal and shear fatigue s~ess

range of the detail, respectively, for
life cycle of N~c, and

fN~c

~fn, Zfn= normal and shear fatigue strength

of the detail for 5 x 10 cycles, for
the detail category (see Table 26).

5 x 106 S Nsc S 108

Table 26 (a) Detail Category Classification, Group 1 Non-welded

(Clauses 13.2.2.1 and 13.3)

SI
No.

Detail
Category

(1)

(~)

IN,C

~~ =7~n55x10elN~c
r

Normal stress range

when

Y 5xI0

Constructional

Details

Details
Description

Illustration (see Note)

(4)

(3)

Rolled and extruded products

1!, ::::::::%)
iii)

(1)

(3)

Sharp edges, surface and rolling flaws to be

removed by grinding in the direction of applied

i)

Seamless tubes

2)

tress

(3)

(4) and (5): Stress range calculated On the

gross section and on the net section
connections shallone-sided
be avoided or
the effect
te:=:
cover
ateof
the eccentricity taken into account in
calculating stresses
Material with gas-cut or sheared edges with no

4)4X
.
ii)

I 03

.
.
.
.
.
.
>.
. .
. .
. .
\

(5)

draglines
(6): All hardened material and visible signs
of edge discontinuities
machining or grinding
applied stress.

to be removed by
in the direction of

(-

Material with machine gas-cut edges

draglines or manual gas-cut material
iii)

92

with

(7) : Corners and visible signs of edge

discontinuities to be removed by grinding in the
direction of the applied stress.

NOTE The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is to be
calculatedon a plane normal to the arrow.

93

IS 800:2007
Table 26 (b) Detail Category

Classification,

Group 2 Welded, Details Not in Hollow Sections

(Clauses 13.2.2.1 and 13.3)

SI

Detail

{0.

Category

,1)

Constructional

Details

Illustration(seeNote)

Description

(3)

(4)

(2)

Welded plate I-section and

continuous longitudinal welds
~

QA

(8)&(9)

box girders

with

:mnmof~ntinuousautomatic

longitudinal fillet or butt welds carried out from both

i)

sides and all welds not having un-repaired stop-start

positions.

(8)

92

Q
Welded plate I-section and
continuous longitudinal welds

box girders

(10) & (11) : Zones of continuous

automatic

with
butt

welds made tlcsm one side only with a continuous

backing bar and all welds not having un-repaired
,,,

ak

(11)

(lo)

(12)

(12): Zones of continuous longitudinal fillet or butt

welds carried out fkom both sides but containing
stop-start positions. For continuous manual
longitudinal tilIet or butt welds carried out from both
sides, use Detail Category 92.
Welded plate I-section and
continuous longitudinal welds

iii)

stoP-s@positions

girders

with

(13) : Zones of continuous longitudinal welds carried

66

out ffom one side only, with or without stop-start

positions.

(13)

Intermittent

iv)

box

longitudinal

welds

(14) : Zones of intermittent longitudinal welds

.
r

59

(14)

intermittent
\

v)

longitudinal

welds

(15) : Zones containing cope holes in longitudinally

welded T-joints. Cope hole not to be tilled with

weld.

52

Q
(15)

Transverse

vi)

83

and ends of welds ground flush in the direction of

stress. Welds to be made from two sides.
(16) : Transverse splices in plates, flats and rolled
sections having the weld reinforcement ground flush
to p}ate surface. 100 percent NDT inspection, and
weld surface to be ffee of exposed porosity in the
weld metal.

(17)

(18)

butt welds (complete penetration)

Weldrun-off tabs to be used, subsequently removed

(17) : Plate girders welded as in (16) before

assembly.

=(la)

(18) : Transverse splices as in (16) with reduced or

tapered transition with taper S1:4

94

..______

IS 800:2007
Table 26 (b) (Continued)

51
io.

Detail
Category

1)

(2)

Constructional

Detaits

Illustration (see Note)

Description

(3)

(4)
Transverse

butt welds (complete penetration)

Welds inn-off tabs to be used, subsequently removed

and ends of welds ground flush in the direction of

stress. Welds to be made from two sides.

\~
(19)

(19) : Transversesplices of
(20)

66

iii)

plates, rolled sections or

plate girders.
(20) : Transverse splice of rolled sections or welded
plate girders, without cope hole. With cope hole use
Detail Category 52, asin(15).

-k

(21): Transversesplices in plates m flats bekrgtapcmd

in width or in tldcknesswherethe taper iss 1:4.

(21)

Transverse

59

/iii)

butt welds (complete penetration)

Weld run-off tabs to be used, subsequently removed

and ends of welds ground flush in the direction of
stress. Welds to be made from two sides.

.-

: Transverse splices as in (21) with taper in

width or thickness >1:4 but <1:2.5.

(22)

(22)

Transverse

butt welds (complete penetration)

(23) : Transverse butt-welded splices made on a

backing bar. The end of the fillet weld of the backing

I-

strip shall stop short by more than 10 mm from the

ix)

52

~fim

e~l

::::::
(24): Transversebutt welds as per (23) with taper on

Transverse

butt welds (complete penetration)

(25) : Transverse butt welds as in (23) where fillet

welds end closer than 10 mm to plate edge.

x)

37

~4=Omm
(25)

Cruciform joints with load-carrying

welds

(26) : Full penetration welds with intermediate plate

NDT inspected and free of defects. Maximum
misalignment of plates either side of joint to be
<0.15 times the thickness of intermediate plate.

xi)
+

52

(26)

(27) : Partial penetration or fillet welds with stress

range calculated on plate area.
(28) : Partial penetration or fillet welds with stres:
range calculated on throat area of weld.

xii)
:

:*
(27)6 (28)

Overlapped
(29)

~iii)

46

welded joints

Fillet welded lap joint, with welds arrc

overlapping elements having a design capacit)

greater than the main plate. Stress in the main platt
to be calculated on the basis of area shown in th{
illustration.

--

(29)

95

1S 800:2007

Table 26 (b) (Concluded)

SI
No.

Detail
Category

(1)

(2)

Constructional

Details

Illustration (see Note)

Description

(3)

(4)
Overlapped

xiv)

41

(30)

(30) : Fillet welded lap joint, with welds and main

plate both having a design capacity greater than the
overlapping elements.

T
\

>lOmm

w
xv)

(31)

33
66
59

x~i)

weld joints

(31) : Fillet welded lap joint, with main plate and

overlappingelementsboth having a design capacity
greater than the weld.

(30)a (31)

(32)

(33)

1/3 < r/b

h,
7

52

ls50mm
50</ <100 mm

l16<r/b<l13

37

100 mm <1

Welded attachments
Longitudina[welds

(non-load carrying welds)

(32) : Longitudinal fillet welds. Class of detail varies

according to the length of the attachment weld as

\
Q
(32)

noted.
(33) : Gusset welded to the edge of a plate or beam

33

flange. Smooth transition radios (r), formed by

machining or flame cutting plus grinding. Class of
detail varies according to r)b ratio as noted.

r/b<l/6

(33)
Welded attachments

xvii)

59

(34) : Shear connectors on base material (failure in

base material).

m
(34)

Transverse
59

(35) : Transverse fillet welds with the end of the

weld 210 mm from the edge of the plate.

t<12mm

(36) : Vertical stiffeners welded to a beam or plate

girder flange or web by continuous or intermittent
welds. to the case of webs carrying combined
bending and shear design actions, the fatigue
strength shall be determined using the stress range of
the principal stresses.

(35)

xviii)
52

welds

ZIomm

t~12mm

(37) : Diaphragms of box girders welded to the

flange or web by continuous or intermittent welds.

(36)

~.=.
\
;! . j:
(37)

37
xix)

27

rfor tp
<25 mm

p
1,

ff m tP

>25 mm

(38)

Cover plates in beams and plate girders

End zones of single or multiple welded cover

plates, with or without a weld across the end. For a
reinforcing plate wider than the flange, an end weld
is essential.

(38) :

Welds loaded in shear

(39) : Filletweldstransmittingshear. Stressrangeto
xx)

67

be calculated on weld throat area.

~i
(40)

(39)

(40) : Stud welded shear connectors (failure in the

weld) loaded in shear (the shear stress range to be
calculated on the nominal section of the stud).

NOTE The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is to be
calculated on a plane normal to the arrow.

96

...-.______

-,.

IS 800:2007
Table 26 (c) Detail Category Classification,
(Clauses 13.2.2.1 and 13.3)

sl
No.

(1)

Group 3 Bolts

Constructional

Details

Detail Category
Illustration [see Note )

Description

(3)

(4)

(2)

Bolts in

shear (8.8fTBbolting category only)

(41) : Shear stress range calculated on the

minordiameterarea of the bolt (J,).
i)

NOTE If the shear on the joint is

insufficient to cause slip of the joint the

83

shear in the bolt need not reconsidered

in

fatigue.

=u(41)

Bolts and threaded rods in tension (tensile

stress to be calculated on the tensile stress
area, A,)

(42) : Additional forces dueto prying effects

shall be taken into account. For tensionalbolts,

ii)

the stress range depends on the connection

geometry.
NOTE In connections with tensioned
bolts, the change in the force in the bolts is

27

often less than the applied force, but this

effect is dependent on thegeometty of the
connection. It isnotnormally required that
any allowance for fatigue be made in
calculating the required number of bolts in
such connections.

Uo

i
(42)

NOTE The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress mnge is to be
calculated on a plane normal to the arrow.

1000

Stressrange corresponding
to 2X106cycles

..-

II

20

- at 5x106 eyeles
[Detailcategory( fm)]

1
0 105

34561062

t I 1 I
34561072

1
3456108

NUMBEROF STRESS CYCLES (fJsc)

FIG. 22 S-N

CURVE

FOR NORMAL STRESS

97

Table 26 (d) Detail Category Classification, Group 4

Welded Details in Hollow Sections
(Clause 13.2.2.1 and 13.3)
sl
No.
(1)

Detail Category

Constructional

Details

Illustration (see Note)

Description

(3)

(4)

(2)
103

Continuous

automatic longitudinal

welds

(43) : No stop-starts, or as manufactured, proven free to

i)
Q%

etachabediscontinuities
(43)

66
(t> 8 mm)

ii)

Transverse

butt welds

(44) : Butt-welded end-to-end connection of circular

hollow sections.

52
(r< 8 mm)

ae

NOTE Height of the weld reinforcementless

than 10 percent of weld with smooth transitionto

the plate surface. Welds made in flat position and

(44)

proven free to detachable discontinuities.

iii)

52
(t> 8 mm)

t
B

41
(f< 8 mm)

(45)

41
(t28

(45) : Butt-welded end-to-end connection Ofrectangular

hollow sections

Butt welds to intermediate

mm)

iv)

!3:D

(t< Vmm)

plate

(46) : Circular hollow sections, end-to-end butt-welded

with an intermediate plate.

(46)
(47) Rectangular hollow sections, end-to-end butt
welded with art intermediate plate

37
(t> 8 mm)
=~

v)
30
(t< 8 mm)

(47)

Welded attachments (non-load-carrying)

(48) : Circular or rectangular hollow section, fillet
welded to another section, Section width parallel to
vi)

52

s~essdrection~,oomrn

%77
J

~EcTlc)NwcmH
<1 OOmm
(48)

33
(t< 8

Fillet welds to intermediate

mm)
rzj

vii)
(t< ?mm)

(49)

29
(/> 8 mm)
viii)

27
(t< 8 mm)

plate

(49) : Circularhollowsections,end-to-endfillet welded

with an intermediateplate.

(50) : Rectangular hollow sections, end-to-end fillet

welded with an intermediate plate.

Ixj

Q
(50)

NOTE The arrow indicates tbe location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is to be
calculated on a plane normal tO the arrow.

98

-_

IS 800:2007
13.5 Fatigue Assessment

13.5.2.3 Constant stress range

The design fatigue strength for Nsc life cycles ~fd! fd)
may be obtained from the standard fatigue strength
for Nsc cycles by multiplying with comection factor,
p,, for thickness, as mentioned in 13.2.1 and dividing
by partial safety factor given in Table 25.

The actual normal and shear stress range f and z at a

to NsC cycles in life
point of the structure subjected
shall satisfy.
f ffd = P,.f#%ft
~S

13.5.1 Exemptions

fd = #r f IYmft

where
At any point in a structure if the actual normal and
shear stress range~and ~ are less than the design fatigue
strength range corresponding to 5 x 106 cycles with
appropriate partial safety factor, no further assessment
for fatigue is necessary at that point.

v,

fi, Tf = normal and shear fatigue strength ranges for

the actual life cycle, Nsc, obtained from 13.4.
13.5.2.4 Variable stress range

13.5.2.1 The maximum (absolute) value of the normal

and shear stresses shall never exceed the elastic limit

Fatigue assessment at any point in a structure, wherein

variable stress ranges jfi or 7$ for ni number of cycles
(i =1 to r ) are encountered, shall satisfy the following:

(f,, ~,) for the material under cyclic loading.

stress range shall not exceed

1.5$ for normal stresses and 1.5 f,ifi

stresses under any circumstance.

factor (see 13.2.1),

partial safety factor against fatigue failure,

given in Table 25, and

71nf =

13.5.2 Stress Limitations

13.5.2.2 The maximum

= correction

a)

for the shear

For normal stress (f)

IJJ
1Q

!JJ
cc

40 ~~Detail

cateaotv

1 I

o 105

34561062

I
I

I I II

TI --H_Hk

I I II

(ff~c )

FIG. 23 S-N CURVE FOR SHEAR STRESS

99

3456108

34561072

NUMBER OF STRESS CYCLES

I I I

IS 800:2007
1/3

I
~

n, f, + ~ njffi

&q = =

b)

For shear stresses (t)

where

=~n
,=1

n=

I-I

ffi>fg = stress ranges falling above and

below the f~n, the stress range
corresponding
to the detail at
5 x 106 number of life cycles.

where yf is the summation

upper limit of all the
normal stress ranges (J) having magnitude lesser
than (pC~~n/~~~t)for that detail and the lower limit of
all the normal stress ranges ~j) having magnitude
greater than (PC~#y~J
for the detail. In the above
summation all normal stress ranges, f,, and Zi having
magnitude less than 0.55pC ~fn, and 0.55pC qn may
be disregarded,

DESIGN

SECTlON
ASSISTED

14
BY TESTING

14.1 Need for Testing

13.6 Necessity for Fatigue Assessment
a)

1)

Members
loads,

2)

Member subjected to repeated

cycles from vibrating machinery,

3)

Members subjected
to wind induced
oscillations of a large number of cycles
in life, and

4)

b)

Testing of structures, members or components of

structures is not required when designed in accordance
with this standard. Testing may be accepted as an
alternative to calculations or may become necessary
in special circumstances.

Fatigue assessment is not normally required

for building structures except as follows:
supporting

lifting

or rolling

Testing of a structural system, member or component

may be required to assist the design in the following
cases:

stress

a)

When the calculation methods available are not

adequate for the design of a particular structure,
member or component,
testing shall be
undertaken in place of design by calculation
or to supplement the design by calculation;

b)

Where rulesor
methods
for design by
calculation
would lead to uneconomical
design, experimental
verification
may be
undertaken to avoid conservative design;

c)

When the design or construction is not entirely

in accordance with sections of this standard,
experimental verification is recommended;

r~,~,,

d)

When confirmation
is required
on the
consistency
of production
of material,
components, members or structures originally
designed by calculations or testing; and

The total number of actual stress cycles

NSC,satisfies

e)

When the actual performance of an existing

structure capacity is in question, testing shall
be used to confirm it.

Members subjected to crowd induced

oscillations of a large number of cycles
in life.

No fatigue assessment is necessary if any of

the following conditions is satisfied.
1)

The highest
satisfies

normal

stress range ~~,~,,

L, M., ~ 27PcJYmft
2)

The highest
satisfies

shear

stress

range

rf,Max<
- 67/-4 /ymft
3)

N,c S5x10

[1

27pC

14.1.1 Testing of structural

system, member
component shall be of the following categories:

Ymftffq

a)

where
J%, = equivalent constant amplitude
stress range in MPa given by

100

or

Proof testing The application of test loads

to a structure,
sub-structure,
member or
connection
to ascertain
the structural
characteristics of only that specific unit.

---%..

~~
----------

IS 800:2007
b)

IS 1608) tests . The mean value of the yield strength,

~Y~,taken from such tests shall be determined with due
regard to the importance
of each element in the
assembly. The strength test load F~e,~,,(including self
weight) shall be determined from:

Prototype testing Testing of structures, substructures, members or connections is done

to ascertain the structural characteristics of a
class of such structures,
sub-structures
members or connection, which are nominally
identical to the units tested.

F test,s =

14.2 Types of Test

14.2.1 Acceptance

where
Test

~Y = characteristic yield stress of the material as

assumed in the design,

This is intended as a non-destructive test for confirming

structural performance. It should be recognized that
the loading applied to certain structures might cause
permanent distortions. Such effects do not necessarily
indicate structural failure in acceptance test. However,
the possibility of their occurrence should be agreed to
before testing.

= (1.0x self weight)+ (1.15 x remainder

of the permanent load)+ ( 1.25 x variable
load).

The assembly shall satisfy the following

It shall demonstrate
substantially
behaviour under test loading, and

b)

On removal of the test load, the residual

deflection shall not exceed 20 percent of the
maximum-recorded
deflection.

b)

Corresponding recorded residual deflection

in the second test shall not exceed 10 percent
of the maximum deflection during the test.

partial safety factor for the type of failure,

as prescribed in this standard.

Not less than three tests shall be carried out on

nominally identical specimens. An estimate should be
made of the anticipated ultimate resistance as a basis
for such tests. During a test to failure, the loading shall
first be applied in increments up to the strength test
load. Subsequent
load increments
shall then be
determined from consideration of the principal load
deflection plot. The test load resistance, Ft.,,.R shall be
determined as that load at which the specimen is unable
to sustain any further increase in load. At this load,
gross permanent distortion is likely to have occurred
and in some cases such large gross deformation may
define the test limit. If the deviation of any individual
test result exceeds 10 percent of the mean value
obtained for all the three tests, at least three more tests
shall be carried out. When the deviation from the mean
does not exceed 10 percent of the mean, the design
resistance may be evaluated as given below:

If the above criteria are not satisfied the test may be

repeated one more time only, when the assembly shall
satisfy the following criteria:
It shall demonstrate
substantially
behaviour on the second application
loading, and

%i

The objective of a test to failure is to determine the

design resistance from the ultimate resistance. In this
situation it is still desirable to carry out the acceptance
and strength tests, before test to failure.

linear

a)

= factored design load for the ultimate limit

state, and

14.2.3 Test to Failure (Ultimate Strength Test)

criteria:

a)

Fd

At this load there shall be no failure by buckling or

rupture of any part of the structure or component tested.
On removal of the test load, the deflection should
decrease by at least 20 percent of the maximum
deflection at F1.,t,,.

The load for acceptance test, Ftcfi[,.shall be determined

from:
Ft.,,,,

~mi Fd ~YmyY)

linear
of test

14.2.2 Strength Test

Strength test is used to confirm the calculated resistance
of a structure or component. Where a number of items
are to be constructed to a common design, and one or
more prototypes are tested to confirm their strength,
the others may be accepted without any additional test,
provided they are similar in all relevant respects to the
prototype.

a)

When the failure is ductile,

the design
resistance, F~ may be determined from:
Fd = 0.9F,,,,,~in( fY~Y~) /Y~O
where

Before carrying out the strength test, the specimen

should first be subjected to and satisfy the acceptance
test. Since the resistance of the assembly under test
depends on the material properties, the actual yield
strength of all the steel materials in the assembly shall
be determined from coupon (test piece as defined in

F,~,,,~in = minimum test result from the tests

to failure,
f,.

101

= average yield strength as obtained

from the material tests, and

IS 800:2007
~=
b)

characteristic yield stress of the

grade of steel.

In the case of a sudden (brittle) rupture type

failure, the design resistance
may be
determined from:

recorded during the acceptance test on the prototype

and the residual deflection should not be more than
105 percent of that recorded for the prototype.
14.3 Test Conditions
a)

Loading and measuring

calibrated in advance.

b)

The design of the test rig shall be such that:

F~ = 0.9F,~~,,~in(~U/j&) / &
where

c)

shall be

1)

average ultimate tensile strength of

the material obtained from tests.

Loading system adequately simulates the

magnitude
and distribution
of the
loadlng;

2)

In the case of a sudden (brittle) buckling type

failure,
the design resistance
shall be
determined from:

It allows the specimen

manner
representative
conditions;

3)

Lateral and torsional restraint, if any,

should be representative of those in service,

4)

Specimen should be free to deflect under

load according to service condition;

5)

Loading system shall be able to follow

the movements of the specimen without
interruption or abnormal restraints; and

6)

Inadvertent eccentricities at the point of

application of the test loads and at the
supports are avoided,

characteristic ultimate stress of the

grade of steel used, and

f urn

F~ = 0,75Fki, Min(~~!~~) /~mO

d)

devices

In ductile buckling type failure in which the

relevant slenderness k can be reliably assessed,
the design resistance may be determined from:
F. = 0.9F .3(,M[(tiy %fym)%l
where
x

= reduction factor for the relevant

buckling curve, and

x. = value

c)

Test load shall be applied to the unit at a rate

as uniform as practicable.

d)

Deflections should be measured at sufficient

points of high movements to ensure that the
maximum value is determined.

e)

If the magnitude of stresses in a specimen is

to be determined, the strain at the desired
location
may be measured
and the
corresponding stress calculated.

f)

Prior to any test, preliminary loading (not

exceeding the characteristic
values of the
relevant loads) may be applied and then
removed, in order to set the test specimen on
to the test rig.

of x when the yield strength

isfy.
14.2.4 Check Tests
Where a component or assembly is designed on the
basis of strength tests or tests to failure and a production
run is carried out of such items, an appropriate number
of samples (not less than two) shall be selected from
each production batch at random for check tests.
14.2.4.1 The samples shall be carefully examined to
ensure that they are similar in all respects to the
prototype tested, particular attention being given to the
following:
a)

Dimensions

of components

b)

Tolerance and workmanship;

c)

Quality of steel used, checked with reference

to mill test certificates.

to perform in a
of service

14.4 Test Loading

14.4.1 Where the self-weight of the specimen is not
representative of the actual permanent load in service,
allowance for the difference shall be made in the
calculation of test loads to be applied.

and connections;
and

14.4.2 On the attainment of maximum load for either

acceptance
or strength
tests, this load shall be
maintained
for at least 1 h. Reading of load and
deflection shall be taken at intervals of 15 min and the
loading shall be maintained constant until there is no
significant increase in deflection during a 15 min period
or until at least 1 h has elapsed.

14.2.4.2 Where it is not possible to determine either

the variations or the effect of variations from the
prototype, an acceptance test shall be carried out as a
check test.
14.2.4.3 In this check test, the deflections shall be
measured at the same positions as in the acceptance
test of the prototype.
The maximum
measured
deflection shall not exceed 120 percent of the deflection

14.4.3 The test load shall be equal to the design load

for the relevant limit state in proof testing.
102

----%..

IS 800:2007
14.4.4 The test load in prototype testing shall be equal
to the design load for the relevant limit state as
multiplied by the appropriate factor given in Table 27.
Table 27 Factors to Allow for Variability
Structural Units
SI

of

No.

No. of Similar
Units to be Tested

For Strength
Limit State

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

i)
ii)

1.5
1.4
1.3
1.3
1.3
I .2

1.2

iii)
iv)
v)
vi)

2
3
4
5
10

14.5 Criteria

structures should be such that good drainage of water

is ensured.
Standing
pool of water, moisture
accumulation
and rundown of water for extended
duration shall be avoided.
The details of connections

For
Serviceability
Limit State

a)

AII exposed surfaces are easily accessible for

inspection and maintenance; and

b)

All surfaces, not so easily accessible are

completely sealed against ingress of moisture.

15.2.2 Exposure

1.2
1.2
1.1
I.1
1.1

should ensure that:

Condition

15.2.2.1 General environment

The general environment, to which a steel structure is
exposed during its working life is classified into five
levels of severity, as given in Table 28.

for Acceptance

Table 28 Environmental

14.5.1 Acceptance for Strength

S1
No.

The test structure, sub-structure, member or connection

shall be deemed to comply with the requirements for
strength if it is able to sustain the strength test load for
at least 15 min.

Environmental
Classifications

(1)

It shall then be inspected to determine the nature and

extent of any damage incurred during the tes~ The
effects of the damage shall be considered
and if
necessary appropriate repairs to the damaged parts
carried out.

ii) Moderate

The maximum deformation of the structure or member

under the serviceability limit state test load shall be
within the serviceability limit values appropriate to the
structure.

iii) Severe

iv) Very severe

15.1 General

Structural steel surfaces:

exposed to condensation and rain
continuously under water
exposed to non-aggressive soiti
groundwater
d) sheltered from saturated salt air in
coastal areas
Structural steel surfaces:
exposed to severe frequent rain
exposed to alternate wetting and
drying
c) severe condensation
d) completely immersed in sea water
e) exposed to saturated salt air in
coastal area
Structural steel surface exposed to:
a)
b)
c)

is one that performs

A durable steel structure
satisfactorily
the desired function in the working
environment under the anticipated exposure condition
during its service life, without deterioration of the crosssectional area and loss of strength due to corrosion. The
material used, the detailing, fabrication, erection and
surface protection measures should all address the
corrosion protection and durability requirements.

v) Extreme

sea water spray

corrosive fumes
aggressivesub soil or ground water

Structural steel surfaces exposed to:

O
b)

tidal zones and splash zones in the

sea
aggressive liquid or solid chemicals

15.2.2.2 Abrasion
Specialist literature may be referred for durability of
surfaces exposed to abrasive action as in machinery,
conveyor belt support system, storage bins for grains
or aggregates.

for Durability

The design, fabrication

Surfaces normally protected against

exposure to weather or aggressive
condition as in interior of buildings,
except when located in coastal areas

a)
b)

SECTION 15
DURABILITY

15.2.1 Shape,
Size, Orientation
Connections and Details

(3)

a)
b)
c)

14.5.2 Acceptance for Serviceability

15.2 Requirements

Conditions

Exposure Conditions

(2)

i) Mild

Exposure

of Members,

and erection details of exposed

103

IS 800:2007
15.2.2.3 Exposure to sulphate attack

and IS 9172. The main corrosion

are given below:

Appropriate coatings may be used when surfaces of

structural
steel are exposed to concentration
of
sulphates (SOJ) in soil, ground water, etc.
When exposed to very high sulphate concentrations
of more than 2 percent in soil and 5 percent in water,
some form of lining
such as polyethylene,
polychloroprene
sheet or surface coating based on
asphalt, chlorinated rubber, epoxy or polymethane
material should be used to completely avoid access of
the solution to the steel surface.
15.2.3 Corrosion Protection

SI

the electrode potential,

b)

Inhibitors,

c)

Inorganic/metal
systems.

and
coatings

or organic/paint

15.2.4.1 In the case of mild exposure, a coat of primer

after removal of any loose mill scale may be adequate.
As the exposure condition becomes more critical, more
elaborate surface preparations and coatings become
necessary.
In case of extreme
environmental
classification,
protection shall be as per specialist
literature. Table 29 gives guidance to protection of
steelwork for different desired lives.

The methods of corrosion protection are governed by

actual environmental conditions as specified in IS 9077

No.

Controlling

methods

15.2.4 Su~ace Protection

Methods

Table 29 (a) Protection

a)

protection

Guide for Steel Work Application Desired Life of Coating

System in Different Environments
Coating System

Atmospheric Condition/
Environmental Classification

/
1

Y
6

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

12 years

18 years

20 years

10 years

15 years

12 years

iii) Normal coastal (as normal inland

plus high airborne salt levels), severe

10 years

12 years

20 years

iv)

8 years

10 years

10 years

(1)

(2)

Normalinland(ruraland urban
areas),mild
ii) Pollutedinland (high airborne
i)

sulphur dioxide), moderate

Polluted coastal (as polluted inland

plus high airborne salt levels), very
severe or extreme

Table 29 (b) (i) Protection

SI

(1)

i)
ii)

Guide for Steel Work Application Specification

System (Shop Applied Treatments)
(Clause 15.2.4. 1)

Protection

No.

About
20 years
15-20 years
About
20 years
15-20 years

for Different

Above
20 years
Above
20 years
Above
20 years
Above
20 years

Coating

Coating System
c

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

iv)

Surface preparation Blast clean

Pre-fabrication
Zinc phosphate
primer
epoxy, 20 w
Post-fabrication
High-build zinc
primer
phosphate
modified alkyd,
60pm

Intermediate coat

v)

Top coat

iii)

About
20 years
About
18 years
About
20 years
About
15 years

Blast clean
2 pack zinc-rich
epoxy, 20 pm
2 pack zinc-rich
epoxy, 20 pm

Blast clean
Gkt blast
2 pack zinc-rich

epoxy, 20p
2 pack zinc-rich Sprayed zinc or
sprayed
epoxy, 25 pm
aluminium

Blast clean
Ethyl zinc
silicate, 20 Urn
Ethyl zinc
silicate, 60 pm

2 pack epoxy
micaceous iron
oxide

Sealer

Chlorinated
rubber alkyd,
35pm

2 pack epoxy
micaceous iron
oxide, 85 Urn

Sealer

Blast clean

Hot dip
galvanized,
85pm

High-buildzinc
phosphate, 25 pm

104

IS 800:2007
Table 29 (b) (ii) Protection

sl

Guide for Steel Work Application Specification

System (Site Applied Treatments)
(Clause 15.2.4.1)

for Different

Coating System

Protection

No.

(1)
O

ii)
iii)

(2)

Surface
preparation
Primer

Coating

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

As necessary
Touch in

No site

Touch in

treatment

Modified
Alkyd
Micaceous
iron oxide,

Intermediate
coat

As necessary

As necessary

6
(8)

No site

As necessary

treatment

Touchin

Touchtn

High-build
micaceousiron
oxide
Chlorinated
rubber

50 ~m

Micaceous,
iv)

TOPcoat

High-build
Alkyd finish,
60~m

Modified
Alkyd
Micaceous
iron oxide,
50 pm

15.2.4.2 Steel surfaces shall be provided with at least

one coat of primer immediately
after its surface
preparation such as by sand blasting to remove all mill
scale and rust and to expose the steel.
15.2.4.3 Steel without protective coating shall not be
stored for long duration in out door environment.
15.2.4.4 Surfaces to transfer forces by friction as in
HSFG connections shall not be painted. However it
shall be ensured that moisture is not trapped on such
surfaces after pretensioning
of bolts by proper
protective measures.

High-build
chlorinated
rubber

75 pm
H@t-build iron
oxide Chlorinated
rubber, 75 ~m

SECTION 16
FIRE RESISTANCE
16.1 Requirements
The requirements shall apply to steel building elements
designed to exhibit a required fire-resistance
level
(FRL) as per the relevant specifications.
16.1.1 For protected steel members and connections,
the thickness of protection material (hi) shall be greater
than or equal to that required to give a period of
structural adequacy (PSA) greater than or equal to the
required FRL.

15.2.4.5 Members to be assembled by welding shall

not be pre-painted at regions adjacent to the location
of such welds. However, after welding, appropriate
protective coatings shall be applied in the region, as
required by the exposure conditions. If the contact
surfaces cannot be properly protected against ingress
of moisture by surface coating, they maybe completely
sealed by appropriate welds.

16.1.2 For unprotected steel members and connections,

the exposed surface area to mass ratio (k,~) shall be
less than or equal to that required to give a PSA equal
to the required FRL.
16.2 Fire Resistance

Level

The required FRL shall be as prescribed in IS 1641,

IS 1642 and IS 1643, as appropriate or in building
specifications or as required by the user or the city
ordinance. The FRL specified in terms of the duration
(in minutes) of standard fire load without collapse
depends upon:

15.2.4.6 Pre-painted
members shall be protected
against abrasion of the coating during transportation,
handling and erection.
15.2.5 Special Steels
Steels with special alloying elements and production
process to obtain better corrosion resistance may be
used as per specialist literature.

105

a)

the purpose for which structure is used, and

b)

the time taken to evacuate in case of fire.

IS 800:2007
16.3 Period of Structural

Adequacy

1.2

(PSA)

16.3.1 The calculation of PSA involves:

a)

b)

c)

CURVE 1: YEILDSTRESS RATIO

CURVE 2: MODULUSOF
ELASTICITYRATIO

1.0

Calculation of the strength of the element as

a function of temperature of the element and
the determination of limiting temperature;

I
I

0.8
0.6

Calculation of the thermal response of the

element, that is calculation of the variation of
the temperature of the element or the parts of
the element with time, when exposed to fire;
and

0.4

I
I

0.2

I
0

Determination
of PSA at which
the
temperature of the element or parts of the
element reaches the limiting temperature.

215
0

200

400

600

800

T
1000

1200

STEELTEMPERATURE(T) C

FIG. 24 VARIATIONOF MECHANICALPROPERTIESOF

16.3.2 Determination

of Period of Structural Adequacy

STEELWITHTEMPERATURE

The period of structural adequacy (PSA) shall be

determined using one of the following methods:
a)

For temperature less than 215C no reduction

yield stress need to be considered.

in the

By calculation:
1)

2)

16.4.2 Variation
Temperature

determining the limiting temperature of

the steel (T,) in accordance with 16.5 ;
and
determining the PSA as the time (in rein)
from the start of the test to the time at
which the limiting steel temperature (t)
is attained, in accordance with 16.6 for
protected
members
and 16.7 for
unprotected members.

b)

By direct application
of a single
accordance with 16.8; or

c)

By calculation of the temperature of the steel

member by using a rational
method of
analysis confirmed by test data or by methods
available in specialist literature.

16.4 Variation of Mechanical

with Temperature

Properties

E(T)

when

of Steel

fy(20)

= yield stress of steel at TC,

= yield stress
temperature),

T = temperature
This relationship

of steel
and

)1.

600C

T S

modulus
and

1 OOOC

of elasticity

(20) = modulus of elasticity

(room temperature).

of steel at

T C,

of steel at 2(YC

is shown by curve 2 in Fig. 24.

16.4.3 For special steel with higher temperature

resistance, such as TMCP steels, the manufacturers
recommendation
shall be used to obtain the variation
of yield strength and modulus of elasticity of steel with
temperature.

where
fy(T)

( 1100

690 l-~
() 1000
T-53.5

This relationship

<10

T S

600C <
E (7)

20001n
[
I

OC <

when

905-T

905

with

1.0+

E(20)

16.4.1 Variation of Yield Stress with Temperature

fy(T)
=
f, (20)

of Elasticity

The influence of temperature

on the modulus of
elasticity shall be taken as follows for structures of mild
steels and high strength low alloy steels:

test in

The influence of temperature on the yield stress of steel

shall be taken as follows for structures of mild steels
and high strength low alloy steels:

of Modulus

at 20C (room

16.5 Limiting Steel Temperature

of the steel in C.

The limiting steel temperature (Tl) in degree Celsius

in the case of ordinary steels, shall be calculated as
follows:

is shown by Curve 1 in Fig. 24.

106

.,.,.,..,., ,,

IS 800:2007
T]=

905-690 r~
t=kO+klhi

where

+k2;

+k~T+kahiT+k#+kb~
sm

r~ = ratio of the design action on the member

under tire to the design capacity of the
member
(R~ = Ru/y~)
at room
temperature,

The design
following:

action

kOto k~ = regression coefficients

(see 16.6.2.2.);
hi = thickness
in mm;
T

fire shall

consider

a)

Reduced bond likely under tire, and

b)

Effects of restraint
elements during fire.

to expansion

the

Increase

from test data

of fire protection

material,

steel temperature,
in degrees
as
obtained
from
test
in 16.6.1, T > 250 C; and

celsius
given

k,~ = exposed surface area to mass ratio, in

103 mm2/kg.
of the

16.6.2.2 In lieu of test results, the values for coefficients

in Table 30 may be used in the equation 16.6.2.1 when
the test satisfies the conditions specified in 16.6.2.3.

Limiting steel temperature for special steels may be

appropriately
calculated
using
the thermal
characteristics
of the material obtained from the
supplier of the steel.
16.6 Temperature
Members

safety factor for strength.

under

sm

t = time from the start of the test, in rein;

R~,I?u = design strength and ultimate strength of

the member
at room temperature
respectively, and
l% = ptiial

sm

where

Table 30 Regression

kO

k,

kz

k3

k4

k5

k6

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

-25.90

1.698

-13.71

0.0300

0.0005

0.5144

6.633

with Time in Protected

16.6.1 The time (t) at which the limiting temperature

(Ti) is attained shall be determined by calculation on
the basis of a suitable series of fire tests in accordance
with 16.6.2 or from the results of a single test in
accordance with 16.6.3.

Coefficients,

16.6.2.3 Limitations
regression analysis

and

conditions

Test data to be utilized in accordance

shall satisfy the following:

on use of

with 16.6.2.1,

16.6.1.1 For beams and for all members with a foursided fire exposure condition, the limiting temperature
(Tl) shall be taken as the average of all of the
temperatures measured at the thermocouple locations
on all sides.

a)

Steel members shall be protected with board,

sprayed blanket or similar insulation materials
having a dry density less than 1000 kg/m3;

b)

All tests shall incorporate

protection system;

16.6.1.2 For columns with a three-sided fire exposure

condition, the limiting temperature (71)shall be taken
as the average of the temperatures measured at the
thermocouple locations on the face farthest from the
wall. Alternatively, the temperatures from members
with a four-sided fire exposure condition and having
the same surface area to mass ratio may be used.

c)

All members shall have the same fire exposure

condition;

d)

Test series shall include at least nine tests;

e)

Test series may include prototypes which have

not been loaded provided that stackability has
been demonstrated; and

f)

All members subject to a three-sided fire

exposure condition shall be within a group in
accordance with 16.9.

16.6.2 Temperature Based on Test Series

Calculation of the variation of steel temperature with
time shall be by interpolation of the results of a series
of fire tests using the regression analysis equation
specified in 16.6.2.1, subject to the limitations and
conditions of 16.6.2.3.

the same fire

The regression equation obtained for one tire protection

system may be applied to another system using the
same fire protection material and the same fire exposure
condition
provided
that stackability
has been
demonstrated for the second system.

16.6.2.1 Regression analysis

A regression equation obtained using prototypes with

a four-sided fire exposure condition maybe applied to
a member with a three-sided fire exposure condition
provided that stackability has been demonstrated for
the three-sided case.

The relationship between temperature (T) and time (t)

for a series of tests on a group shall be calculated by
least-square regression as follows:

107

1S 800:2007
16.6.3 Temperature Based on Single Test

a)

Conditions,

The variation of steel temperature with time measured

in a standard fire test maybe used without modification
provided:

b)

Conditions of support are the same as the

prototype
and the restraints
are not less
favorable
than those of the prototype, and

c)

Ratio of the design load for fire to the design

capacity of the member is less than or equal
to that of the prototype.

a)

Fire protection
prototype;

b)

Fire exposure
prototype;

c)

Fire protection material thickness is equal to

or greater than that of the prototype;

d)

Surface area to mass ratio is equal to or less

than that of the prototype; and

e)

Where the prototype has been submitted to a

standard fire test in an unloaded condition,
stackability has been separately demonstrated.

system

is the same as the

condition

is the same as the

16.9 Three-Sided

16.6.4 Parameters of Importance

Test

Specimen type, loading, configuration;

b)

Exposed surface area to mass ratio;

c)

Insulation
thickness;

d)

Moisture content of the insulation

type,
and

thermal

properties

a)

highest in group

2)

and

with

material.

Four-sided

t = 4.7

Time

in
b)

c)

T+

largest in group
smallest in group

IUb voids shall either be:

1)

all open; or

2)

all blocked as shown in Fig. 25B.

Concrete slabs may incorporate

steel deck formwork.

permanent

Connections
shall be protected with the maximum
thickness of fire protection material required for any
of the members framing into the connection
to
achieve their respective fire-resistance
levels. This
thickness shall be maintained
over all connection
components, including bolt heads, welds and splice
plates.

= time from the start of the test, in rein,

steel temperature,
s T ~ 75t)C, and

in C, 500 C

16.10.2 Web Penetrations

k,~ = exposed
surface
area to mass
ratio, 2x103 mm2/kg S k,m S 35
x103 mm2/kg.

The thickness of tire protection material at and adjacent

to web penetrations
shall be the greatest of that
required, when:

For temperatures below 500C, linear interpolation

shall be used, based on the time at 500C and an initial
temperature of 20C at tequals O.
16.8 Determination

Effective thickness (h,):

16.10.1 Connections

where

T=

and

16.10 Special Considerations

k sm

lowest in group

o.433q

fire exposure condition

+0.0263T+

density:

where the effective thickness (h.) is equal to

the cross-sectional area excluding voids per
unit width, as shown in Fig. 25A.

k sm
b)

Concrete
<1.25,

fire exposure condition

t=5.2+0.022

The characteristics of the members of a group

as given below, shall not vary from one
another by more than
1)

The time (t)at which the limiting temperature (Tl) is

attained shall be calculated
using the following
equations:
Three-sided

Condition

SI.25.

16.7 Temperature
Increase
Unprotected Members

a)

Fire Exposure

Members subject to a three-sided

fire exposure
condition shall be considered in separate groups unless
the following conditions are satisfied:

in the Standard Fire

a)

specified in 16.6.3 are satisfied,

a)

area above the penetration is considered as a

three-sided
fire exposure condition (k,~l)
(see Fig. 26),

b)

area below the penetration

four-sided
fire exposure
(see Fig. 26), and

of PSA from a Single Test

The period of structural adequacy (PSA) determined

from a single test maybe applied without modification
provided:
108

is considered as a
condition
(k,~2)

IS 800:2007
c)

16.11 Fire Resistance

section as a whole is considered as a threesided

fire
exposure
condition
(k,~)
(see Fig. 26).

Rating

The fire resistance

rating of various building
components such as walls, columns, beams, and floors
are given in Table 31 and Table 32. Fire damage
assessment
of various structural
elements of the
building and adequacy of the structural repairs can be
done by the fire resistance rating for encased steel
column and beam (Table 31 and Table 32).

This thickness shall be applied over the full beam depth

and shall extend on each side of the penetration for a
distance at least equal to the beam depth and not less
than 300 mm,

h-%lkr-E3ki-J
&

i%

.>

25A Effective Thickness

~RETE

VOID BLOCKED WITH

FIREPROTECTION
MATERIAL

SLAB

STEELBEAM
FIREPROTECTION
MATERIAL

SIDEVIEW

CROSS SECTION

25B Blocking of Rib Voids

FIG. 25 THREE SIDEDFIRE EXPOSURECONDITIONREQUIREMENTS

Side View of Beam with Web Penetration

. . .. ...... #...:,.
-., .,., . . . . .

.. . . . .. .
kSmf
ii

SECTIONA-A

SECTIONB-B

FIG. 26 WEB PENETRATION

109

IS 800:2007
Table 31 Encased Steel Columns, 203 mm x 203 mm
(Protection Applied on Four Sides)
(Clause 16.1 1)
SI

Nature of Construction

and Materials

Minimum Dimensions

No.

Excluding Any Fhrish, for a Fire

Resistance of

mm

(1)

(2)

b)

ii)

1 fih

2h

3h

4 h

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

13

15

20

32

10
10

15
13

20

19

2.5

50

50

50

38
75

60

60

60

50

50

50

60

Hollow protection (without an air cavitv over the flan~es):

O

iii)

lh
(3)

Metal lathingwith trowelledligh~weightaggreg~tegypsum

plaster )
Plasterboardwith 1.6 mm wire binding at 100 mm pitch,

finished with lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster less

than the thickness specified:
I) 9.5 mm plaster board
2) 19 mm plaster board
Asbestos insulating boards, thickness of board:
c)
1) Single thickness of board, with 6 mm cover fillets at
transverse joints
2) Two layers, of total thickness
d)
Solid bricks Of clay, composition or sand lime, reinforced
in every horizontal joint, unplastered
Aerated concrete blocks
e)
Solid blocks of lightweight concrete bellow protection
f-)
(with an air cavity over the flanges)
Asbestos insulating board screwed to 25 mm asbestos battens
Solid protections
Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered):
a)
1) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced 2)
2) Concrete assumed to be load bearing
b)
Lightweight concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered) concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced 2)

50
100

75

19

25

25

25

50
25

50
25

50
25

50
75
25

75
75
25

)So fixed or designed. as to allow full Penetration for mechanical bond.

1Reinforcement ~hallconsist Ofsteel ilnd]ng wire not less than 2.3 mm diameter, or a steel mesh weighing not lesstharrO.sk@2. ln
concrete protection, the spacing of the reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.

SECTION 17
FABRICATION
AND ERECTION

connecting steel to steel should preferably be not

greater than 2,0 mm at each end. The erection clearance
at ends of beams without web cleats should be not more
than 3 mm at each end. Where for practical reasons,
greater clearance is necessary, suitably designed seating
should be provided.

17.1 General
Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures shall
conform to IS 7215. Tolerances for erection of steel
structures shall conform to IS 12843. For general
guidance on fabrication by welding, reference maybe
made to IS 9595.
17.2 Fabrication

17.2.2.1 In bearing type of connections, the holes may

be made not more than 1.5 mm greater than the
diameter of the bolts in case of bolts of diameter less
than 25 mm and not more than 2 mm in case of bolts
of diameter more than 25 mm, unless otherwise
specified by the engineer. The hole diameter in base
plates shall not exceed the anchor bolt diameter by
more than 6 mm.

Procedures

17.2.1 Straightening
Material shall be straightened or formed to the specified
configuration
by methods that will not reduce the
properties of the material below the values used in
design. Local application of pressure at room or at
elevated temperature or other thermal means may be
used for straightening, provided the above is satisfied.

17.2.2.2 In friction type of connection clearance may

be maintained, unless specified otherwise in the design
document.
17.2.3 Cutting

17.2.2 Clearances
The erection clearance

Cutting shall be effected by sawing, shearing, cropping,

machining
or thermal cutting process. Shearing,

for cleated ends of members.

110

_,.,_
..
_.

IS 800:2007
Table 32 Encased Steel Beams, 406 mm x 176 mm
(Protection Applied on Three Sides)
(Clause 16.11 )
S1

Nature of Construction

Minimum Thickness of Protection for a Fire

Resistance of

and Materials

No.

mm
A

/
1/2

Ih

lfih

2h

3h

?
4h
(8)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

i)

Hollowprotection(withoutan air cavitybeneaththe lowerflanges):

a) Metal lathingwith trowelledlightweightaggregategypsumplaster)
b) Plasterboardwith 1.6 mm wire binding at 100 mm pitch, finished with

13

13

15

20

25

10
10

10
10

15
13

19

25

12

lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster less than the thickness specitiedz)

1) 9.5 mm plaster board
2) 19 mm plaster board
Asbestosinsulatingboards, thickness of board
c)
1) Singlettdcknessof board,with 6 mm coverfilletsat transversejoints
2) Two layers, of total thickness
ii) HO11OW
protection(with an air cavitybelowthe lowerflange)
@ Asbestosinsulatingboard screwed to 25 mm asbestos battens
iii) Solid protections
a) Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unpkistered):
1) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced 3)
2) Concrete assumed to be load bearing
b) Lightweightconcrete,not leanerthan 1:2:4mix (unplastered)4)

20

38

50

25

25

25

25

50

75

50

50

50

50

75

75

25

25

25

25

40

60

1)so fixedor designed,as to allow full penetrationfor mechanicalbond.

)Wherewire bindingc~not be used, expert adviceshouldbe soughtregarding akemative methods OfSupportto enablethe loweredges
of the plasterboard to be fixed together and to the lower flange, and for the top edge of the plasterboard to be held in position.

3) Reinforcement

shall consist of s~el binding wire not less than 2.3 mm in diameter, or a steel mesh weighing not less than o.5 k~mz. In
the reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.
4)Concrete
notassumed to be load bearing, reinforced.
concrete protection, the spacing of

cropping and gas cutting shall be clean, reasonably

square, and free from any distortion.
Should the
inspector find it necessary, the edges shall be ground
after cutting. Planning or finishing of sheared or gascut edges of plates or shapes shall not be required,
unless specially noted on drawing or included in
stipulated edge preparation
for welding or when
specifically required in the following section.

by machining, so that all metal that has been hardened

by flame is removed. Hand flame cutting may be
permitted only subject to the approval of the inspecting
authority.
Except where the material is subsequently joined by
welding, no load shall be transmitted through a gas
cut surface.
Thermally cut free edges, which shall be subject to
calculated static tensile stress shall be free from round
bottom gouges greater than 5 mm deep. Gouges greater
than 5 mm deep and notches shall be removed by
grinding.

Re-entrant comers shall be free from notches and shall

have largest practical radii with a minimum radius of
15 mm.
17.2.3.1 Shearing
Shearing of items over 16 mm thick to be galvanized
and subject to tensile force or bending moment shall
not be carried out, unless the item is stress relieved
subsequently.

17.2.4 Holing
17.2.4.1 Holes through more than one thickness of
material for members, such as compound stanchion and
girder flanges, shall be where possible, drilled after the
members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted
together. Around hole for a bolt shall either be machine
flame cut, or drilled full size, or sub-punched 3 mm
undersize and reamed to size or punched full size.

The use of sheared edges in the tension area shall be

avoided in location subject to plastic hinge rotation at
factored loading.
17.2.3.2 Thermal cutting

Hand flame cutting of a bolt hole shall not be permitted

except as a site rectification
measure for holes in
column base plates.

Gas cutting of high tensile steel by mechanically

controlled torch may be permitted, provided special
care is taken to leave sufficient metal to be removed
111

IS 800:2007
17.2.4.2 Punching

17.3 Assembly

A punched hole shall be permitted only in material

whose yield stress WY)does not exceed 360 MPa and
where thickness does not exceed (5 600/~Y) mm. In
cyclically loaded details, punching shall be avoided in
plates with thickness greater than 12 mm.

All parts of bolted members shall be pinned or bolted

and rigidly held together during assembly.
The component parts shall be assembled and aligned
in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor
otherwise damaged, and shall be so prepared that the
specified camber, if any, is provided.

For greater thickness and cyclically loaded details,

holes shall be either drilled from the solid or subpunched or sub-drilled and reamed.

17.3.1 Holes in Assembly

When holes are drilled in one operation through two
or more separable parts, these parts, when so specified
by the engineer, shall be separated after drilling and
the burrs removed.

The die for all sub-punched holes or the drill for all
sub-drilled holes shall be at least 3 mm smaller than
the required diameter of finished hole.
17.2.4.3 Oversize holes

Matching holes for rivets and black bolts shall register

with each other so that a gauge of 1.5 mm or 2.0 mm
(as the case may be, depending on whether the diameter
of the rivet or bolt is less than or more than 25 mm)
less in diameter than the diameter of the hole will pass
freely through the assembled members in the direction
at right angle to such members.

A special plate washer of minimum thickness 4 mm

shall be used under the nut, if the hole diameter is larger
than the bolt diameter by 3 mm or more.
Oversize hole shall not exceed 1.25d or (d+8) mm in
diameter, were d is the nominal bolt diameter, in mm.
A short slotted hole shall not exceed the appropriate
hole size in width and 1.33d in length. A long slotted
hole shall not exceed the appropriate hole size in width
and 2.5d in length. If the slot length is larger than those
specified, shear transfer in the direction of slot is not
admissible even in friction type of connection.

Drilling done during assembly to align holes shall not

distort the metal or enlarge the holes.
Holes in adjacent part shall match sufficiently well to
permit easy entry of bolts. If necessary, holes except
oversize or slotted holes maybe enlarged to admit bolts,
by moderate amount of reaming.

Slotted holes shall be punched either in one operation

or else formed by punching or drilling two round holes
apart and completed by high quality mechanically
controlled flame cutting and dressing to ensure that
bolt can freely travel the full length of the slot.

17.3.2 Thread Length

When design is based on bobs with unthreaded shanks
in the shear plane, appropriate
measures shall be
specified to ensure that, after allowing for tolerance,
neither the threads nor the thread run-out be in the shear
plane.

17.2.4.4 Fitted bolt holes

Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a
diameter equal to the nominal diameter of the shank
or barrel subject to tolerance specified in IS 919 (Parts
1 and 2). Preferably, parts to be connected with close
tolerance or barrel bolts shall be firmly held together
by tacking bolts or clamps and the holes drilled through
all the thicknesses at one operation and subsequently
reamed to size. All holes not drilled through all
thicknesses atone operation shall be drilled to a smaller
size and reamed out after assembly. Where this is not
practicable,
the parts shall be drilled and reamed
separately through hard bushed steel jigs.

The length of bolt shall be such that at least one clear

thread shows above the nut and at least one thread plus
the thread run out is clear beneath the nut after
tightening. One washer shall be provided under the
rotated part.
17.3.3 Assembly Subjected

to Vibration

When non-preloaded
bolts are used in a structure
subject to vibration, the nuts shall be secured by locking
devices or other mechanical
means. The nuts of
preloaded bolts may be assumed to be sufficiently
secured by the normal tightening procedure.

17.2.4.5 Holes for rivets or bolts shall not be formed

generally by gas cutting process. However, advanced
gas cutting processes such as plasma cutting may be
used to make holes in statically loaded members only.
In cyclically loaded members subjected to tensile
stresses which are vulnerable under fatigue, gas cutting
shall not be used unless subsequent reaming is done to
remove the material in the heat affected zone around
the hole.

17.3.4 Washers
Washers are not normally required on non-preloaded
bolts, unless specified otherwise. Tapered washers shall
be used where the surface is inclined at more than 3to
a plane perpendicular to the bolt axis.
Hardened washer shall be used for preloaded bolts or
the nut, whichever is to be rotated.
112

IS 800:2007
and that the final dimensions
tolerances.

All material within the grip of the bolt shall be steel

and no compressible material shall be permitted in the
grip.

17.7 Machining
17.4 Riveting

of Butts, Caps and Bases

17.7.1 Column splices and butt joints of struts and

compression members, depending on contact for stress
transmission, shall be accurately machined and closebutted over the whole section with a clearance not
exceeding 0.2 mm locally, at any place. Sum of all
such clearance shall not be more than 30 percent of
the contact area for stress transmission. In column caps
and bases, the ends of shafts together with the attached
gussets, angles, channels, etc; after connecting together
should be accurately
machined so that clearance
between the contact surfaces shall not exceed 2 mm
locally, subject further to the condition that sum total
of all such clearance shall not exceed 30 percent of the
total contact area for stress transmission. Care should
be taken that these gussets, connecting
angles or
channels are fixed with such accuracy that they are
not reduced in thickness by machining by more than
2.0 mm,

17.4.1 Rivets shall be heated uniformly throughout

their length, without burning or excessive scaling, and
shall be of sufficient length to provide a head of
standard dimensions.
These shall, when driven,
completely fill the holes and, if countersunk,
the
countersinking
shall be fully filled by the rivet. lf
required, any protrusion of the countersunk head shall
be dressed off ftush.
17.4.2 Riveted member shall have all parts firmly
drawn and held together before and during riveting,
and special care shall be taken in this respect for all
single-riveted
connections.
For multiple riveted
connections, a service bolt shall be provided in every
third or fourth hole.
17.4.3 Wherever practicable, machine riveting shall be
carried out by using machines of the steady pressure
type.

17.7.2 Where sufficient gussets and rivets or welds are

provided to transmit the entire loading (see Section 4),
the column ends need not be machined.

17.4.4 All loose, burned or otherwise defective rivets

shall be cut out and replaced before the structure is
loaded, and special care shall be taken to inspect all
single riveted connections.

17.7.3 Slab Bases and Caps

Slab bases and slab caps, except when cut from material
with true surfaces, shall be accurately machined over
the bearing surfaces and shall be in effective contact
with the end of the stanchion, the bearing face which
is to be grouted to fit tightly at both top and bottom,
unless welds are provided to transmit the entire column
face.

17.4.5 Special care shall be taken in heating and driving

long rivets.
17.5 Bolting
17.5.1 In all cases where the full bearing area of the
bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be provided with
a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut to avoid
any threaded portion of the bolt being within the
thickness or the parts bolted together, unless accounted
for in design.
17.5.2 Pre-tensioned
tension (the proof
calibmted method.

are within appropriate

17.7.4 To Facilitate grouting, sufficient gap shall be left

between the base plates and top of pedestal and holes
shall be provided where necessary in stanchion bases
for the escape of air.

bolts shall be subjected to initial

stress) by an appropriate
pre-

17.8 Painting

17.6 Welding

17.8.1 Painting shall be done in accordance

IS 1477 (Parts 1 and 2).

with

17.6.1 Welding shall be in accordance with IS 816,

IS 819, IS 1024, IS 1261, IS 1323 and IS 9595, as
appropriate.

17.8.2 All surfaces, which are to be painted, oiled or

otherwise treated, shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned
to remove all loose scale and loose rust.

17.6.2 For welding of any particular type of joint,

welders shall give evidence acceptable to the purchaser
of having satisfactorily completed appropriate tests as
prescribed in IS 817, IS 1393, IS 7307 (Part 1), IS 7310
(Part 1) andIS7318
(Part 1), as relevant.

17.8.3 Shop contzact surfaces need not be painted unless

specified. If so specified, they shall be brought together
while the paint is still wet.
17.8.4 Surfaces not in contact, but inaccessible after
shop assembly,
shall receive tbe full specified
protective treatment before assembly. This does not
apply to the interior of sealed hollow sectiorf$.

17.6.3 Assembly and welding shall be carried out in

such a way to minimize distortion and residuat stress

113

IS 800:2007
17.8.5 Chequered plates shall be painted but the details
of painting shall be specified by the purchaser.

fabrication is being undertaken

provisions of this standard.

17.8.6 In case of surfaces to be welded, the steel shall

not be painted or metal coated within a suitable distance
of any edge to be welded, if the paint specified or the
metal coating is likely to be harmful to welders or
impair the quality of the welds.

17.12.2 Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall

be made at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch
and shall be conducted
so as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the work.

in concrete

17.12.4 Should any structure or part of a structure be

found not to comply with any of the provisions of this
standard, it shall be liable to rejection. No structure or
part of the structure, once rejected shall be resubmitted
for test, except in cases where the purchaser or his
authorized
representative
considers
the defect as
rectifiable.

shall not be

17.8.9 Contact surface in friction type connection shall

not be painted in advance.
17.9 Marking
Each piece of steel work shall be distinctly marked
before dispatch, in accordance with a marking diagram
and shall bear such other marks as will facilitate
erection,

17.12,5 Defects, which may appear during fabrication,

shall be made good with the consent of and according
to the procedure laid down by the inspecting authority.
17.12.6 All gauges and templates necessary to satisfy
the inspection
authority shall be supplied by the
manufacturer. The inspecting authority may, at his
discretion,
check the test results obtained at the
manufacturers works by independent testing at outside
laboratory, and should the material so tested be found
to be unsatisfactory, the cost of such tests shall be borne
by the manufacturer, and if found satisfactory, the cost
shall be borne by the purchaser.

17.10 Shop Erection

17.10.1 The steel work shall be temporarily
shop
erected complete or as arranged with the inspection
agency so that accuracy of fit may be checked before
dispatch. The parts shall be shop assembled with
sufficient numbers of parallel drifts to bring and keep
the parts in place.
17.10.2 In the case of parts drilled or punched, through
steel jigs with bushes resulting in all similar parts being
interchangeable, the steelwork maybe shop erected in
such position as arranged with the inspection agency.

17.13 Site Erection

17.13.1 Plant and Equipment
The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment
used for erection shall be to the satisfaction of the
engineer.

17.10.3 In case of shop fabrication using numerically

controlled
machine data generated
by computer
software (like CAD), the shop erection may be
dispensed with at the discretion of the inspector.

17.13.2 Storing and Handling

All structural steel should be so stored and handled at
the site that the members are not subjected to excessive
stresses and damage by corrosion due to exposure to
environment.

17.11 Packing
All projecting plates or bars and all ends of members
at joints shall be stiffened, all straight bars and plates
shall be bundled, all screwed ends and machined
surfaces shall be suitably packed and all rivets, bolts,
nuts, washers and small and loose parts shall be packed
separately
in cases, so as to prevent damage or
distortion during transit.
17.12 Inspection

with the

17.12.3 The manufacturer shall guarantee compliance

with the provisions of this standard, if required to do
so by the purchaser.

17.8.7 Welds and adjacent parent metal shall not be

painted prior to de-slagging, inspection and approval.
17.8.8 Parts to be encased
painted or oiled.

in accordance

17.13.3 Setting Out

The positioning and Ievelling of all steelwork, the
plumbing of stanchions and the placing of every part
of the structure with accuracy shall be in accordance
with the approved drawings and to the satisfaction of
the engineer in accordance with the deviation permitted
below.

and Testing

17.12.1 The inspecting authority shall have free access

at all reasonable
times to those parts of the
manufacturers works which are concerned with the
fabrication of the steelwork and shall be afforded all
reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the

17.13.3.1 Erection tolerances

Unloaded steel structure, as erected, shall satisfy the
criteria specified in Table 33 within the specified
tolerance limits.
114

IS 800:2007
tested wire rope slings of correct size. The devices
should be well maintained and operated by experienced
operators.

Each criterion given in the table shall be considered as

a separate requirement, to be satisfied independent of
any other tolerance criteria. The erection tolerances
specified in Table 33 apply to the following reference
points:
a)

b)

Table 34 Straightness Tolerances Incorporated

Design Rules
(Clause 7.13.3.1)

For a column, the actual centre point of the

column at each floor level and at the base,
excluding any base-plate or cap-plate. The
level of the base plate on pedestal shall be so
as to avoid contact with soil and corrosive
environment; and

S1

Criterion

Permitted Deviation

(2)

(3)

Deviation of distance
between adjacent columns
ii) Inclinationof a column in a
multi-storey
building
between adjacent floor
levels
iii) Deviation of location of a
column in a multi-storey
building at any floor level
from a vertical line
through the intended
location of the column
base
iv) Inclination ofa column in
a single storey building,
(not supporting a crane
gantry) r)therthan a portal
frame
v) Inclination of the column
of a portal frame (not
supporting a crane gantry)
O

Permitted Deviation

(1)

(2)

(3)

Straightness of a column (or

other compression member)
between points which will be
laterally restrained on
completion of erection

0.00 IL generally, and

0.002L for members with
hollow cross-sections;
where, L is the length
between points which will
be laterally restrained

Straightness of a

0.001L generally, and

0.002L for members with
hollow cross-sections;
where, L is the length
between points which will
be laterally restrained

For a beam, the actual centre point of the top

surface at each end of the beam, excluding
any end-plate.
ii)

compressionflangeof a
beam,relativeto the weak
axis, betweenpoints,which
will be laterallyrestrainedon
completionof erection.

No.
(1)

Criterion

No.

Table 33 Normal Tolerances After Erection

L%

in

5 mm

17.13.4.2 Oxygen and acetylene cylinders and their

hoses shall have distinctive colours. Cylinders should
be stored in upright position in well-ventilated rooms
or in open air, not exposed to flames, naked lights or
extreme heat and should also be in upright position
when they are being used. All gas cutting works shall
be done only by experienced
skilled gas cutters,
equipped with gloves, boots, aprons, goggles and good
cutting sets of approved make.

0.002h,

where, h, is the storey height

0.0035 z M+

where, z hb is the total height

from the base to the floor
level concerned and n is the
number of storeys from the
base to the floor level
concerned
0.003 5h.
where, h. is the height of the
column

17.13.4.3 While doing any welding work, it should be

ensured that the welding machine is earthed and the
welding cables are free from damage. The welder and
his assistant shall use a face shield or head shield with
a welding lens and clear cover glass and their hands,
legs and bodies shall be well protected by leather
gloves, shoes and aprons. Combustible materials should
be kept away from the sparks and globules of molten
metals generated in any arc welding. In case of welding
in a confined place, it should be provided with an
exhaust system to take care of the harmful gases, fumes
and dusts generated.

Mean: 0.002h,
Individual: O.OIOhC
where h, is the height of the
column

The straightness tolerances specified in Table 34 have

been assumed in the derivation of the design stress for
the relevant type of member. Where the curvature
exceeds these values, the effect of additional curvature
on the design calculations shall be reviewed.

17.13.4.4 In addition to precautions against all the

hazards mentioned above, erection workers shall also
be protected in the following manne~

A tension member shall not deviate from its correct

position relative to the members
to which it is
connected by more than 3 mm along any setting axis.
17.13.4 Safety During Fabrication

a)

All workers shall wear helmets and shall also

be provided with gloves and shoes. In addition
those working at heights shall use safety belts.

b)

All structures shall be so braced/guyed during

erection that there is no possibility of collapse
before erection work is completed.

c)

Warning signs such as Danger,

and Erection

17.13.4.1 All steel materials including fabricated

structures, either at fabrication shop or at erection site,
shall be handled only by a worker skilled in such jobs;
where necessary with load tested lifting devices, having

115

Caution,

IS 800:2007
17.14.3 Where the steel has received a metal coating
in the shop, this coating shall be completed on site so
as to be continuous over any welds and site rivets or
bolts, subject to the approval of the engineer. Painting
on site may complete protection. Bolts, which have
been galvanized or similarly treated, are exempted from
this requirement.

440 volts, Do not smoke, Look ahead,

etc; should be displayed
at appropriate
places,
17.13.4.5 For detailed safety precautions
erection, reference shall be made to IS 7205.

during

17.13.5 Field Connections

17.13.5.1 Field riveting

17.14.4 Surface, which will be inaccessible after site

assembly, shall receive the full-specified protective
treatment before assembly.

Rivets driven at the site shall be heated and driven with

the same care as those driven in the shop.

17.14.5 Site painting should not be done in frosty or

foggy weather, or when humidity is such as to cause
condensation on the surfaces to be painted.

17.13.5.2 Field bolting

Field bolting shall be carried out with the same care as
required for shop bolting.

17.15 Bedding Requirement

17.13.5.3 Fillet welding

17.15.1 Bedding shall be carried out with Portland

cement grout or mortar, as described under 17.15.4 or
fine cement concrete in accordance with IS 456.

Field assembly and welding shall be executed in

accordance with the requirements for shop fabrications
excepting such as manifestly apply to shop conditions
only. Where the steel has been delivered painted, the
paint shall be removed for a distance of at least 50 mm
on either side of the joint.
17.14 Painting

17.15.2 For multi-storeyed buildings, this operation

shall not be carried out until a sufficient number of
bottom lengths of stanchions have been properly lined,
leveled and plumbed and sufficient floor beams are in
position.

After Erection

17.15.3 Whatever method is employed, the operation

shall not be carried out until the steelwork has been
finally Ievelled and plumbed, stanchion bases being
supported meanwhile by steel wedges or nuts; and
immediately before grouting, the space under the steel
shall be thoroughly cleaned.

17.14.1 Before painting of such steel which is delivered

unpainted is commenced, all surfaces to be painted
shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned from all loose scale
and rust, as required
by the surface protection
specification.
17.14.2 The specified protective treatment shall be
~ompleted after erection. All rivet and bolt heads and
the site welds after de-slagging
shall be cleaned.
Damaged or deteriorated paint surfaces shall first be
made good with the same type of paint as the shop
coat. Where specified, surfaces which will be in contact
after site assembly, shall receive a coat of paint
(in addition to any shop priming) and shall be brought
together while the paint is still wet. No painting shall
be used on contact surfaces in the friction connection,
unless specified otherwise by the design document.

17.15.4 Bedding of structure shall be carried out with

grout or mortar, which shall be of adequate strength
and shall completely fill the space to be grouted and
shall either be placed under pressure or by ramming
against fixed supports. The grouts or mortar used shall
be non-shrinking variety.
17.16 Steelwork Tenders and Contracts
A few recommendations
general information.

116

are given in Annex G for

IS 800:2007
ANNEX
(Clause
LIST OF REFERRED

456:2000
513:1994
801:1975

808:1989

813:1986
814:2004

816:1969

817
(Part 1): 1992
(Part 2): 1996
819:1957

875

(Part 1): 1987

(Part
(Part
(Part
(Part

2):
3):
4):
5):

1.1)
INDIAN STANDARDS

IS No.

Title

IS No.

1987
1987
1987
1987

919
(Part 1): 1993/
ISO 286-1:1988
(Part 2) : 1993/
1S0 286-2:1988
962:1989
1024:1999

Title

Carbon steel castings for general

engineering purposes ~fth revision)
Hot rolled carbon steel sheets and
1079:1994
strips Specification @fib revision)
Specification for hot-rolled rivet bars
1148:1982
(up to 40 mm diameter) for structural
purposes (third revision)
High tensile steel rivet bars for
1149:1982
structural purposes (third revision)
Code of practice for seam welding
1261:1959
in mild steel
1278:
972
Specification for filler rods and wires
for gas welding (second revision)
Code of practice for oxy-acetylene
1323:
982
welding for structural work in mild
steels (second revision)
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts
1363
of product grade C:
Hexagon head bolts (size range M5
(Part 1): 2002/
to M64) ~ourth revision)
1S0 4016:1999
Hexagon head screws (size range M5
(Part 2): 2002/
to M64) ~ourth revision)
1S04018:1999
Hexagon nuts (size range M5 to M64)
(Part 3): 1992/
(third revision)
1S0 4034:1986
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts
1364
of product grades A and B:
Hexagon head bolts (size range Ml.6
(Part 1): 2002/
to M64) ~ourth revision)
1s04014:1999
Hexagon head screws (size range
(Part 2): 2002/
Ml.6 to M64) (jourth revision)
1S04017:1999
Hexagon nuts, style 1 (size range
(Part 3): 2002/
M 1.6 to M64) (fourth revision) 1S04032:1999
Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size
(Part 4): 2003/
range M 1.6 to M64) ($ourth revision)
1s0 4035:1999
Hexagon thin nuts Product grade B
(Part 5): 2002/
(unchamfered) (size range Ml.6 to
1S0 4036:1999
M1O) ~ourth revision)
Technical
supply conditions
for
1367
threaded steel fasteners:
Generat requirements for bolts, screws
(Part 1): 2002/
and studs (third revision)
1S0 8992:1986
Tolerances for fasteners Bolts,
(Part 2): 2002/
1S04759-1 :2000 screws, studs and nuts Product
grades A, B and C (third revision)
(Part 3): 2002/
Mechanical properties of fasteners
1S0 898-1:1999
made of carbon steel and alloy steel
bolts, screws and studs ~ourth
revision)
1030:1998

Plain and reinforced concrete

Code of practice ~ourth revision)
Cold-rolled low carbon steel sheets
and strips (fourth revision)
Code of practice for use of coldformed light gauge steel structural
members
in general
building
construction first revision)
Dimensions
for hot-rolled
steel
beam, column, channel and angle
sections (third revision)
Scheme of symbols for welding
Covered electrodes for manual metat
arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steel Specification
(sixth
revision)
Code of practice for use of metal arc
welding for general construction in
mild steel (first revision)
Training of welders Code of
practice:
Manual metal arc welding (second
revision)
Oxyfuel welding (second revision)
Code of practice for resistance spot
welding for light assemblies
in
mild steel
Code of practice for design loads
(other
than
earthquake)
for
buildings and structures:
Dead loads unit weights of building
materials
and stored materials
(second revision)
Imposed loads (second revision)
Wind loads (second revision)
Snow loads (second revision)
Special loads and load combinations
(second revision)
1S0 systems of limits and fits:
Bases of tolerance, deviations and fits
(second revision)
Tables of standard tolerance grades
and limit deviations for holes and
shafts (/lrst revision)
Code of practice for architectural and
building drawings (second revision)
Code of practice for use of welding
in bridges and structures subject to
dynamic loading (second revision)
117

IS 800:2007
IS No.

Title

(Part 5) : 2002/
1S0 898-5:1998

Mechanical properties of fasteners

made of carbon steel and alloy steei
set screws and similar threaded
fasteners not under tensile stresses
(third revision)
Mechanical properties and test methods
for nuts with specified proof loads
(third revision)
Mechanical
properties
and test
methods for nuts without specified
proof loads (second revision)
Prevailing torque type steel hexagon
nuts Mechanical and performance
properties (third revision)
Surface discontinuities
Bolts, screws and studs for general

(Part 6): 1994/

ISO 898-2:1992
(Part 7): 1980

(Part 8) : 2002/
1S0 2320:1997
(Part 9)
Sec 1:1993/
1S0 6157-1:1988
Sec 2:19931
1S0 6157-3:1988
(Part 10):2002/
1S0 6157-2:1995
(Part 11):2002/
1S0 4042:1999
(Part 12):1981
(Part 13):1983
(Part 14)
Sec 1: 2002/
1S0 3506-1:1997
Sec 2:20021
1s0 3506-21997
Sec 3:20021
1S0 3506-3:1997
(Part 16) : 2002/
1S0 8991:1986

IS No.
1477
(Part 1): 1971
(Part 2): 1971
1608: 2005/
ISO 6892:1998
1641:1988

1642:1989

1643:1988

1852:1985

application (third revision)

Bolts, screws and studs for special
applications (third revision)
Surface discontinuities Nuts (third
revision)
Electroplated coatings (tlzzki revision)

1875:1992

1893

(Part 1): 2002

Phosphate
coatings
on threaded
fasteners (second revision)
Hot dip galvanized
coatings
on
threaded fasteners (second revision)
Mechanical properties of corrosionresistant stainless-steel fasteners,
Bolts, screws and studs (third revision)

1929:1982

1990:1973
2002:1992

Nuts (third revision)

2062:2006

Set screws and similar fasteners not

under tensile stress (third revision)
Designation system for fasteners
(third revision)
(Part 17) : 1996/ Inspection, sampling and acceptance
ISO 3269:1988
procedure (third revision)
(Part 18) :1996
Packaging (third revision)
(Part 19) : 1997/ Axial load fatigue testing of bolts,
1S0 3800:1993
screws and studs
(Part 20) : 1996/ Torsional test and minimum torques
1S0 898-7:1992
for bolts and screws with nominal
diameters 1 mm to 10 mm
1387:1993
General requirements for the supply
of metallurgical
materials (second
revision)
1393:1961
Code of practice for training and
testing of oxy-acetylene welders
Low and medium alloy steel covered
1395:1982
electrodes
for manual metal arc
welding (third revision)

2155:1982

2708:1993

3039:1988
3613:1974

3640:1982
3757:1985
4000:1992
4326:1993

118

Title
Code of practice for painting of
ferrous metals in buildings:
Pre-treatment (/irst revision)
Painting (first revision)
Metallic materials Tensile testing at
ambient temperatures (third revision)
Code of. practice for fire safety of
buildings
(general):
General
principles
of fire grading
and
classification (first revision)
Code of practice for fire safety of
buildings
(general):
Details of
construction (@ revision)
Code of practice for fire safety of
buildings (general): Exposure hazard
(jirst revision)
Rolling and cutting tolerance for hot
rolled steel products ~ourth revision)
Specification for carbon steel billets,
blooms, slabs and bars for forgings
(fi$h revision)
Criteria for earthquake resistant design
of structures:
Part 1 General
provisions and buildings
Specification
for hot forged steel
rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm
diameter) tjirst revision)
Steel rivet and stay bars for boilers
(/k revision)
Steel plates for pressure vessels for
intermediate and high temperature
service including boilers (second
revision)
Hot rolled low, medium and high
tensile structural steel (sixth revision)
Specification for cold forged solid
steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm
diameter) (first revision)
1.5 percent manganese steel castings
for general engineering
purpose
(third revision)
Structural steel for construction of
hulls of ships (second revision)
Acceptance
tests for wire flux
combination
for submerged
arc
welding (first revision)
Specification for hexagon fit bolts
(jlrsl
revision)
Specification
for high strength
structural bolts (second revision)
Code of practice for high strength
bolts in steel structures tjirst revision)
Code of practice for earthquake
resistance design and construction of
buildings (second revision)

IS 800:2007
IS No.
5369:1975

5370:1969
5372:1975
5374:1975
5624:1993
6240:1999

6419:1996

6560 ; 1996

6610:1972
6623:2004
6639:1972
6649:1985

7205:1974
7215:1974
7280:1974

7307
(Part 1): 1974
7310

Title

IS No.

Title

General
requirements
for plain
washers and lock washers (first
revision)
Specification for plain washers with
outside diameter =3x inside dkmeter
Taper washers for channels (ISMC)
tjlrst revision)
Taper washers for I-beams (ISMB)
(jlrst revision)
Foundation bolts Specification
(first revision)
Hot rolled steel plate (upto6 mm)
sheet and strip for the manufacture of
low pressure liquefiable gas cylinders
Specification (third revision)
Welding rods and bare electrodes for
gas shielded arc welding of structural
steel (first revision)
Molybdenum
and chromiummolybdenum low alloy steel weldlng
rods and bare electrodes
for gas
shielded arc welding (jirst revision)
Specification for heavy washers for
steel structures
High strength structural
nuts
Specification (first revision)
Specification for hexagonal bolts for
steel structures
Specification
for hardened
and
tempered washers for high strength
structural bolts and nuts @rst revision)
Safety code for erection of structural
steelwork
Specification
for tolerances
for
fabrication of steel structures
Specification for bare wire electrodes
for submerged
arc welding
of
structural steels
Approwd tests for welding procedures:
Part 1 Fusion welding of steel
Approval tests for welders working
to approved welding procedures

(Part 1): 1974

7318 (Part 1):
1974

Part 1 Fusion welding of steel

Approval test for welders when welding procedure
approval
is not
required: Part 1 Fusion welding of
steel
Specification
for steel wire (upto
20 mm) for the manufacture of cold
forged rivets (jhst revision)
Geometrical tolerancing on technical
drawings:
Tolerances of form, orientation, location and run-out, and appropriate
geometrical
definitions
(Jirsf
revision)
Maximum material principles (first
revision)
Dimensioning
and tolerancing
of
profiles (second revision)
Practical examples of indications on
drawings
Guide
for
preparation
and
arrangement of sets of drawings and
parts lists
Code of practice
for corrosion
protection of steel reinforcement in
RB and RCC construction
Recommended
design practice for
corrosion
prevention
of steel
structures
Steel tubes for idlers for belt
conveyors @rst revision)
Metal arc welding of carbon and
carbon
manganese
steels

Recommendations
(jirst revision)
Hot-rolled
steel strip for welded
tubes and pipes Specification
(second revision)
Tolerances
for erection of steel
structures
Handbook for Structural Engineers
Structural Steel Sections

7557:1982

8000
(Part 1) : 1985/
1S0 1101:1983

(Part 2): 1992/

1S0 2692:1988
(Part 3): 1992/
1S0 1660:1987
(Part 4): 1976
8976:1978

9077:1979

9172:

979

9295:

983

9595:1996

10748:2004

12843:1989
SP6 (1): 1964

119

IS 800:2007
ANNEX
[Clause

4.1. 1(c)]

ANALYSIS AND DESIGN METHODS

B-1 ADVANCED STRUCTURAL

DESIGN

B-2.2 Design Bending Moment

ANALYSIS AND

The design bending moment under factored load shall

be taken as the maximum bending moment in the length
of the member. It shall be determined either:

B-1.l Analysis
For a frame, comprising members of compact section
with full lateral restraint, an advanced structural
analysis may be carried out, provided the analysis can
be shown to accurately model the actual behaviour of
that class of frames. The analysis shall take into
account the relevant material properties, residual
stresses, geometrical imperfections,
reduction in
stiffness due to axial compression,
second-order
effects, s.ecti~n strength
and ductility,
erection
procedures and interaction with the foundations.

a)

directly from the second-order

b)

approximately, if the member is divided into

a sufficient number of elements, as the greatest
of the element end bending moments; or

c)

by amplifying the calculated design bending

moment, taken as the maximum bending
moment along the length of a member as
obtained by superposition of the simple beam
bending moments determined by the analysis.

analysis; or

Advanced structural analysis for earthquake loads shall

take into account, as appropriate the response history,
torsional
response,
pounding
against
adjacent
structures, and strain rate effects.

For a member with zero axial force or a member subject

to axial tension, the factored design bending moment
shall be calculated as the moment obtained from second
order analysis without any amplification.

B-1.2 Design

For a member with a design axial compressive force

as determined from the analysis, the factored design
bending moment shall be calculated as follows:

For the strength limit state, it shall be sufficient to

satisfy the section capacity requirements of Section 8
for the members subjected to bending, of Section 7 for
axial members, of Section 9 for combined forces and
of Section 10 for connections.
Effect of moment
magnification given in Section 9, instability given in
Section 7 and lateral buckling given in Section 8 need
not be considered while designing the member, since
advanced analysis methods directly consider these.

M = &Mm
where
5,

= moment amplification factor for a braced

member determined
in accordance with
Section 9.

B-3 FRAME
An advanced structural analysis for earthquake loads
shall recognize that the design basis earthquake loads
calculated in accordance with IS 1893 is assumed to
correspond to the load at which the first significant
plastic hinge forms in the structure.
B-2 SECOND
DESIGN

INSTABILITY

ANALYSIS

B-3.1 Analysis
Frame instability, as treated here, is related to the design
of multi-storey rigid-jointed frames subject to side
sway. The elastic critical load factor, k~~ may be
determined
using the deflection
method as given
in B-3.2 or any other recognized method. This is used
to calculate the amplified sway moments for elastic
designs and to check frame stability in plastic designs.
The elastic critical load factor, LC, of a frame is the
ratio by which each of the factored loads would have
to be increased to cause elastic instability.

ORDER ELASTIC ANALYSIS AND

B-2.1 Analysis
In a second-order elastic analysis, the members shall
be assumed to remain elastic, and changes in frame
geometry under the design load and changes in the
effective stiffness of the members due to axial forces
shall be accounted for. In a frame where the elastic
buckling load factor (AC,)of the frame as determined
in accordance with 4.6 is greater than 5, the changes
in the effective stiffness of the members due to axial
forces may be neglected.

B-3.2 Deflection

Method

An accurate method of analysis (ordinary linear elastic

analysis) should be used to determine the horizontal
deflections of the frame due to horizontal forces applied
at each floor level, which is equal to the notional
horizontal load in 4.3.6. Allowance should be made
120

IS 800:2007
that storey of area A, given by:

for the degree of rigidity of the base as given in B-3.2

in this deflection calculation.
The base stiffness should be determined
to 4.3.4.

by reference

The elastic critical load factor, AC,is calculated

as:

where
h = storey height;

AC,=

1
200@s,M,x

b = width of the braced bay;

where

KC = sum of the stiffness I,L, of the columns

in that storey;

4s, Max= largest value of the sway inde~y OSgiven

kj =

where
h=

~SP

80E~

s 2; and
Kc

= surnof spring stiffness horizontal

force

per unit horizontal deflection of all the

panels in that storey determined from:

storey height,

8 = horizontal deflection of the top of the storey

due to the combined gravity and notional
loads, and
%=

h ~SP

Sp=

horizontal deflection of the bottom of the

storey due to gmvity and notional load.

0.6h lb
[l+(@lpEp

where

B-3.3 Partial Sway Bracing

P = thickness of the wall panel, and

In any storey the stiffening effect of infill wall panels

may be allowed for by introducing a diagonal strut in

EP = modulus of elasticit y of the panel material.

ANNEX

[Clauses

5.2.2.2(b)

and 5.6.2]

DESIGN AGAINST FLOOR VIBRATION

corresponds approximately to 0.5 percent g, where g
is the acceleration
due to gravity. Continuous
vibration is generally more annoying then decaying
vibration due to damping. Floor systems with the
natural frequency less than 8 Hz in the case of floors
supporting rhythmic activity and 5 Hz in the case of
floors supporting normal human activity should be
avoided.

C-1 GENERAL
Floor with longer spans of lighter construction and less
inherent damping are vulnerable to vibrations under
normal human activity. Natural frequency of the floor
system corresponding to the lowest mode of vibration,
damping characteristics, are important characteristics
in floor vibration. Open web steel joists (trusses) or
steel beams on the concrete deck may experience
walking vibration problem. Fatigue, overloading of
floor systems and vibrations due to rhythmic activities
such as aerobic or dance classes are not within the scope
of this Annex.
C-2 ANNOYANCE

C-3 FLOOR

FREQUENCY

The fundamental natural frequency can be estimated

by assuming full composite
action, even in noncomposite construction. This frequency,$, for a simply
supported one way system is given by

CRITERIA

In the frt?quency range of 2 to 8 Hz in which people

are most sensitive to vibration, the threshold level

j = 156~*

121

,.,,,,,

1 111

II

IS 800:2007
where
E=

S1
modulus of elasticity

(1)

= transformed moment of inertia of the one

way system (in terms of equivalent steel)
assuming the concrete flange of width equal
to the spacing of the beam to be effective,
in mm4;

IT

f,=

span length, in mm; and

w=

dead load of the one way joist, in N/mm.

(2)

(3)

2
3-4
6
up to 12

C-5 ACCELERATION
The peak acceleration ao, from heel impact for floors
of spans greater than 7m and natural frequency f], less
than 10 Hz may be calculated as:

11
=7++
A

Critical Damping
Percent

i) Fully composite construction

ii) Bare steel beam and concrete deck
iii) Ftoor with finishes, false ceiling,
fire proofing, ducts furniture
iv) Partitions not located atong a
support or not spaced father apart
than 6 m and partitions oriented in
orthogonal dwtions

If the one way joist system is supported by a flexible

beam running
perpendicular
with the natural
frequency fz, the floor frequency may be reduced to
~, given by:

fr2

System

No.

of steel, MPa;

aOlg = 600 f, /W

f,

where
C-4 DAMPING
The percentage of critical damping
approximately as given below:

ANNEX
(Ckme

DETERMINATION

total weight of floors plus contents over the span

length and equivalent floor width (b), in N;

b=

40t, (20 t,when over hang is only on one

side of the beam);

t,

= equivalent thickness of the slab, averaging

concrete in slab and ribs; and

t?

= acceleration

due to gravity.

D
7.2.2)

OF EFFECTIVE

LENGTH
b)

D-1 METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE

LENGTH OF COLUMNS IN FRAMES

OF COLUMNS

Sway Frames
[see 4.1.2(b)]

(Moment

Resisting

Frames)

The effective length factor K, of column in

sway frames is given by (see Fig. 28):

In the absence of a more exact analysis, the effective length

of columns in framed structures may be obtained by
multiplying the actual length of the column between the
centres of laterally suppotting members (beams) given
in Fig. 27 and Fig. 28 with the effective length factor K,
calculated by using the equations given below, provided
the connection between beam and column is rigid type:
a)

w=
may be assumed

K_

l-o.2(p,

-[

+p2)-o.12p,/?2

1 0.8(~1 .+ /32)+ 0.6F,pz

1
05

where

Non-sway Fmmes (BracedFrame) [(see 4.12(a)]

A frame is designated as non-sway frame if
the relative displacement
between the two
adjacent floors is restrained by bracings or
shear walls (see 4.1.2). The effective length
factor, K, of column in non-sway frames is
given by (see Fig. 27):
[1+0.145

Kc, Kb =

(#, [email protected]/32]

effective flexural stiffness of the

columns and beams meeting at the
joint at the ends of the columns
and rigidly connected at the joints,
and these are calculated by:
K= C(I/L)

K= [2- O.364(fl, + ~, )- 0.247~,/3, ]

122

.,

---

. _

IS 800:2007

HINGED

1
0.90.80.70.60.5-

t
a-

o,4-

0.3 -

0.2
0.1
0
FIXED

0.0

*
o

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

FIXED

1
HINGED

P,

FIG. 27 COLUMNEFFECTIVELENGTHFACTOR NON-SWAYFRAME

PINNED

ai

FIXED
FIXED

PINNEC)
P,~

FIG. 28 COLUMNEFFECTIVELENGTHFACTOR SWAY FRAME

123

IS 800:2007
I = moment of inertia of the member about
an axis perpendicular to the plan of the
frame.

Coefficient K, for effective length of bottom part of

double stepped column shall be taken from the formula:

L = length of the member equal to centreto-centre distance of the intersecting

member.
C = correction

,=m

factor as shown in Table 35.

where

Table 35 Correction Factors for Effective

Flexural Stiffness
S1 Far End Condition

Correction

No.

(1)

Factor, C

i) Pinned

1.5(1-ti)

tl

1.5(1-E)

2.0(1 -0.4E)

IILl i- IZLZ
LI + L,

0.67(1 - 0.4E)

1,, = average value of moment of inertia for the

middle and top parts

where
P. = elastic buckling load, and
P

and K3 are taken from Table41.

I,v = average value of moment of inertia for the

lower and middle parts

1.0(1 - o.2Fi)

ii) Rigidly connected to column 1.0(1 n)

iii) Fixed

Kz,

BracedFrame UnbraeedFrame
(3)
(4)

(2)

K,,

= applied load.

IZLZ i- I~L~
L, + L,

Value of coefficient
given by formula:

D-2 METHOD FOR DETERMINING EFFECTIVE

LENGTH FOR STEPPED COLUMNS (see 7.2.2)

Kz for middle part of column is

K2=~,

D-2.1 Single Stepped Columns

coefficient
by:

Effective length in the plane of stepping (bending about

axis Z-Z) for bottom and top parts for single stepped
column shall be taken as given in Table 36.

D-3 EFFECTIVE
LENGTH
STEPPED COLUMNS

FOR

KS for the top part of the column is given

K3+3

NTOTE The provisions of D-2.1 are applicable to intermediate

columns as well with stepping on either side, provided
appropriate values Of IIand [j are taken.

and

where

DOUBLE

II (P2+P3)

c2=~

L,

Effective lengths in the plane of steppings (bending

about axis Z-Z) for bottom, middle and top parts for a
double stepped column shall be taken as follows
(see also Fig. 29):

12(~+P2+P,

c3=:m

NOTE The provisions of D-3 are applicable to intermediate

columns as well with steppings on either side, provided
aPPfOPriate
values of I,, 12and It are taken.

P3

P3

p2 /3

L!3

i-----

p, /2

L2
+L1

/1

(a)

,3

L3

L2+L3
P,

l--

L1+L2

L,+L2
/ av

L,

i--

p213

L\

Iav

1-

11

(c)

(b)

+F

YI

FIG. 29 EFFECTIVELENGTHOF DOUBLESTEPPEDCOLUMNS

124

f,
1(d)

IS 800:2007
Table 36 Effective Length of Single Stepped Columns
(Clause D-2. 1)
SI

Degree of End Restraint

Sketch

Effeetive Length Coefficients

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

i)

Effectively held in position

against
and restrained
rotation at both ends

No.

Column Parameters
All Cases
(5)

tl

where

Effectively held in position

at both ends and restrained
against rotation at bottom
end only

1,

K,zand K,!areto
per Table 37

33

-1

71

12

ii)

for

be taken as

L1

=Jw7-

Ii?

Kz=&3
I

where

K,zand Kll are to be taken as

per Table38

Effectively held in position

and restrained against
rotation at bottom end, and
top end held against
rotation but not held in
position

iii)

K, to be taken as per Table39

Effective length of bottom
part of column in plane 01
stepping = KVLI

1
Effectively held in position
and restrained against
rotation at bottom end, and
top end neither held against
rotation nor held in
position

iv)

K,

to be taken as per Table40

Effective length of top part o]

column in plane of stepping=

K~L2

1,

!1,
I
Table 37 Coeftlcients

of Effective Lengths K12and K,, for columns with Both Ends Effectively Heid in
Position and Restrained Against Rotation
(Table 36)
Coeftlcients

12/1[

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

K12and

K1lfor LJLI Equal to

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.2

L4

1.6

1.8

2.0

2.67
2.20
1.72
1.48
1.23
1.23
1.00

3.03
2.40
1.92
1.67
1.39
1.39
1.10

3.44
2.60
2.11
1.82
1.53
1.53

3.85
2.86
2.28
1.96
1.66
1.66

4.34
3.18
2.45
2.12
1.79
1.79

4.77
3.41
2.64
2.20
1.92
1.92

1.20

1.30

1.40

1.50

Coefficient KU (PI =0)

0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
1.0

0.74
0.67
0.64
0.62
0.60
0.59
0.55

0.94
0.76
0.70
0.68
0.66
0.65
0.60

1.38
1.00
0.79
0.74
0.71
0.70
0.65

1.60
1.20
0.93
0.85
0.77
0.77
0.70

1.87
1.42
1.07
0.95
0.82
0.82
0.75

2.07
1.61
1.23
1.06
0.93
0.93
0.80

2.23
1.78
1.41
1.18
0.99
0.99
0.85

Coefficient

0.05
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
1.0

0.65
0.64
0.62
0.60
0.58
0.57
0.55

0.67
0.65
0.64
0.63
0.63
0.61
0.58

0.71
0.65
0.65
0.64
0.63
0.63
0.60

0.85
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.64
0.64
0.61

1.01
0.78
0.66
0.66
0.64
0.64
0.62

1.17
0.92
0.73
0.67
0.66
0.65
0.63

1.31
1.05
0.83
0.73
0.68
0.68
0.65

2.39
1.92
1.50
1.28
1.08
1.08
0.90

2.52
2.04
1.60
1.39
1.17
1.17
0.95

1.50
1.25
1.01
0.89
0.82
0.77
0.70

NOTE Intermediatevaluemaybe obtainedby interpolation.

125

L,

i
~
/1

1
3

K,, (P2= O)
1.41
1.15
0.92
0.81
0.75
0.72
0.67

PZ

II
1.57
1.33
1,09
0.94
0.88
0.83
0.73

1.67
1.45
1.23
1.09
1.01
0.94
0.80

1.74
1.55
1.33
1.20
1.10
1.04
0.88

1.78
1.62
1.41
1.28
1.19
1.12
0.93

1.82
1.68
1.48
1.35
1.26
1.19
1.01

1.86
1.71
1.54
1.41
1.32
1.25
1.05

1
1
P, +P2

L,
-1

IS800:2007
Table 38 Coefficients

of Effective Lengths Klzand Kllfor Columns with Both Ends Effectively

Position and Restrained Against Rotation at Bottom End Only
(Table 36)
Coefficients

12/1,

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.8

Coeftlcient
0.05
o.!
0,3
0.5

1.0

0.97
0.83
0.78
0.78
0.78

1.66
1.21
0.90
0.86
0.85

2.10
1.57
1.09
0.99
0.92

2.43
1.95
1.27
1.10
0.99

2.72
2.14
1.44
1.22
1.06

KU and KII for LAI

0.7

2.92
2.33
1.60
1.35
1.13

3.08
2.46
1.74
1.47
1,20

0.9

Equal to

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

3.73
2.91
2.11
1.76
1.41

4.22
3.28
2.35
1.96
1.54

4.85
3.61
2.51
2.15
1.68

5.36
4.03
2.76
2.34
1.82

6.00
4.43
2.99
2.50
1.97

6.58
4.85
3.25
2.76
2.10

P*

K,, (P, = O)
3.24
2.60
1,86
1.57
1.27

3.48
2.76
1.98
1.67
1.34

L2

0.67
0.67
0.67
0,67
0.67

0,67
0.67
0.67
0.67
0.67

0.82
0.73
0.67
0.67
0.67

1.16
0.93
0.71
0.69
0.68

1.35
1.11
0.80
0.73
0.71

1.48
1.25
0.90
0.81
0.74

1.58
1.36
0.99
0.87
0.78

1.65
1.45
1.08
0.94
0.82

1,69
1.52
1,15
1.01
0.87

P,

12

E
,
L,

Coefficient KI I(PI = O)
0.05
().!
0,3
0,5
i ,0

Held in

1.74
1.57
1.22
1.07
0.91

1.81
I .66
1.33
1.17
0.99

1.84
1.72
1.41
1.26
1.07

1.86
1.77
1.48
1.33
1.13

I .88
1.80
1.54
1.39
1.19

1.90
1.82
1.59
1.44
1.24

+
p, +p2

NOTE Intermediate value maybe obtained by interpolation.

Table 39 Coefficients of Effective Lengths K1for Columns Effectively Held in Position and Restrained
Against Rotation at Bottom End and Top End Held Against Rotation but not Held in Position
(Table 36)
Coefficients KI for 12/11 Equal to
c]

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

P2

2.0

()

2.0

1.8

1,7

1.67

1.6

1,55

1.50

1.4

1.43

1.4

1.37

1.3

1.1

1.10

1.0

05

2.0

1.9

1.8

1.74

1.6

1,65

1.61

1.5

1,55

1.5

I .0

2,0

2.0

2.0

2.00

2.0

2.00

---

1.5

2.0

2.2

2.3

2.48-

2.0

2.0

2,62.9

2.5

2.5

3.1

3.0

3.0

3.74,1

t
/2

&
P,

/1

L,

3.5

p, ip2

NOTE - Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.

Table 40 Coefficients of Effective Lengths K1for Columns with Top Ends Free and Bottom End
Effectively Held in Position and Restrained Against Rotation
(Table 36)
Coefficients

K, for lJ1, Equal to

P2

0.1

0.2

13.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.o

2.5

5.o

10

20

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.0

0.5

2.0

2.14

2.24

2.36

2.47

2.57

2.67

2.76

2.85

2.94

3.02

1,0

2.0

2.73

3.13

3.44

3.74

4.00

1,5

3.0

3.774.354.86

2.0

4.0

4.905.67

2.5

5.0

6.08

7.00

3.0

6.0

7.25

c,

;2
P,

/1

J
L,

NOTE Intermediate values maybe obtained by interpolation.

126

1
i
p, +p2

IS 800:2007
Table 41 Values of Kl, Kz and KB
(Clause D-3)

sl

Degree of End
Restraint

Sketch

K,

No.
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

ii)

iii)

iv)

ffectively
held in
~sition and restrained
~ainst rotation at both
Ids

:, =K,,

Kz

K,

(5)

(6)

:z=K,,

{here KI I is vhere KI I is
+
~ken
from aken
from
able37
able37

ffectively held ir
osition at both end{
ird restrained agains
)tation at bottom enc
rrly

,,,

affectively held in
,osition turd restrained
,gairtst rotation
al
~ttomend, and top end
eldagainst rotation bul
ot held in position

~, - ~,

ffectively held ir
osition and restraine{
gainst rotation
a
ottom end, and top em
either held agains
]tation nor agains
anslation.

=K,,

C2=K,,

vhere K, I is vhere KI I k
aken
from aken
fmm
able38
rable 38

r? = K!

CrAbmn Parameters
<or All Cases
(7)

3= K[2
,here K,l is taken
omTable 37

:3 =K, *

~here K12is taker

rom Table38

.(3 = KI

~here K{ is where K, is where KI k taken

ikcn
from aken
from from Table39 with
able 39 with able 39 with
,, co
:,=0

K, = K,

Kl=~

KZ=2

where KI is taker
from Table40 witt
c,=

L,
L, +L,

r
~

[,,

IS 800:2007

ANNEX

(Clause 8.2.2.1)
ELASTIC
E-1 ELASTIC
E-1.l

CRITICAL

LATERAL TORSIONAL

BUCKLING

E-1.2 Elastic
Critical
Moment
Symmetrical About Minor Axis

MOMENT

of a Section

General

In case of a beam which is symmetrical only about the

minor axis, and bending about major axis, the elastic
critical moment for lateral torsional buckling is given
by the general equation:

The elastic critical moment is affected by:

a)

Moment gradient in the unsupported

b)

Boundary
points,

c)

Non-symmetric and non-prismatic

the member, and

d)

conditions

Location of transverse
shear centre.

The boundary conditions

two components:
a)

b)

length,

at the lateral support

X2EIY

nature of

c, = c1 (L,,)

load with respect to

~[(
)
K

~+

2I

Kw

1,

0,5
GI, (LLT )2
Y +
rr2EI

(c2Yg c3Yj)-]

C2Yg c3Yj)
-(

at the lateral supports have

Torsional restraint Where the cross-section

is prevented from rotation about the shear
centre, and

where
cl,

Warping restraint Where the flanges are

prevented from rotating in their own plane
about an axis perpendicular to the flange.

c2~ C3 =

K=

factors depending upon the loading and

end restraint conditions (see Table 42).
effective
length
factors
of the
unsupported
length accounting
for
boundary conditions at the end lateral
supports. The effective length factor K
varies from 0.5 for complete restraint
against rotation about weak axis to 1.0
for free rotate about weak axis, with 0.7
for the case of one end fixed and other
end free. It is analogous to the effective
length factors for compression members
with end rotational restraint.

The elastic critical moment corresponding to Iaterd

torsional buckling of a doubly symmetric prismatic
beam subjected to uniform moment in the unsupported
length and torsionally restraining lateral supports is
given by:

KW = warping restraint Factor. Unless special

provisions to restrain warping of the
section at the end lateral supports are
made, KW should be taken as 1.0.

where
IY,I,., 1, = moment of inertia about the minor axis,
warping constant and St. Venants torsion
constant
of
the
cross-section,
respectively;

between
the point of
Yg = y distance
application of the load and the shear
centre of the cross-section and is positive
when the load is acting towards the shear
centre from the point of application.

G = modulus of rigidity; and

LLT = effective length against lateral torsional
buckling (see 8.3).
This equation in simplified form for I-section has been
presented in 8.2.2.1.
While the simplified equation is generally on the safe
side, there are many situations where this may be very
conservative. More accurate calculation of the elastic
critical moment for general case of unsymmetrical
sections, loading away from shear centre and beams
with moment gradient can be obtained from specialist
literature,
by using an appropriate
computer
programme or equations given below.

Yj

y,

Y, -o.5\A(z2

-y2)ydA/Iz

co-ordinate
of the shear centre with
respect to centroid, positive when the
shear centre is on the compression side
of the centroid.
co-ordinates of the elemental area with
respect to centroid of the section.
can be calculated by using the following
approximation:

128

IS 800:2007
a)

b)

where

Plain flanges
Yj =

0.8 (z~f1) hY/2.O

(when ~~ > 0.5)

A.

yj = 1.0 (z~f - 1) hy/2.O

(when ~~ < 0.5)

b, t = breadth and thiCkness of the elements

of the section,
respectively.

Lipped flanges
Yj =0.8 (2&- 1) (1+ h~/h)
(when fl~> 0.5)
Yj = (2&

1) (1+

hY/2

The warping
given by:

I w=

hL/h) hY/2

(when flf S 0.5)

h
hY

It

= height of the lip,

= overall
height
section, and

of

= O for angle, Tee, narrow

rectangle
section
and
approximately
for hollow
sections

the

= distance
between
shear
centre of the two flanges of
the crmis-section.

&

= IfC/(IfC+ If,) where lfC,lf(are

the moment of inertia of the
compression
and tension
flanges, respectively, about
the minor axis of the entire
section.

= torsion constant, given by:

= ~biti

/3 for open section

= 4A~2 f~(blt)
section

constant,

(l~f) ~f [YhY2for I-sections

mono-symmetric
about
weak axis

where
hL

= area enclosed by
the section, and

for hollow

Table 42 Constants

cl, Czand c~
(Clause E-1.2)

Loading and Support Conditions

Bending Moment Diagram

Constants

Value of K
~

(1)

(3)

(2)

VJ=+l

V= +314

V=+I12

$===+

(6)

1.000
1.000

1.0
0.7
0.5

1.141
1.270
1.305

0.998
1.565
2.283

1.0
0.7
0.5

1.323
1.473
1.514

0.992
1.556
2.271

t ,0
0.7
0.5

1.563
I .739
1.788

0.977
1.531
2.235

I ,0
0,7
0.5

1.879
2.092
2.150

0.939
1.473
2.150

1.0
0.7
0.5

2.281
2.538
2.609

0.855
1.340
1.957

1.0
0.7
0,5

2.704
3.009
3.093

0.676
1,059
1.546

1.0

2.927
3.009
3.093

0.366
0.575
0,837

2.752
3.063
3.149

0.000
0.000
0.000

1,0
0.7
0.5

129

(5)

1,0
0.7
0.5

0.7
0.5

(4)

I .000
1.113
1.144

I .000

IS

800:2007

Table 42 (Conclude@
Loading and Support Conditions

Bending Moment Diagram

Valne of K

Constants
c

(2)

(1)

(3)

(2)

:)

(%

1.0
0.5

1.132
0.972

0.459
0.304

0.525
0.980

1.0
0.5

1.285
0.712

1.562
0.652

0.753
1.070

1.0
0.5

1.365
1.070

0.553
0.432

1.780
3.050

I .0
0.5

1.565
0.938

1.257
0.715

2.640
4.800

1.0

1.046

0.430

1.120

0.5

1.010

0.410

1.390

IF

L/4

~F

L/4~L/4

1/4

Illlllly

ANNEX
(Clause

F
10.6.1)

CONNECTIONS
should the strength developed be less than 50 percent
of the effective strength of the material spliced. Wherever
possible in welded construction, flange plates shall be
joined by complete penetration butt welds. These butt
welds shall develop the full strength of the plates.
Whenever the flange width or thickness changes at the
splice location, gradual transition shall be made in the
width/thickness of the larger flange.

F-1 GENJ3RAL

The requirement for the design of splice and beam to

column connection as well as recommendation for their
design shall be as given below.
F-2 BEAM SPLICES
F-2.1 For rolled section beam splices located away
from the point of maximum
moment, it may be
assumed that the flange splice carries all the moment
and the web splice carries the shear (see Fig. 30).
However in the case of a deep girder, the total moment
may be divided between the flange and the web in
accordance
with the stress distribution.
The web
connection should then be designed to resist its share
of moment and shear. Even web splice is designed to
carry only shear force, the moment about the centroid
of the bolt group on either side of the splice should be
designed for moment due to eccentricity.

F-2.3 When beam splice is located at the point of

inflection of a continuous beam, the flange splicing
requirement given above may be relaxed appropriately.
F-3 COLUMN

SPLICE

F-3.1 Where the ends of compression members are

faced for bearing over the whole area, they shall be
spliced to hold the connected parts aligned. The ends
of compression
members faced for bearing shall
invariably be machined to ensure perfect contact of
surfaces in bearing (see Fig. 31).

F-2.2 Flange joints should preferably not be located at

points of maximum stress. Where splice plates are used
(see Fig. 30), their area shall not be less than 5 percent
in excess of the area of the flange element spliced; and
their centre of gravity shall coincide, as nearly as possible
with that of the element spliced. There shall be enough
fasteners on each side of the splice to develop the load
in the element spliced plus 5 percent but in no case

F-3.2 Where such members are not faced for complete

bearing the splices shall be designed to transmit all the
forces to which the member is subjected at the splice
location.
F-3.3 Wherever possible, splices shall be proportioned
and arranged so that centroidal axis of the splice
130

IS 800:2007
, ,

I I I I

1 I I

I
I

I I

I 1

-! I

II

00
00
00
00
L00

I
II

Md
.1

-1
\

VM

I 1 I I 11,11,
I
I I I II II I 1 1 \
I
I

SPLICE PIATE
(OPTIONAL)

VEW!!RED

INNER SPLICE PLATE\

UNDER

(OPTIONAL)
30A Conventional

I
I
I
I, -

Splice (Typical)

DESIGN

306 End Plate Splice

FIG. 30 BEAM SPLICES

coincides as nearly as possible with the centroidal axes

of the members joined, in order to avoid eccentricity;
but where eccentricity
is present in the joint, the
resulting stress considering
eccentricity
shall be
provided for.
F-3.4 If a column flange is subjected to significant
tension or if the faces are not prepared for bearing, or
if full continuity is required without slip, only HSFG
bolts shall be used.

separate lateral load resisting system is to be provided

in the form of bracings or shear walls. The connections
shown in Fig. 32 (A), (B), (C) and (D) can be assumed
as simple connections in framed analysis and need to
be checked only for the transfer of shear from beam to
column.
F-4.2 Rigid Connections
In high-rise
and slender
structures,
stiffness
requirements may warrant the use of rigid connections.
Rigid connections transfer significant moments to the
columns and are assumed to undergo negligible
deformations at the joint. These are necessary in sway
frames for stability and also contribute in resisting
lateral loads. The connections shown in Fig. 32 (E),
(F), (G) can be assumed as rigid connection in frame
analysis and need to be checked for both shear and
moment transfer from beam to the column. Fully
welded connections can also be considered as rigid
beam to column connections.
F-4.3 Semi-rigid

Semi-rigid connections fall between the two types

mentioned above. The fact is that simple connections
do have some degree of rotational rigidity as in the
semi-rigid connections. Similarly rigid connections do
experience some degree of joint deformation and this
can be utilised to reduce the joint design moments.

FIG. 31 COLUMNSPLICE(TYPICAL)
F-4 BEAM-TO-COLUMN

Connections

The moment-rotation
relationship of the connections
have to be determined
based on experiments
conducted for the specific design or based on the
relationship derived from tests, presented in specialist
Iiteroture. The simplest method of analysis will be to
idealize the connection as an equivalent rotational
spring with either a bilinear or non-linear moment-

CONNECTIONS

F-4.1 Simple Connections

Simple connections are assumed to transfer only shear

at some nominal eccentricity and typically used in
frames up to about five stories in height, where strength
rather than stiffness govern the design. In such frames
31

IS 800:2007

-Fl1
I

(s

I
da

0
0
0

1
r

I
_t

t
D

32A Single Web Angle

32B Double Web Angle

7(i
1

f.

II

32C Top and Seat Angle with

Double Web Angle

32D Top and Seat Angle without

Double Web Angie

:::--1
--1

L-tp

: : ; :2

--l

32E End Plate without Column Stiffeners

I--tp

32F End Plate with Column Stiffeners

m
t-%

00
00

dp

00

--l

l-+

II

32G T-Stub

32H Header Plate

FIG. 32 SIZE PARAMETERFOR VARIOUS TYPES OF CONNECTION

132

IS 800:2007
F-4.3.2 Connection

rotation characteristics.
The classification
proposed
by Bjorhovde combined with the Frey-Morris model
can be used with convenience to model semi-rigid
connections, as given in the next section.
F-4.3.1 Connection

Frye-Morris has derived the following polynomial

model for the moment curvature relationship of semirigid connections:

Classification

e,= Ckums + C2UGW3+ C3OWP

where

Connections are classified according to their ultimate

strength or in terms of their initial elastic stiffness
and Bjorhovdes classification.
It is based on the
non-dimensional
moment parameter (m = MU/ MP~)
and the non-dimensional
rotation
(01 = 0, /eP)
parameter,
where f)P is the plastic rotation.
The
Bjorhovdes classification
is based on a reference
length of the beam equal to 5 times the depth of the
beam. The limits used for connection classification
are shown in Table 43 and are graphically
represented in Fig. 33.

Al = moment at the joint, in kN m;

K = standardization parameter which depend
on the connection type and geometry;
and
Cl, C2, CS = curve fitting constants
Table 44 shows the curve fitting constants
and standardization constants for FryeMorris Model [All size parameters in the
table are in mm (see Fig. 32)].

Table 43 Connection

Classification

Limits

S1 No.

Nature of the Connection

In Terms of Strength

(1)

(2)

(3)

i)

ii)
iii)

Models

In Terms of
Stiffness
(4)

Rigid connection

ml >0.7

m1~2.50[

Semi-rigid connection

0.7> m >0.2

2.5t9>trr>

Flexibleconnection

r?r~<0.2

m<0.50

\\

0.5(1

ROTATION

1.0

0.8

0,6

0.4

0.2

8/=

618P

FIG. 33 CLASSIFICATIONOF CONNECTIONS ACCORDINGTOBJORHOVDE

133

2.7

IS 800:2007
Table 44 Connection

sl

Type

Connection

Constants in Frye-Morris
(Clause F-4.3.2)

Type

Curve-Fitting
Constants

No.

(1)

(2)

i)

Single web angle connection

ii)

Double web angle connection

iii)

Top and seat angle connectionwith doubleweb

angle

iv)

Top and seat angle connection without double

web angle

v)

End plate connectionwithoutcolumnstiffeners

vi)

End plate connectionwith columnstiffeners

vii)

T-stubconnection

viii)

Headerplate connection

(3)

For preliminary

(5)

~ = ~a-2.4tC.l.81g0.1S

C,=l.91 x 104
Cz= 1.30X 10
CJ=2.70 x 107
(2,=1.64 x 103
CZ=l.03 x 104
C3=8.18 x 1025
C, =2.24 x 10-
CZ=I.86 x 104
CJ=3.23 x IOg
CI=I.63 x 103
CZ=7.25 x 104
C3=3.31 x 1023
CI=l.78 x 104
CZ=-9.55 x 10s
C3=5.54 x 1029
CI 2.60 x 102
cj=~.37 x 10
C3=1.31 x IO*2
c1 =4.05 x 102
cl=4.45 x 103
cj=2.03
x 1023
C,=3.87
C,=2.71 x 105
C3=6.06X lo

~ = &4 ~C-l,81g0.1S
~ = ~-!.287ta-l,128tC-0.415
/;13694@
- (3,5@35
~ = ~- 1.518
-0.5
~,-0.7~<
1.1
~ = ~g-2,4tp.04tf
-1.5
~ = ~g-2.4,P.0.6
K=d-s tC-O*[,
-07d<1

in mm
t.= thicknessof web of the beam in the connection, in mm
tP= thickness of end plate, header plate, in mm
l.= length of the angle, in mm
L= length of the T-stub connector,in mm

If= thickness of flange T-stub connector,

depth of the angle, in mm

diameter of the bolt, in mm
center-to-centre of the outermost bolt of the end plate
connection, in mm
g = gauge distance of bolt line
I,= thickness of the top angle, in mm

Constants

/.= thickness of the web angle, in mm

depth of beam

NOTE

Standardization

(4)

where (see Fig. 32)

d=
d,=
db=
dg=

Model

analysis using a bilinear moment curvature relationship, the stifiess

given in Table 45 may be assumed

depending on the type of connection. The values are based on the secant stiffness at a rotation of 0.01 radian and typical dimension of
connecting angle and other components as given in the table.

Table 45 Secant Stiffness

(Table 44)

s]

Type of Connection

No.

(2)

(1)

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)

Single web connection angle

Double web-angle connection

Top and seat angle connection without double web

angle connection
Header plate

Dimension

Secant Stiffeners

mm

kNm/radian

(3)

(4)

da=250, f,= 10, g=35

d,= 250, r,= 10, g= 77,5
da=300, t.= 10, /==] 40, db=213

1150
4450

dp= 175, fp= 10, g=75,

2300

F-5 COLUMN BASES

tw=7.5

2730

of the joint between the base plate and the foundation

shall be determined taking account of the material
properties and dimensions of both the grout and the
concrete foundation.

F-5.1 Base Plates

Columns shall be provided with base plates capable of
distributing the compressive forces in the compressed
parts of the column over a bearing area such that the
bearing pressure on the foundation does not exceed
the design strength of the point. The design strength

F-5.2 Holding Down Bolts (Anchor Bolts)

F-5.2.1 Holding down bolts shall be provided if
necessary to resist the effects of the design loads.
134

IS 800:2007
They shall be designed to resist tension due to uplift
forces and tension due to bending
moments
as
appropriate.

F-5.2.4 If no special elements for resisting the shear

force are provided,
such as block or bar shear
connectors, it shall be demonstrated
that sufficient
resistance to transfer the shear force between the
column and the foundation is provided by one of the
following:

F-5.2.2 When calculating the tension forces due to

bending moments, the lever arm shall not be taken as
more than the distance between the centroid of the
bearing area on the compression side and the centroid
of the bolt group on the tension side, taking the
tolerances on the positions of the holding down bolts
into account.
F-5.2.3 Holding down bolts shall either be anchored
into the foundation by a hook or by a washer plate or
by some other appropriate load distributing member
embedded in the concrete.

ANNEX

a)

Frictional resistance of the joint between the

base plate and the foundation.

b)

Shear resistance

of the holding down bolts.

c)

Shear resistance
the foundation.

of the surrounding

d)

Shear and bearing resistance of the shear key

plates welded to the base plate and embedded
in the pedestal/foundation.

part of

(Clause 17. 16)

GENERAL

RECOMMENDATIONS

FOR STEELWORK

TENDERS

AND CONTRACTS

the proposed location and main dimensions

of the building or structure;

G-1 GENERAL
G-1.l The recommendations
given in this Annex are
in line with those generally adopted for steelwork
construction and are meant for general information.

b)

Ground levels, existing and proposed;

c)

Particulars of buildings or other constructions

which may have to remain on the actual site
of the new building or structure during the
erection of the steelwork;

d)

Particulars of adjacent buildings affecting, or

affected by, the new work;

G-1.3 The recommendations

are unsuitable
for
inclusion as a block requirement in a contract, but in
drawing up a contract the points mentioned should be
given consideration.

e)

Stipulation regarding
or time schedule;

f)

Conditions affecting the position or continuity

of members;

G-2 EXCHANGE

g)

Limits of length and weight of steel members

in transit and erection;

h)

Drawings of the substructure,

existing, showing:

G-1.2 These recommendations

do not form part of the
requirements of the standard and compliance with these
is not necessary for the purpose of complying with this
standard.

OF INFORMATION

Before the steelwork

design is commenced,
the
building designer should be satisfied that the planning
of the building, its dimensions and other principal
factors meet the requirements of the building owner
and comply with regulations
of all authorities
concerned. Collaboration
of building designer and
steelwork designer should begin at the outset of the
project by joint consideration of the planning and of
such questions as the stanchion spacing, materials to
be used for the construction, and depth of basement.
G-3 INFORMATION
REQUIRED
STEELWORK
DESIGNER

sequence

proposed

or

1)

levels of stanchion foundations, if already

determined;

2)

any details affecting the stanchion bases

or anchor bolts;

3)

permissible
foundation;

bearing
and

4)

provisions

for grouting.

pressure

on the

NOTE In the case of new work, the substructure

should be designed in accordance with the relevant
standards dealing with foundations and substructure.

BY THE

G-3.1 General

a)

the erection

j)

Site plans showing in plan and elevation of

135

The maximum wind velocity appropriate

the site (see IS 875); and

to

IS 800:2007
k)

G-3.2
a)

d)

Accessibility
supply;

e)

Whether the steelwork contractor will be

required to survey the site and set out or check
the building or structure lines, foundations and
levels;

f-)

Setting-out plan of foundations,

and levels of bases;

g)

Cross-sections
and elevations of the steel
structure, as necessary, with large-scale details
of special features;

h)

Whether the connections are to be bolted,

riveted or welded. Particular attention should
be drawn to connections of a special nature,
such as turned bolts, high strength friction grip
bolts, long rivets and overhead welds;

j)

Quality
of
identification;

k)

Requirements
in respect
of protective
paintings at works and on site, galvanizing or
cement wash;

m)

Approximate dates for commencement

completion of erection;

Large-scale details should be given of any

special features affecting the steelwork.

n)

The inclusive weight per mz of walls, floors,

roofs,
suspended
ceilings,
stairs and
partitions, or particulars of their construction
and finish for the computation of dead load.

Details of any tests which have to be made

during the course of erection
or upon
completion; and

P)

Schedule of quantities. Where the tenderer is

required to take off quantities, a list should
be given of the principal items to be included
in the schedule.

Environmental factors, such as proximity to

sea coast,
and corrosive
atmosphere.
Reference
to bye-laws
and regulations
affecting
the steelwork
design
and
construction.
Further

Information

Relating

to Buildings

Plans of the floors and roof with principal

dimensions,
elevations and cross-sections
showing heights between floor levels.

b)

The occupancy of the floors and the positions

of any special loads should be given.

c)

The building drawings, which should be fully

dimensioned, should preferably be to the scale
of 1 to 100 and should show all stairs, fireescapes, lifts, etc, suspended ceilings, flues
and ducts for heating and ventilating. Doors
and windows
should be shown, as the
openings may be taken into account in the
computations of dead load.
Requirements should be given in respect of
any maximum depth of beams or minimum
head room.

d)

The plans should indicate the floors, which

are to be designed to carry partitions. Where
the layout of partitions is not known, or a
given layout is liable to alteration, these facts
should be specially noted so that allowance
may be made for partitions in any position
(see IS 875).
e)

G-4.2 Additional

The superimposed
loads on the floors
appropriate to the occupancy, as given in
IS 875 or as otherwise required.

f)

Details of special loads from cranes, runways,

tips, lifts, bunkers, tanks, plant and equipment.

g)

The grade of fire resistance appropriate

occupancy as may be required.

G-4 INFORMATION
REQUIRED
(IF NOT ALSO DESIGNER
)

b)

Climatic conditions at site-seasonat variations

of temperature, humidity, wind velocity and
direction;

c)

Nature of soil. Results of the investigation

sub-soil at site of building or structure;

of

136

pro~isions

for

and

Relating to Buildings

b)

Plan of g,rillages showing sizes, lengths and

levels of grillage beams and particulars of any
stiffeners required;

c)

Plans of floor beams showing sizes, lengths

and levels eccentricities and end moments.
The beam reactions and details of the type of
connection required should be shown on the
plans;

d)

Plan of roof steelwork. For a flat roof, the plan

should give particulars similar to those of a
floor plan. Where the roof is pitched, details
should be given of trusses, portals, purlins,
bracing, etc;

e)

The steelwork drawings should preferably be

to a scale of 1 to 100 and should give
identification marks against all members; and

f)

Particulars of holes required for services,

pipes, machinery fixings, etc. Such holes
should preferably be drilled at works.

G-4.1 General
listed under G-3.1;

Information

and

stanchions

Schedule of stanchions giving sizes, lengths

and typical details of brackets, joints, etc;

BY TENDERER

All information

steel,

of power

a)

to the

a)

of site and details

IS 800:2007
G-4.3 Information Relating to Execution of Building
Work
a)

Supply of Materials;

b)

Weight of Steelwork

c)

Wastage of Steel;

d)

Insurance,
to Site;

e)

Site Facilities for Erection;

f)

Tools and Plants;

g)
h)

Mode and Terms of Payment;

j)

Forced Majeure (Sections and provisions for

liquidation
and damages
for delay in
completion); and

k)

Escalation

for Payment;

Freight and Transport

G-8.1 Access to Contractors

The contractor should offer facilities for the inspection

of the work at all stages.
G-8.2 Inspection

from Shop

G-8.3 Inspection

Sections.

In addition to the number of copies of the approved

drawings or details required under the contract,
dimensioned shop drawings or details should be
submitted in duplicate to the engineer who should
retain one copy and return the other to the steel supplier
or fabricators with his comments, if any.

G-9 MAINTENANCE
G-9.1 General
Where steelwork is to be encased in solid concrete,
brickwork or masonry, the question of maintenance
should not arise, but where steelwork is to be housed
in hollow fire protection
or is to be unprotected,
particularly
where the steelwork is exposed to a
corroding agent, the question of painting or protective
treatment of the steelwork should be given careful
consideration at the construction stage, having regard
to the special circumstances of the case.

G-6 TIME SCHEDULE

As the dates on which subsequent
trades can
commence, depend on the progress of erection of the
steel framing, the time schedule for the latter should
be carefully drawn up and agreed to by the parties
concerned at a joint meeting.

G-9.2 Connections

ON SITE

Where connections are exposed to a corroding agent,

they should be periodically inspected, and any corroded
part should be thoroughly cleaned and painted.

The steelwork contractor should be responsible for the

positioning and Ievelling of all steelwork. Any checking
or approval of the setting out by the general contractor
or the engineer should not relieve the steelwork
contractor of his responsibilities in this respect.

G-9.2.1 Where bolted connections

are not solidly
encased and are subject to vibratory
effects of
machinery
or plant, they should be periodically
inspected and all bolts tightened.

G-8 INSPECTION
may be made

on Site

To facilitate inspection, the contractor should during

all working hours, have a foreman
or properly
accredited charge hand available on the site, together
with a complete set of contract drawings and any
further drawings and instructions which may have been
issued from time to time,

G*5 DETAILING

References
guidance.

of Fabrication

Unless otherwise, agreed, the inspection should be

carried out at the place of fabrication. The contractor
should be responsible for the accuracy of the work
and for any error, which may be subsequently
discovered.

Schedules;

G-7 PROCEDURE

Works

to IS 7215 for general

137

ANNEX

sm

..
!S
o

(Informative)
PLASTIC

PROPERTIES

Table 46 Plastic Properties

Designation

(1)
LSWB 600
ISWB 600
ISMB 600
ISWB 550

.
u
00

ISLB 600
ISMB 550
ISWB 500
ISLB 550
ISMB 500
ISHB 450
ISHB 450
ISLB 500
ISWB 450
ISHB 400
ISHB 400
ISMB 450
ISLB 450
ISWB 400
ISHB 350
ISHB 350
ISMB 400
ISLB 400
ISWB 350
lSHB 300
ISHB 300
ISMC 400
LSMB350
lSLB 350
lSLC 400
ISWB 300
lSHB 250
ISLB 325

Weight per

Seetional

Metre

Area

Depth of Seetion

Width of

Thickness

of

OF BEAMS

of Beams (see also IS 808)

Radii ofGyration

Flange

Flange

Thickness of
Web

(D)

( b,)

(t,)

(tw)

< (r.)

Section
Modulus

(r,)

Plastic

(Zez)

(%J

kg/m

cmz

mm

mm

mm

mm

cm

cm

cm

cm

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(lo)

(11)

*145.1
*133.7
*122.6
*112.5
*99.5
103.7
*95.2
*86.3
86.9
92.5
87.2
*75.O
79.4
82.2
77.4
72.4
*65.3
66.7
72.4
67.4
*61.5
*56.9
56.9
63.0
58.8
*49.4
52.4
49.5
*45.7
48.1
54.7
*43.1

184.86
170.38
156.21
143.34
126.07
132.11
121.22
109.97

110.74
117.89
111.14
95.50
10I. I5
104.66
98.66
92.27
83.14
85.01
92.21
85.91
78.40
72.43
72.50
80.25
74.85
62.93.
66.70
63.01
58.25
61.33
69.71
54.90

600
600
600
550
600
550
500
550
500
450
450
500
450
400
400
450
450
400
350
350
400
400
350
300
300
400
350
350
400
300
250
325

250
250
210
250
210
190
250
190
180
250
250
180
200
250
250
150
170
200
250
250
140
165
200
250
250
100
140
165
100
200
250
165

23.6
21.3
20.8
17.6
15.5
19.3
14.7
15.0
17.2
13.7
13.7
14.1
15.4
12.7
12.7
17.4
13.4
13.0
11.6
11.6
16.0
12.5
11.4
10.6
10.6
15.3
14.2
)1.4
14.0
10.0
9.7
9.8

11.8

11.2
12
10.5
10.5
11.2
9.9
9.9
10.2
11.3
9.8
9.2
9.2
10.6
9.1
9.4
8.6
8.6
10.1
8.3
8.9
8
8.0
9.4
7.6
8.6
8.1
7.4
8.0
7.4
8.8
7.0

25.01
24.97
24.24
22.86
23.9a
22.16
20.77
21.99
20.21
18.50
18.78
20.10
18.63
16.61
16.87
18.15
18.20
16.60
14.65
14.93
16.05
16.33
14.63
12.70
12.95
15.48
14.32
14.45
I 5.50
12.66
10.70
13.41

.-

5.35
5.25
4.12
5.11
3.79
3.73
4.96
3.48
3.52
5.08
5.18
3.34
4.11
5.16
5.26
3.01
3.20
4.04
5.22
5.34
2.84
3.15
4.03
5.29
5.41
2.83
2.84
3.17
2.81
4.02
5.37
3.05

3854.2
3540.0
3060.4
2723.9
2428.9
2359.8
2091.6

1933.2
1 8Q8.7
1793.3
1742.7
1543.2
1558.1
1444.2
1404.2
1350.7
1223.8
1171.3
1131.6
1094.8
I 020.0
965.3
887.0
863.3
836.3
754.1
779.0
751.9
699.5
654.8
638.7
607.7

Shape Factor

Modulns

4341.63
3986.66
3510.63
3066.29
2798.56
2711.98
2351.35
2228.16
2074.67
2030.95
I 955.03
1773.67
1760.59
1626.36
1556.33
1533.36
1401.35
1290.19
1268.69
1213.53
1176.18
1099.45
995.49
962.18
921.68
891.03
889.57
851.11
825.02
731.21
708.43
687.76

(z,z/z=)

(12)

1.1265
1.1262
1.1471
1.1257
1.1522
1.1492
1.1242
1.1526
1.147 I
1.1325
1.1218
1.1493
1.1300
1.1261
1.1155
1.1500
1.1451
1.1271
1.1212
1.1085
1.1498
1.1390
1.1223
1.1145
1.1021
1.1816
1.1421
1.1320
1.1794
1.1167
1.1092
1.1317

Table 46
Designistion

(1)

ISHB 250
lSMC 350
lSMB 300
[SLC 350
ISLB 300
ISHB 225
ISWB 250
ISHB 225
LSMC300
ISMB 250
ISLC 300
lSLB 275
ISHB 200
lSHB 200
ISWB 225
ISMC 250
ISMB 225
ISLB 250
ISLC 250
lSWB 200
ISMC 225
ISLC 225
ISLB 225
ISMB 200
ISHB 150
ISHB 150
ISHB 150
lSMC 200
ISLC 200
lSWB 175
lSLB 200
ISMB 175
ISMC 175
ISLC 175
lSLB 175
ISJB 225
ISJC 200
ISWB 150

Weight per
Metre

Sectional
Area

(Continued)

Depth of Section

Width of
Flange

Thickness of
Flange

Thickness of
Web

(D)

( b,)

(t,)

(tw)

f (rZ)

Plastic
Modulus

Shape Factor

(Zez)

(.%)

(zpz/ Zez)

Section
Modulus

Radii of Gyration

A
(r,)

kg/m

cm2

mm

mm

mm

mm

cm

cm

cm]

cm3

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(lo)

(11)

(12)

64.96
53.66
56.26
49.47
48.08
59.66
52.05
54.94
45.64
47.55
42.11
42.02
50.94
47.54
43.24
38.67
39.72
35.53
35.65
36.71
33.01
30.53
29.92
32.33
44.08
38.98
34.48
28.21
26.22
28.11
25.27
24.62
24.38
22.40
21.30
16.28
17.8
21.67

~50
350
300
350
300
225
250
225
300
250
300
275
200
200
225
250
225
250
250
200
225
225
225
200
150
150
150
200
200
175
200
175
175
175
175
225
200
150

250
100
140
100
150
225
200
225
90
125
100
140
200
200
150
80
110
125
100
140
80
90
100
100
150
150
150
75
75
125
100
90
75
75
90
80
70
100

618.9
571.9
573.6
532.1
488.9
487.0
475.4
469.3
424.2
410.5
403.2
392.4
372.2
360.8
348.5
305.3
305.9
297.4
295.0
262.5
239.5
226.5
222.4
223.5
218.1
205.3
194.1
181.9
172.6
172.5
169.7
145.4
139.8
131.3
125.3
116.3
116.1
111.9

678.73
672.19
651.74
622.95
554.32
542.22
527.57
515.82
496.77
465.71
466.73
443.09
414.23
397.23
389.93
356.72
348.27
338.69
338.11
293.99
277.93
260.13
254.72
253.86
251.64
232.52
215.64
211.25
198.77
194.20
184.34
166.08
161.65
150.36
143.30
134.15
133.12
126.86

1.0967
1.1754
1.1362
i.1707
1.1338
1.1134
1.1097
1.0987
1.1711
1.1345
1.1576
1.1305
1.1129
1.1010
1.1189
1.1684
1.1385
1.1388
1.1462
1.1200
1.1605
1.1485
1.1453
1.1358
1.1538
1.1326
1.1110
1.1614
1.1516
1.1258
1.1370
1.1422
1.1563
1.1452
1.1437
1.1535
1.1465
1.1337

51.0
*42. 1
*44.2
*38.8
*37.7
46.8
40.9
43.1
*35.8
37.3
*33.1
*33.O
40.0
37.3
33.9
*30.4
31.2
*27.9
28.0
28.8
*25.9
*24.O
*23.5
25.4
34.6
30.6
27.1
*22. 1
*20.6
22.1
*19.8
*19.3
19.1
*17.6
*16.7
12.8
13.9
17.0

9.7
13.5
12.4
12.5
9.4
9.1
9.0
9.1
13.6
12.5
11.6
8.8
9.0
9.0
9.9
14.1
11.8
8.2
10.7
9.0
12.4
10.2
8.6
10.8
9.0
9.0
9.0
11.4
10.8
7.4
7.3
8.6
10.2
9.5
6.9
5.0
7.1
7.0

6.9
8.1
7.5
7.4
6.7
8.6
6.7
6.5
7.6
6.9
6.7
6.4
7.8
6.1
6.4
7,1
6.5
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.4
5.8
5.8
5.7
11.8
8.4
5.4
6.1
5.5
5.8
5.4
5.5
5.7
5.1
5.1
3.7
4.1
5.4

10.91
13.66
12.37
13.72
12.35
9.58
10.69
9.80
11.81
10.39
1I .98
11.31
8.55
8.71
9.52
9.94
9.31
10.23
10.17
8.46
9.03
9.14
9.15
8.32
6.09
6.29
6.50
8.03
8.11
7.33
8.19
7.19
7.08
7.16
7.17
8.97
8.08
6.22

5.49
2.83
2.84
2.82
2.80
4.84
4.06
4.96
2.61
2.65
2.87
2.61
4.42
4.51
3.22
2.38
2.34
2.33
2.89
2.99
2.38
2.62
1.94
2.15
3.35
3.44
3.54
2.23
2.37
2.59
2.13
1.86
2.23
2.38
1.93
1.58
2.18
2.09

Table 46 (Concluded)
Designation

(1)

ISMC 150
ISMB 150
ISLC 150
ISLB 150
ISJC 175
ISJB 200
ISMB 125
ISMC 125
ISLB 125
ISJC 150
ISLC 125
ISJB 175
ISMB 100
ISJB 150
ISJC 125
ISMC 100
ISLB 100
ISLC 100
ISJC 100
ISMC 75
ISLB 75
ISLC 75

Weight per

Sectional

Metre

Area

Width of

Thickness of

Thickness of

Radii of Gyration

Flange

Flange

Web

(D)

( b,)

(?,)

(tw)

f (r,)

Depth of Section

Section
Modulus

(r,)

Plastic

Shape Factor

Modulus

(Zez)

(%)

(zpz/za)

kg/m

~m2

mm

mm

mm

mm

cm

cm

cm

cm]

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

6.11
6.18
6.16
6.17
7.11
7.86
5.20
5.07
5.19
6.9
5.11
6.83
4.00
5.98
5.18
4.00
4.06
4.06
4.09
2.96
3.07
3.02

2.21
1.66
2.37
1.75
1.88
1.17
1.62
1.92
1.69
1.73
2.05
0.97
1.05
1.01
1.60
1.49
1.12
1.57
1.42
1.21
1.14
1.26

119.82
110.48
106.17
104.50
94.22
90.89
81.85
77.15
73.93
72.04
65.45
64.22
41.68
49.57
49.08
43.83
38.89
38.09
28.38
24.17
22.35
20.61

1.1533
1.1401
1.1416
1.1384
1.1449
1.1639
1.1399
1.1585
1.1356
1.1472
1.1462
1.1799
1.1389
1.1556
1.1362
1.1750
1.1573
1.1576
1.1442
1.1904
1.1522
1.1710

16.4
14.9
14.4
14.2
11.2
*9.9
13.0
12.7
11.9
9.9
10.7
*8.1
8.9
*7.1
7.9
9.2
8.0
7.9
*5.8
6.8
6.1
*5.7

20.88
19.00
18.36
18.08
14.24
12.64
16.60
16.19
15.12
12.65
13.67
10.28
11.4
9.01
10.07
11.70
10.21
10.02
7.41
8.67
7.71
7.26

150
150
150
150
175
200
125
125
125
150
125
175
100
150
125
100
100
I 00
100
75
75
75

75
80
75
80
60
60
75
65
75
55
65
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
45
40
50
40

9.0
7.6
7.8
6.8
6.9
5.0
7.6
8.1
6.5
6.9
6.6
4.6
7.0
4.6
6.6
7.5
6.4
6.4
5.1
7.3
5.0
6.0

5.4
4.8
4.8
4.8
3.6
3.4
4.4
5.0
4.4
3.6
4.4
3.0
4,2
3.0
3.0
4.7
4.0
4.0
3.0
4.4
3.7
3.7

NOTE Sections having weight per metermarkedwith an asterik(*) may be chosen as the section is lighter having high ZPas compared to sections below it.

103.9
96.9
93.0
91.8
82.3
78.1
71.8
66.6
65.1
62.8
57.1
54.8
36.6
42.9
43.2
37.3
33.6
32.9
24.8
20.8
19.4
17.6

3
Oe
o
o
..
o
o
+

IS 800:2007
ANNEX

(Fioreword)
COMMITTEE
Structural Engineering

COMPOSITION

and Structural Sections Sectional Committee,

Representative(s)

Organization

DR V. KALYANARAMAN
(Chairman)

Indian Institute of Technology, Chennai

In personal capacity

t10.

Kankurgachi,

Bengal Engineering &

(P-244

CED 7

Scheme

Kolkata

Vi M, CIT Road,

SHRI A. BASU

(Former Cfsairmarr)

700054)

Science University, Howrah

DR SAIBALKUMARGHOSH
DR SUBRATACHACKRABORTY
(Alternate)

Bhillai Institute of Technology, Durg

DR MOHANG[JFTA

C. R. Narayana Rae, Chennai

DR C. N. SRINIVASAN

Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi

SHRI KARNAILSINGH

SHRI C. R. ARVIND (Alternafe)

SHRI S. K. ROY CHOWDHURY(Alternate)

Cemwd

Public Works Department, New Delhi

CHIEFENGINEER
SUPERINTENDING
ENGINEER(Ahernate)

Centre for High Technology, New Delhi

SHIU S. K. BAHAL

Central Water Commission, New Delhi

DIRECTOR,GATES DESIGN
SHRIA. K. BAJAI (Alternate)
SHRI S. GHOSH

Consulting Engineering Services India (Pvt) Ltd, New Delhi

SHRI S. K. HAZRA CHOWDHURY(Ahernare)

Construma Consultancy Pvt Limited, Mumbai

DR HARSHAVARDHAN
SUBBARAO

Development Commissioner for Iron & Steel Control, Kolkata

SHRI B. D. GHOSH

Direct&ate General of Supplies & Disposals, New Delhi

SHRI R. K. AGARWAL

Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, New Delhi

SHKi J. B. SHABMA

Engineers India Limited, New Delhi

SHRI V. Y. SALPEKAR

GAIL India Ltd, New Delhi

SHRI S. SHYAM SUNOER

Gammon India Limited, Mumbai

SHRI V. M. DHARAP

SHRI R. N. GUIN (Alfernafe)

SHRI S. K. AGARWAL(Alfernare)

SHRIYGGESHKUMAR SINGHAL(Alternate)

SHRIARVINDKUMAR (Alrernate)

SHRI M. V. JATKAR(Ahernate)
DR. J, MUKHOPADYAY

Hindalco Industries Limited, Mirzapur

SHRIAIAY KUMARAGARWAL(Alternate)

Hindustan Steel Works Construction Limited, Kolkata

SUPERINTENDING
ENGINEER
DEPUTYCHIEFENGINEER(Alternate)

Indian Institute of Technology, Chennai

DR SATISHKUMAR

Indian Oil Corporation, Noida

SHRI T. BANDYOPAOHYAY
SHRI P. V. RAIARAM (A[ternate)

T. K.

Institute of Steel Development & Growth (INSDAG), Kolkata

DR

Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata

SHRI P. B. VUAY

Jindal V[jaya Nagar Steel Limited, Bellary

DIRECTOR

Larsen & Toubro Limited, Chennai

SHRI T. VENKATESHRAO

M. N. Dastur & Company Pvt Limited, Kolkata

SHRI SATYAKISEN

Metallurgical & Engg Consultants Limited, Ranchi

GENERALMANAGER

Ministry of Road Transport & Highways (Rep. IRC), New Delhi

SECRETARYIRC

BANDYOPADHYAY

SHRIMATIM. F. FEBIN(Alternate)

SHRI PRATIPBHATTACHARYA
(Alternate)

SHRI K.

K. DE (Alternate)

DIRECTORlRC

141

(Alterna~e)

IS 800:2007
Organization

Represerrtacive(s)

Mumbai Port Trust, Mumbai

SUPERINTENDING
ENGINEER
EXECUTIVEENGINEER(Alternate)

National Thermal Power Corporation, Noida

DR

S. N.

MANDAL

SHRI R. K. GUPTA (Alferrrafe)

Northern Railway, New Delhi

REPRESENTATIVE

Oil and Natural Gas Commission, Dehradun

REPRESENTATIVE

Oil Industry Safety Directorate, New Delhi

SHRI S. K. NANDr

Research, Designs & Standards Organization, Lucknow

EXECUTIVEDIRECTOR

Rites Ltd, Gurgaon

SHRI SRINIVASAN

Steel Authority of India Limited, Ranchi

SHRI T. K. GHOSAL

DIRECTOR(Alternate)

SHRI R. M. CHATTOPADHYAY
(Ahernafe)

Steel Authority of India Limited, Bokaro

SHRI S. K. BANERJEE
SHRI SHYAMANAND TERIAR (Alrernate)

Steel Authority of India Limited, Bhilai

SHRI BHARATLAL

SHRI RANJANHALDAR(Alternate)

Steel Re-Rolling Mills Association of India, Kolkata

SHRI R, P. BHATIA
SHRIANIL KUMARJAVERI(Alterrrafe)
SHRI A. GHOSHAL

STUP Consultants Pvt Ltd, Kolkata

DR N. BANDOPADHYAY
(Alternate)

Structural Engineering Research Centre, Chennai

DR N. LAKSHMANAN
DR S. SEETHARAMAN (Alternate)

Vkakhapatnam Steel Project, Vkakhapatnam

SHRI U.

V.

SWAMY

Smu S. GHOSH (Alternate)

SHRIA. K. Sma, scientist F &Head

BIS Directorate General

[Representing Director General

(CED)

(Ex-@7icio

Member)]

K. Jm,scientist
F& Head (Former) (CED)
[Representing Director General (Ex-ojjicio Member)]

SHRI S.

Member

Secretaries

SHRI J. ROY CHOWDHURY

Scientist E (CED), BIS

SHRI S. CHATURVEDI

E (CED), BIS
(Former Member Secretary)
Scientist

SHRI AMAN

DEEP GARG

B (CED), BIS
(Former Member Secretary)
Scientist

Use of Structural

Steel in General Building Construction

Subcommittee,

Ministry of Railways, New Delhi

SHRI A. K. HARIT (Converser)

Bengal Engineering & Science University, Howrah

PROFESSOR &

Bharat Heavy Electrical

SHRI R. MATHtANNAL

Limited, Trichy

CED 7:2

HEAD

SHRI R. JEYAKUMAR(Alternate)

Braithwait & Company Limited, Hoogly

DEPUTY MANAGER
ASSISTANT MANAGER

C.

DR C. N.

R. Narayana Rae, Chennai

(Akerrrure)

SRINIVASAN

SHRI C. R. ARVIND(Alferrrafe)

Stwu A. K.

Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi

JAIN

SHRI PRAVEENVASISTH(Aherrrate)

142

Representative(s)

Orgcarizafion
Engineer-in-Chiefs
Engineers

Branch,

India Limited.

SHR! YOGESH KUMAR SINGHAL

New Delhi

SHRI ARWND KUMAR

New Delhi

SHRI S.

B.

JAIN (Alrernare)

Indian Institute of Technology,

New Delhi

HEAD

Indian Institute of Technology,

Kanpur

DR DURGESHC. RAI
DR C. V. R. MURTHY (Alternate)

Iustitute of Steel Development

and Growth

Jadavpur University,

(INSDAG),

DR T. K. BAN~YOPA~HYAY

Kolkata

PROF K.

Kolkata

Larsen & Toubro Limited,

M. N. Dastur Company

GHOSH

DR. K. NATARAJAN

Chennai

Pvt Limited,

K.

SHRI S. R. KULKARNI

Kolkata

SHRI SATYAKISEN
Metallurgical

& Engineering

Consultants

Limited,

(Alternate)

SHRJA. K. CHAKROBORTY

Ranchi

SHRI R. PRAMANIK (Alternate)

National

Thermal

Power Corporation,

SHRI R. K. GUPTA

Noida

SHRI BHARATROHRA (Alternate)

Prrblic Works Department,

Research,
Richardson

SHRI K. S. JANGDE

Mumbai

Designs and Standards Organization,

& Cruddas Limited,

Steel Authority

DIRECTOR

Lucknow

SHIU S. K. DATT~

Nagpur

Sttm S. K. BANERIEE

of India Ltd. Bokaro

SHRI SHYAMANAND T~RIAR (Alternate)

Structural Engineering

Research Centre,

DR D. S. RAMCHANDRAMURTHY

Chennai

SHRI G. S. PALANI (Alternafe)

Tata Iron & Steel Company

Limited,

SHRI S. N. GHATAK

Jamshedpur

SHRI K. S. RANGANATHAN
(Ahernafe)

Ad-hoc Group for Preparation

of Final Draft for Revision of IS 800

DR V. KALYANARAMAN

Indian Institute of Technology, Chennai

Institute of Steel Development

& Growth

(INSDAG),

DR T. K. BANDYOPADHYAY

Kolkata

143

Bureau of Indian Standards

BIS is a statutory institution
established
under the Bureau
harmonious development
of the activities of standardization,
and attending to connected matters in the country.

of Indian Standards Act, 1986 to promote

marking and quality certification
of goods

Copyright
BIS has the copyright of all its publications. No part of these publications may be reproduced in any form
without the prior permission
in writing of BIS. This does not preclude the free use, in the course of
implementing
the standard, of necessary details, such as symbols and sizes, type or grade designations.
Enquiries relating to copyright be addressed to the Director (Publications), BIS.
Review

of Indian

Standards

Amendments are issued to standards as the need arises on the basis

periodically; a standard along with amendments is reaffirmed when
needed; if the review indicates that changes are needed, it is taken
should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest amendments
BN Catalogue and Standards : Monthly Additions.

of comments. Standards are also reviewed

such review indicates that no changes are
up for revision. Users of Indian Standards
or edition by referring to the latest issue of

This Indian Standard has been developed from Doc : No. CED7(7182).

Amendments
Amend No.

Issued Since Publication

Date of Issue

Text Affected

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Headquarters

Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg, New Delhi 1 IO 002

Telephones : 232J 0131, 23233375,23239402
Regional Offices :

Telegrams : Manaksanstha
(Common to all offices)
Telephone

Central

: Manak Bhavan, 9 Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg

NEW DELHI 110002

Eastern

: 1/14 C.I.T. Scheme VII M, V. I. P. Road, Kankurgachi

KOLKATA 700054

Northern

: SCO 335-336, Sector 34-A, CHANDIGARH

Southern

: C.I.T. Campus, IV Cross Road, CHENNAI 600113

22541216,22541442
{ 22542519,22542315

Western

: Manakalaya, E9 MIDC, Marol, Andheri (East)

MUMBAI 400093

28329295,28327858
{ 28327891,28327892

Branches

: AHMEDABAD. BANGALORE. BHOPAL. BHUBANESHWAR.

COIMBATORE. FARIDABAD.
GHAZIABAD.
GUWAHATI. HYDERABAD.
JAIPUR. KANPUR. LUCKNOW. NAGPUR.
PARWANOO. PATNA. PUNE. RAJKOT. THIRUVANANTHAPURAM.
VISAKHAPATNAM.

23237617
{ 23233841

160022

23378499,23378561
{ 23378626,23379120
2603843
{ 2609285

Printedat Pral>hatOtlsetPrew. NewDelhi-2